JP6656678B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball is awarded to a starting port (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like can be performed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-202930 JP-A-2006-198339 JP-A-2006-182376

  However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problem, and has as its object to improve the interest of a game.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section show the correspondence with the embodiment described later in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A movable movable object having transparency,
An image display area capable of displaying an image,
The movable character is movable in front of the image display area,
By moving the movable character and the timer image displayed in the image display area in conjunction with each other, an interlocking effect in which the moving timer image is visible through the moving movable character can be visually recognized. executable der is,
After the interlocking effect, the timer image displayed at a predetermined position in the image display area via the movable role stopped at a predetermined position becomes visible, and the timer value of the timer image becomes a predetermined value. Later, the movable role and the timer image move in conjunction again,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the interest of a game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of indicators. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of a sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. It is a figure for explaining various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for explaining judgment tables T1-T4. It is explanatory drawing of the big hit type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation | variation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-saving time. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation | variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram of a power chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory view of a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. 9 is a flowchart of a main timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 pre-determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol changing process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of a special electric auditors product process. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of a V area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a reserved ball number process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of a sub timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 4 is a diagram for describing a configuration of a pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a fluctuation effect start process. It is an explanatory view of a key effect pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of a process during a fluctuation effect. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the state in which the 1st movable role object 14 moves. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable part 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 1st display effect of the 1st movable role object 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd display effect of the 1st movable role object 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display effect of a light guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable part 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 3rd movable part 18. It is a figure for explaining the next timer value display production A. It is a figure for explaining the next timer value display production B. It is a figure for explaining the next timer value display production C. It is a figure for explaining the next timer value display production D. It is a figure for explaining timer display number suggestion effect A. It is a figure for explaining timer display number suggestion effect B. It is a figure for explaining timer display number suggestion effect C. It is a figure for explaining timer display number suggestion effect D. It is a figure for explaining timer count effect A. It is a figure for explaining timer count effect B. It is a figure for explaining timer count effect C. It is a figure for explaining timer count effect D. It is a figure for explaining timer production A. It is a figure for explaining timer production B. It is a figure for explaining timer production C. It is a figure for explaining timer production D. It is a figure for explaining image transparent display effect A. It is a figure for explaining image transparent display production B. It is a figure for explaining image transparent display effect C. It is a figure for explaining image transparent display effect D. It is a figure for explaining image combination production A. It is a figure for explaining image combination production B. It is a figure for explaining image combination effect C. It is a figure for explaining image combination production D. It is a figure for explaining linked production A. It is a figure for explaining linked production B. It is a figure for explaining linked production C. It is a figure for explaining linked production D. It is a figure for explaining holding icon picture matching production A. It is a figure for explaining holding icon picture matching production B. It is a figure for explaining holding icon picture matching production C. It is a figure for explaining holding icon picture matching production D. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable role impact effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable role impact effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable role impact effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable role impact effect D. It is a figure for explaining hold display production A. It is a figure for explaining hold display production B. It is a figure for explaining hold display production C. It is a figure for explaining hold display production D. It is a figure for explaining zone effect A. It is a figure for explaining zone production B. It is a figure for explaining zone effect C. It is a figure for explaining zone production D. It is a figure for explaining cut-in effect A. It is a figure for explaining cut-in effect B. It is a figure for explaining cut-in effect C. It is a figure for explaining cut-in effect D. It is a figure for explaining decorative design change display effect A. It is a figure for explaining decorative design change display effect B. It is a figure for explaining decorative design change display production C. It is a figure for explaining decorative design change display effect D. It is a figure for explaining game state suggestion production A. It is a figure for explaining game state suggestion production B. It is a figure for explaining game state suggestion production C. It is a figure for explaining game state suggestion production D. It is a figure for explaining meter production A. It is a figure for explaining meter production B. It is a figure for explaining meter effect C. It is a figure for explaining meter production D. It is a figure for explaining related picture display production A. It is a figure for explaining related picture display production B. It is a figure for explaining related picture display production C. It is a figure for explaining related picture display production D. It is a figure for explaining battle effect A. It is a figure for explaining battle effect B. It is a figure for explaining battle effect C. It is a figure for explaining battle production D. It is a figure for explaining crack production A. It is a figure for explaining crack production B. It is a figure for explaining crack production C. It is a figure for explaining crack production D. It is a figure for explaining meter button production A. It is a figure for explaining meter button production B. It is a figure for explaining meter button production C. It is a figure for explaining meter button production D.

<First embodiment>
1. FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. Hereinafter, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in accordance with the left-right direction viewed from a player facing the gaming machine 1. The front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires a game ball based on a player's firing operation and, when the game ball wins a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is mounted inside the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. Have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, an effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the light guide plate 17 is disposed in the opening. The light guide plate 17 is a transparent flat plate member, through which the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized. The light guide plate 17 is configured to be able to display an image on a main surface thereof by irradiating light from an end face of the light guide plate 17. The image displayed by the light guide plate 17 will be described later.

  The handle 60 is disposed at a lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and fires a game ball with a firing strength corresponding to a rotation angle. The hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is disposed below the hit ball feeding tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball feeding tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged near the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect executed along with the progress of the game. The sword member 64 is an operation unit imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by a player at the time of an effect performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword. The sword button 65 is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect performed as the game progresses. You. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to execute two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform a sound effect during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided above the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be displaceable from a stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state protruding above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (navel) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , A gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), and a general winning An opening 29 (normal winning opening 29), an out opening 16, and an indicator 40 are provided.

  The game area 3 is an area in which game balls fired by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball fired by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A has a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 include a first effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), an effect symbol (decorative symbols) 8L, A second effect symbol display area in which other decorative symbols different from 8C and 8R are variably displayed, a reserved image display area in which reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a reserved digest image display in which reserved digest images 9C are displayed. And an area. The suspension images 9A and 9B are images representing suspension and are also referred to as suspension icons 9A and 9B. The reservation digest image 9C is an image representing the reservation, and is also referred to as the reservation image 9C or the reservation icon 9C. The hold icons 9A and 9B and the hold icon 9C are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The first effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. A middle effect design (medium decoration design) 8C is displayed in the middle design display area. In the right symbol display area, a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from “1” to “9”, for example. The fluctuation display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the fluctuation display of a first special symbol and a second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, according to a combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  For example, when a jackpot is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a slot number such as “777”. In the case of a loss, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a break such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. Note that the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling up and down or other modes. What combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect that displays the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as a "effect effect of the effect symbol", a "effect effect of the decorative symbol", or simply as a "effect effect". In addition, in the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in a period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop thereof (also referred to as a special symbol change period) is counted as one change effect (one cycle of change effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable effect of the decorative symbol.

  Further, the second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) not shown is displayed. In the middle symbol display area, a middle effect symbol (middle decoration symbol) not shown is displayed. In the right symbol display area, a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) not shown is displayed. The effect symbols displayed in the second effect symbol display area are the same as the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first effect symbol display area, and are smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is displayed.

  The image display device 7 can display, on the display screens 7a and 7b, a jackpot effect performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol change effect. . In the effect design fluctuation effect, in addition to the effect design, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 is capable of suggesting that the special symbol is fluctuating or indicating the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved images 9A in accordance with the number of stored first special figure reservations described later and a reserved image 9B in accordance with the stored number of second special figure reservations described later. And a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special figure reservation displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b will be described. Can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. The reserved digest image display area includes a reserved digest display area for displaying the reserved digest image 9C. The reserved digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently fluctuating on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b. 2 The fact that the special figure reservation is digested (to be described later, “digestion of special figure reservation”) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  A first movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable role 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided in front of the image display device 7. The first movable role object 14 is configured such that four plate-shaped members (movable light guide plates) can move in an oblique direction. Normally, the first movable role object 14 is stationary at the retreat positions (FIG. 1) at the four corners of the display device 7 and moves (progresses) diagonally from the retreat position toward the center of the display screen 7a. It can rest at the position (FIG. 47). The first movable role object 14 covers substantially the entire image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

  The center decorative body 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable second panel movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable role 15) is attached to the center decorative body 10. A third panel movable body 18 (third movable accessory 18) (not shown) is disposed on the back surface of the center decorative body 10. A stage 11 is formed below the center decorative body 10. The stage section 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage section 11 to a first starting port 20 described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 includes an entrance into which the game balls flow, and an exit through which the game balls flow, and causes the game balls flowing from the entrance to flow out to the stage unit 11 from the exit.

  The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 and has a first starting port (a first starting winning port, a first ball) where the ease of entering a game ball does not always change. Mouth, fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger of the lottery of the first special symbol (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is a trigger for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

  The normal variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting port 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting port (second starting winning port, second ball input port, variable starting port) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is a trigger of the lottery of the second special symbol (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric tube solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. Note that the electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter a ball.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow game balls to pass therethrough. The passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger of the ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether to open the electric chew 22 or not. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 usually triggers acquisition of symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) and determination of hits.

  Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is determined in advance. This is a process of determining whether or not a big hit has occurred by comparing with a value corresponding to the “big hit”. The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but a variation display of the special symbol is performed on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. After a lapse of time, a special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the lottery result is notified to the player. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbols is performed, and the result of the jackpot lottery is more effectively notified to the player by the symbol matching game.

  In addition, “lottery of ordinary symbols” means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for ordinary symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. Is a process of determining whether or not a hit has occurred. With respect to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, performs a variation display of the ordinary symbol, and performs a predetermined variation. When the time has elapsed, the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lighted or extinguished), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is disposed on the upper right of the first starting port 20 in the game area 3, and has a first big winning port (first special winning port) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first special winning opening 30 is provided with an opening / closing member (first special winning opening / closing member) 32 that allows or impedes the reception of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first special winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). When the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the first large winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter.

  The first big winning device 31 includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , A first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening / closing member 71, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions in the first big winning device 31 through which game balls passing through the first big winning opening 30 can pass. . The first special winning opening sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects a winning of a game ball to the first special winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39, and detects the passage of a game ball to the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V region 70, and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. The first state (rotating state) of distributing to the V region 39 is obtained, and the second state (stop state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V region 70 at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. . The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing a game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it is in a retreat state (first state) where game balls are distributed to the V region 39, and when the V-opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, an advance state where game balls are distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state). In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball to the V region 39 is a trigger for shifting to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a positive change operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a positive change operation port. The first special winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first special winning device discharge sensor (not shown) for counting the number of game balls discharged from the first special winning device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

  The second big winning device (the second attacker, the second special variable winning device) 36 is disposed at the upper right of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (the second special winning opening) 35. It has. The second special winning opening 35 is provided with an opening / closing member (a second special winning opening opening / closing member, a movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second winning port solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). When the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter.

The general winning opening 27 is provided below the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided at a lower portion of the game area 3, and discharges a game ball that has not won any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. The details of the indicators 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30.

  The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. A method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called “left hit”. On the other hand, the method of hitting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called “right hit”. In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting opening 20 by left-handing. On the other hand, it is configured so that the player can aim at passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 by right-handing.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , A general-purpose hold display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The ordinary symbol display 42 variably displays the ordinary symbols. The first special figure reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operations (first special figure reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special figure display 43b displays the stored number of operation hold (second special figure hold) of the second special symbol display 41b. The general symbol holding display 44 displays the number of operation symbols (normal symbol holding) stored in the normal symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when a game ball is awarded to the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as “special symbols”. In addition, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

  The special symbol display 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then displays the special symbol (stop) to thereby perform a lottery based on a winning in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (a lottery per special symbol). , Jackpot lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (the special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable symbol and the stopped symbol) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first large winning opening 30 is formed in an open pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed (winning jackpot type). Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) for opening the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later) is won, the left and right, such as "OOOOOOOO" (O: ON, OFF: OFF) , 5th and 6th are displayed with the big hit symbols lit. In the case of a loss, a loss pattern in which only the rightmost LED is turned on, such as "●●●●●●● ○", is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as the losing symbol may be adopted. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variable time. In the variation display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when there is a prize (entering ball) of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as a jackpot random number acquired for the prize is obtained. Are temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a prize in the first opening 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85 a (FIG. 5) as a first special figure reservation, and if it is a prize in the second starting opening 21. Are stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is set for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is digested when a special symbol based on the special figure reservation can be variably displayed. The “extinguishment of special figure reservation” refers to determining a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and executing variable display of a special symbol for indicating the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be immediately performed after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if there is a prize during the middle game or during the execution of the special game, the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of special figure reservations.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 displays the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by variably displaying (variable display) the normal symbols and then displaying the stopped symbols. The normal symbol which is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol which is stopped and the normal symbol which is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol of a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Is performed. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

  The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays an ordinary symbol according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery according to its lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a winning, a normal winning symbol in which both LEDs are turned on is displayed, such as “（” (点灯: turned on, ●: turned off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss pattern in which only the right LED is lit, such as “● ○”, is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is changed and displayed for a predetermined change time. In the variation display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped (lighted display in a specific mode), and may be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the ordinary symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the general figure storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once stored. There is an upper limit to the number of general-purpose reservations that can be stored in the general-purpose reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The general figure hold stored in the general figure hold storage area 86 is exhausted when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the ordinary symbol hold refers to determining a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol hold and executing variable display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passing, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the ordinary symbol and during the execution of the auxiliary game, the prize is won. Even in the case where there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage up to the predetermined number. The number of general-purpose reservations is displayed on the general-purpose reservation display 44. The general-purpose reservation indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general-purpose reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of general-purpose reservations.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 on the main control board side. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 on the sub-control board side. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 ( 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls a game profit such as a jackpot lottery or a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board for performing control relating to an effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

  The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 storing a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 executing a program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of a storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data to and from another board via an input / output circuit (I / O port) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives a signal output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first special winning opening sensor 30a, a second special winning opening sensor 35a, and a V region. The sensor 39a, the non-V region sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chuck solenoid 24, the first winning port solenoid 33, the second winning port solenoid 38, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has won the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28, and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won the first special winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball passing through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball passing through the non-V region 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed inside the normal winning opening 29. The electric tube solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric tube 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening and closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening and closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

  The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, an ordinary symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, a second special symbol reservation display 43b, and a general symbol reservation. The display of the display 44 is controlled.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected with a prize ball payout device 120, a ball lending device 130, and a card unit 135, and a firing device 112 is connected via a firing control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out a prize ball. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental device 130 pays out a ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball-lending motor 131 of the ball-lending-payout apparatus 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 and pays out a ball rental. The paid-out ball rental is detected by the ball-ball rental sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information relating to ball lending based on information on the inserted prepaid card or the like. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. The firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the rotation amount of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115 when the player operates the handle 60. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  The sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a non-illustrated unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction regulating unit is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

  The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls a game effect of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the program stored in the sub-ROM 93. And a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls display of the image display device 7 (the first image display device 7A and the second image display device 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. The ROM 103 stores, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, and the like. ) And background image data. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

  A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 performs voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. And so on. Sound data such as sound output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM, and may store sound data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the third movable role 18 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. I do. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and determines the light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The frame lamp 66 includes an LED that irradiates the end surface of the light guide plate 17 with light, and displays an image on the main surface (image display area) of the light guide plate 17 by causing the LED to emit light. The board lamp 5 includes an LED for irradiating the end surface of the movable light guide plate of the first movable role 14 with light. By causing the LED to emit light, the main surface (image display area) of the movable light guide plate is illuminated. Display the image. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable auditors 14, the second movable auditors 15, and the third movable auditors 18 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable auditors 14, the second movable auditors 15, and the third movable auditors 18, and creates the operation pattern data. Control the operation of these movable objects in accordance with The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute the lighting control of the lamp and the operation control of the movable objects 14, 15, and 18 based on the command. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data relating to a light emission pattern or an operation pattern.

  The effect button detection switch 63a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided above the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed down, a touch sensor provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when a human body comes into contact. It may be connected.

3. Data Structure of Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

  The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A) stores a big hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a big hit type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. A judgment table T6, an electric chew opening pattern judgment table T7, a special winning opening opening pattern judgment table T8, and a V opening / closing member opening pattern judgment table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in a main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) has a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reserved storage area 85, and a general figure reserved storage. An area 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit to the sub control unit is set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes a pre-determination command, a pending ball count command, A change start command, a change stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V pass command, a customer waiting standby command, and the like are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in a main control main process (described later), and includes a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, A V flag, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag, and the like are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main processing (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability change counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set therein. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which a status in a special operation process described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth first special figure reservations, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b stores first random number groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth second special figure reservations, respectively. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The general figure holding storage area 86 stores a random number group (holding information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth general figure holdings. Storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area. In the main RAM 84, in addition to the above-mentioned area, a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable characters 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. A driving data buffer and the like are provided.

  The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in a sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. Specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit is stored in the sub-control main processing (described later), and includes a pre-determination command, a pending ball count command, a change start command, and a change A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V pass command, a customer waiting standby command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set ( Output buffer), in which a fluctuation effect start command, a fluctuation end command, a fluctuation effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in a sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main processing (described later) is set, and includes a random number counter, a first special figure holding effect counter, a second special figure holding effect counter, and a general figure holding effect counter. , A probability change effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, and the like are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows random numbers obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows random numbers obtained by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. I have. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a “big hit random number”, a “big hit random number”, a “reach random number”, a “variation pattern random number”, and a “normal symbol random number (per random number)” at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery determination (big hit determination) as to whether or not a big hit occurs, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used in the lottery of the big hit type (big hit type determination) and takes a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “reach random number” is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect design fluctuation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is a loss, and a value in a range of 0 to 127 Take. The reach is a state in which one of the plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols) that are variably displayed is the remaining one, and depends on which of the variably displayed effect symbols is stopped and displayed. Means a state of a combination of effect symbols indicating a jackpot winning (for example, a state of “7 ↓ 7”). The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if swinging in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in a range from 0 to 127. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Normally, the design random number takes a value in a range from 0 to 255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on a ball entering the starting port (the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21). The random number group acquired based on the ball entering the first opening 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group acquired based on the ball entering the second opening 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “ordinary symbol random number (per random number)” is acquired based on the passage through the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire “prefetch effect random number” and “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “prefetch effect random number” is a random number used to determine a prefetch effect at the time of a variable effect, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “chance-up random number” is a random number used for determining a chance-up effect at the time of a variable effect, and takes a value in a range of 0 to 127. The “prefetch effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the preliminary determination command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance-up random number” is obtained based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. Is a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D is a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 indicates whether the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the acquired jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a “big hit” or a “loss”. This is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined to be “jackpot”, and the jackpot random number value is a value other than “0 to 164 (165 to 65535). In the case of ")", it is indicated that the determination is "losing". In addition, in the “high probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 649”, it is determined to be “jackpot”, and when the jackpot random number value is “a value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)”. Is determined to be "losing". The contents of the “normal probability state” and the “high probability state” will be described later.

  The reach determination table T2 indicates that the reach random number (any of 0 to 127) obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to “reach present” or “reach no”. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether or not the data is stored. In FIG. 8B, in the “non-time saving state”, when the reach random number is “0 to 13”, it is determined that “reach is present” and the reach random number is “a numerical value other than 0 to 13 (14 to 13). 127)), it is indicated that it is determined that there is no reach. Further, in the “time reduction state”, when the reach random number is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “reach is present”, and when the reach random number is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”, Is determined to be "no reach". The contents of the “time reduction state” and the “non-time reduction state” will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is more difficult to reach at the time of loss than in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. This is because the speed of digesting the suspension of the special figure is increased by selecting more losing without reach having a short fluctuation time in the time reduction state.

  The ordinary symbol hit determination table T3 indicates that the acquired ordinary symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to “hit” or “loss” in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether to perform. In FIG. 8C, in the “non-time saving state”, when the ordinary symbol random number is “0 to 2”, it is determined to be “hit”, and the ordinary symbol random number is set to a value other than “0 to 2 (3 ２５255) ”indicates that it is determined to be“ losing ”. In addition, in the “time reduction state”, when the ordinary symbol random number is “0 to 254”, it is determined to be “hit”, and when the ordinary symbol random number is “a value other than 0 to 254 (255)”, , "Losing".

  The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine how many seconds the fluctuation time of the normal symbol depends on the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is a table that is referred to. In FIG. 8 (D), when in the “non-time saving state”, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be “30 seconds”, and in the “time reduction state”, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be “1 second”. It has been shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 indicates that the jackpot type and the special symbol are determined by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) in accordance with the jackpot type random number (any of 0 to 127) acquired. It is a table that is referred to to determine “type”. In FIG. 9, when the random number value of the jackpot type is “0 to 24” when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV passing planned jackpot”, and The stop symbol of No. 1 (the special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the random number value of the jackpot type is “25 to 49”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “big hit symbol 2”. When the jackpot type random number value is “50 to 55”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “big hit symbol 3”. If the random number value of the jackpot type is “56 to 67”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “big hit symbol 4”. When the jackpot type random number value is “68 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. On the other hand, if the random number value of the jackpot type is “0 to 82” when the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is won, the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV passing scheduled jackpot”, and The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the random number value of the jackpot type is “83 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot”, and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be “big hit symbol 5”. By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, "opening (OP) command" of special game, "round designation command", "ending (ED)" Command "can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV scheduled passing jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" It will be described later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in a main control main process (described later) in order to determine a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random number (0 to 127). . In FIG. 10, for example, when the first starting port 20 is won in the non-time saving state, “losing” is determined in the jackpot determination table T 1, “reach is determined” in the reach determination table T 2, and the number of reserved balls is “1”. ２2 ”, and when the variation pattern random number is“ 0 to 60 ”, the variation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in the time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines “big hit”, the jackpot type determination table T5 determines “16RV passing expected big hit”, and the variation pattern random number value. Indicates that the variation pattern is determined to be “P61”. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching, it is also determined whether the reach is a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect in which the fluctuation time after reach is longer than that of normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, the program is executed evolving through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-run.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric tube opening pattern determination table T7. The electric-chu opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 in the main control main process (described later) according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state). Table to be referenced. In FIG. 12A, when in the “non-time saving state”, the open pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be “open pattern 11”, and when in the “time reduction state”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 12”. It has been shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, the opening time being 2.0 seconds per time, and the interval (opening interval) being 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, up to 10), even if the opening time remains.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the main control main process (described later), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 30 according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). 35 is a table referred to to determine the 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. , And when the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”, “15H”, and “22H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 22”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “13H”, the open pattern is opened. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be “open pattern 23”. FIG. 13B shows the contents of the open pattern 21, the open pattern 22, and the open pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th R and the opening time is 29.5 seconds, and once at the 14th and 16th R, The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) for one opening number and the opening time of 29.5 seconds at the 1st to 13th Rths, and once at the 14th and 16th Rths, the opening number is set to one opening time. The second big winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second, and the first big winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) once at the 15th round and the opening time is 0.1 second at the 15th round. . In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 is opened (long open) for one opening number and the opening time of 29.5 seconds at the 1st to 13th and 15th Rths, and once at the 14th round, the opening number is set to one opening time. The second big winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 second, and the second winning opening 35 is opened (long opening) once at 16R and the opening time is 29.5 seconds at 16R. . However, the opening of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is performed when a predetermined number of game balls are won (specified winning number, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains. Will be closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member release pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). Table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “open pattern 31”, and the special figure stop symbol is used. When the data is “13H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 32”, and when the special figure stop symbol data is “14H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 33” and the special figure stop symbol data is determined. It is shown that when “15H” or “22H”, the open pattern is determined to be “open pattern 34”. FIG. 14B shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth R, when the first winning prize port 30 has the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 for 0.1 second is short-opened. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize hole 30 has the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 second, and when the second prize is opened. Long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 for a maximum of 31.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 32, at the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth Rs, when the first winning prize port 30 has a first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 second. At the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first winning prize port 30 has a first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 second, and when there is a second prize, the opening time is open. Long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 for a maximum of 31.5 seconds is performed. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th R, when the first winning prize port 30 receives the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 for an opening time of 0.1 second is short-opened to win the second prize. Then, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened for an opening time of 31.5 seconds at the maximum. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first winning prize port 30 has the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, at the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, when the first winning prize port 30 has the first prize, the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 second. .

4. Description of jackpots and the like In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losing" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When the big hit is won, the big win prize mouth (the first big win prize mouth 30 and the second big win prize mouth 35) is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (the type of the big hit) stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is completed. I have. Each round game is started by the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and is ended by the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The jackpot types are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of the big hits are roughly classified into two types, a “scheduled V passing big hit” and a “scheduled non-V passing big hit”. The “V pass planned jackpot” is to operate the open / close member 32, the open / close member 37, and the V open / close member 71 in an open pattern (scheduled V pass open pattern) in which a game ball can pass to the V region 39 during the big hit game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot whose special figure stop symbol data is 11H to 14H and 21H corresponds to “scheduled V passage jackpot (probable variable jackpot)”. The combination of the opening patterns of the opening and closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 are (open pattern 21: open pattern 31) and (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). ) Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V region 39 during the big hit game. The “V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)” is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which a game ball cannot pass to the V region 39 during the jackpot game (opening member 32, opening / closing member 37 and This is a big hit for operating the V opening / closing member 71. Here, the big hits of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the “V non-passing scheduled big hit”. When the combination of the opening patterns of the opening / closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 22: open pattern 34), the V region is set during the big hit game. The passage of the game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 serves as both the V-passing scheduled opening pattern and the V-non-scheduled opening pattern.

  The “scheduled V-passing jackpot” includes “scheduled 16RV passing jackpot”, “16R (substantially 13R) V-scheduled jackpot”, and “16R (substantially 15R) V-scheduled jackpot”. The “16RV passing planned jackpot” has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second special winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), so that the V opening / closing member 71 can easily pass to the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30.

  The “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” has a total round number of 16R, but a substantial total round number of 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R. Even at 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Accordingly, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and the round in which the prize ball cannot be expected is formed. In other words, “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” is a substantial 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), so that the V opening / closing member 71 can easily pass to the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30.

  The “16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot” has a total round number of 16R, but a substantial total round number of 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in the 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in the “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot”, 14R is a round in which the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short and a prize ball cannot be expected. In other words, “16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot” is a substantial 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), so that the V opening / closing member 71 can easily pass to the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30.

  The “scheduled V non-passing jackpot” is the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot” of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the substantial total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in the 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R. Even at 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected. In other words, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a substantial 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R, and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34). It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

  As is clear from the above description, the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 13R) V planned passing jackpot" are the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 ( The opening patterns of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) are the same (open pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (open pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, the “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” and the “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot” are set so that the time-saving game (100 times in this example) is performed after the end of the jackpot game. Has become. That is, in the case of “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot”, it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30, and the game state after the jackpot is It becomes the low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” allows the game ball to easily pass to the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30 and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time-saving state (highly accurate high base state). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” and “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot”, and the game state after the jackpot is low. It is difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low-accuracy high-base state) or the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state) occurs. Further, after the time-saving game is over, the gaming state becomes the low-probability low-base state (normal state) in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot" and the gaming state in "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled to pass". However, it is apparently a high-accuracy low-base state of a normal state. That is, in the case of “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot”, when a game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30, when the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state becomes The fact that the probability is high while being in the high-probability low-base state is a latent state (latency-probable state), and it is difficult for the player to determine the latent-probability state. That is, a low-probability time-saving state after a jackpot game of “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot”, “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot”, and “16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” (low accuracy) High-probability time-saving state (high-probability high-base state) after the jackpot game of "high base state" and "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled to pass" The later low-probability low-base state and the high-probability low-base state after the end of the time-saving of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to determine.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for the planned V passing jackpot and 60/128 for the V non-passing scheduled jackpot. 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for the planned V-pass, and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for the non-V-scheduled. 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, a jackpot in which a game ball is won in the second starting port 21 is performed rather than a jackpot in which the gaming ball is won in the first starting port 20 (lottery of the first special symbol). The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of gaming state A gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute “probability variation control” and “variation time reduction control” for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol indicator 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing probability variation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a “high probability state (high accuracy state, probability variation state, probability variation state)”, and the probability variation An uncontrolled state is simply referred to as a “normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)”. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state, as the probability variation control of the special symbol. By performing the hit jackpot determination, a high probability state is realized. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher jackpot probability than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 performs the probability variation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 uses the special symbol display as compared with the case where the probability variation control is not performed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a big hit symbol increases.

  Further, a state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 to reduce the variation time is referred to as a “time reduction state”, and a state in which the variation time reduction control is not performed is simply referred to as a “non-time reduction state”. That. In the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11), which is set so that the fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is selected more in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. The variation pattern used is determined. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is more variable than when the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. A short fluctuation time is easily selected as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation is accelerated, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, a jackpot can be aimed at with a smooth progress of the game. Note that the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the normal symbol in the time reduction state, and does not execute the control in the non-time reduction state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the normal symbol hit determination table T3 () in which the number of normal symbol random numbers (hit random values) determined to be a hit is greater in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state as the probability variation control of the normal symbol. Using FIG. 8 (C), a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time reduction state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control on the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 uses the ordinary symbol display 42 as compared with the case where the probability variation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the ordinary symbol will be a hit symbol increases. In the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the symbol is usually shorter than in the non-time reduction state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time reduction state, but is 1 second in the time reduction state (FIG. 8D). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time reduction state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time reduction state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, As compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball wins the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of award balls to the number of launch balls, increases. Therefore, a state in which these controls are being executed is called a “high base state”, and a state in which these controls are not being executed is called a “low base state”. In the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without greatly reducing the number of game balls on hand. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning in the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above-described controls. That is, among the probability variation control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the variation time reduction control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Executing one or more controls only needs to make opening of the electric tube 22 easier than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V passage scheduled jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. . This game state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate high base state” or a “highly accurate time reduction state”. Specifically, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes the high-probability / high-base state is, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, “16RV passing planned jackpot”, “16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot”, “ 16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot ". The "16RV passing planned jackpot" and the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are in the high-precision high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (the next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. To end. The “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” is a high-accuracy high-base state in which a special symbol is repeatedly displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, and the high-accuracy low-base state (latency probability change). State), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed to end the game.
In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (there is almost no case). State, that is, a state with a low probability), a time saving state, and a high base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a “low-probability high-base state” and a “low-probability time-saving state”. Specifically, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the low-probability / high-base state is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9. In this jackpot, the low-probability-high base state is such that a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) of a special symbol is variably displayed after the jackpot game, or the next jackpot (the next jackpot) is won to win the jackpot. The game ends when the game is executed.
When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after power-on is a normal probability state, a non-saving time state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is particularly referred to as a “low-probability low-base state”. The low-probability low-base state may be referred to as a “normal game state” or a “low-probability non-reduction state (also simply referred to as a non-reduction state)”. In addition, a state where a special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a “special game state (big hit game state)”. Further, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state may be referred to as a “specific game state”.

  In the high base state such as the high certainty base state or the low certainty base state, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by making the game ball enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handing. The electric support control makes it easier for the electric chew 22 to be opened than in the low base state, and makes it easier to win the second starting opening 21 than to win the first starting opening 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed right through the gate 28, which is a trigger of the normal symbol lottery, so that the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 21. As a result, a larger number of start winnings (winning to the starting opening) can be obtained than when the player hits left. Note that the gaming machine 1 performs a right-handed game even during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game advantageously by making the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handing. Since the power support control is not executed, the power chute 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to win the first opening 20 than to win the second opening 21. It is because it is. For this reason, in the low base state, the player hits the first starting port 20 with a left ball to win a game ball. As a result, a larger number of start winnings can be obtained than when the player hits right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like appearing in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / fail determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / precedence determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing a main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs an initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. Note that the initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs a normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (step S003). In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the various random number counter values (the jackpot random number value, the jackpot type random number value, the reach random number value, the variation pattern random number value) shown in FIG. , An ordinary symbol random number value) by one and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While the interruption is permitted, the execution of the main-side timer interruption processing (step S005) becomes possible. The main-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 msec). That is, the main-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, at intervals of 4 msec). Then, from the end of the main-side timer interrupt processing to the next start of the main-side timer interrupt processing, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main-side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: Step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. This random number updating process is the same as the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during the other period (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process). And both.

  After the random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the types of winning ports to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a first winning opening sensor 30a, a second winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a starting port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V region sensor detection process (step S106), a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is sequentially executed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the processing of the number of retained balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an output process (step S108). In the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in the above-described processing to the sub-control board 90. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special figure reservation display 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold display 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection processing (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally reserved symbols is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol holding balls is the number of ordinary symbol holdings, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of ordinary symbol holdings. If the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls is equal to or less than "3" (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls (step S203), and then an ordinary symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the ordinary symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label -TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in the first to the first symbols in the ordinary figure holding storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol reserved balls.

  In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If a game ball has not been won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball has won (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special figure 2 reserved balls is the number of second special figure reserved, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of second special figure reserved. If the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reserved ball count is equal to or less than “3” (step S206: NO), after adding “1” to the special figure 2 reserved ball count (step S207), a special figure 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S207). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label) -TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label -TRND-T1). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (prior determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for a special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18) described later. Is memorized (held). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 pre-determination process will be described later.

  In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has been won at the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), the present process is terminated. When a game ball has won the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S210). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 reserved balls is the number of first special figure reservations, and more specifically, is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of first special figure reservations. If the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is “4” (step S211: YES), this processing is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is equal to or less than "3" (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), and then a special figure 1 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, similarly to the above-described special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (prior determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 19) described later. It is memorized (held). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination processing (step S214). The details of the special figure 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), the present process is terminated. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the advance determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by a special figure 2 related random number obtaining process (FIG. 17: step S208). I do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a preliminary determination as to whether or not a big hit has occurred using the big hit determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the big hit random value. Here, since the game is in the high-probability state (the probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high-probability state (the big hit determination value is “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. Refer to the jackpot to determine in advance. In other words, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “649”, it is determined in advance as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance as “loss”. In the present embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. However, in another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. The preliminary determination may be performed by using the jackpot determination table.

  If the result of the jackpot pre-judgment is “losing” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-judgment is “big hit” (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type pre-judgment (step S305). In the jackpot type preliminary determination, first, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a prior determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). In this case, even if the random number value of the jackpot type is any of “0” to “127”, it is determined in advance as “16RV passing planned jackpot”. In the present embodiment, the advance determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. However, in another embodiment, the advance determination is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. The preliminary determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a fluctuation pattern advance determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 firstly obtains a fluctuation pattern random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the advance judgment buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S208). And, obtain a reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state is set (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state (FIG. 11), A fluctuation pattern is specified from the reach presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random number value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may be different depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, based on the jackpot pre-judgment result and the reach pre-judgment pre-judgment result, the losing with reach is pre-judged, and when the variation pattern random number value is “60”, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls to “1-2”. ”, The selected variation pattern“ P64 ”and the selected variation pattern“ P68 ”when the number of reserved balls is“ 3 to 4 ”are selected. In the present embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later. However, as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 is used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the above.

  In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result, a jackpot type pre-judgment result in the case of a hit, and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this processing.

[Special figure 1 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the advance determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination in advance with reference to the normal probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S401). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number obtaining process (FIG. 17: step S213). I do. Next, in this case, since the normal probability state (the probability change flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the normal probability state table (the big hit determination value is “0” to “164”) in the big hit determination table T1. )) To determine in advance whether it is a jackpot or not. In other words, when the jackpot random number value is from “0” to “164”, it is determined in advance as “big hit”, and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance as “losing”. Note that the jackpot determination may use a jackpot determination table different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chew 22 is not operating (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the symbol is normally changing (step S502). If the ordinary symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the ordinary symbol is not fluctuating (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S503: YES), the present process is terminated. If the number of retained balls is one or more (step S503: NO), the number of normally retained symbols is decremented by one (step S504). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol being “0”, the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol once becomes “1” in step S203 of the start-up sensor detection processing (FIG. 17). , And the reservation is exhausted in the present step S504, and the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol immediately becomes "0". This is the same for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start-up opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols temporarily becomes “1”, and thereafter, in steps S1404 and S1404 in a special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted, and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes “0”. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). More specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines a normal symbol random number value (as a determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the general-figure hold) of the general-figure hold storage area 86. Per random number). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time saving state) and the normal symbol hit determination table T3. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is “0” to “2”, it is determined to be “hit”, and when the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is determined to be “losing”. (See FIG. 8C).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines a game state (whether or not it is a time-saving state), and uses the result of the game state determination and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 to change the ordinary symbol variation. Select the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D). . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern to start the variation display of the ordinary symbol (step S507).

  In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol change time has elapsed and the game has ended. The variation time of the ordinary symbol is the variation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuating time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuating display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is "losing", (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the hit determination is "hit" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines a game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 to determine an open pattern of the electric chew 22. Select Here, “open pattern 11” is selected in the non-time saving state, and “open pattern 12” is selected in the time saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the operation of the electric tuner in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends the processing.

  In the above-mentioned step S501, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the winning number of the electric chew 22 has reached a predetermined maximum winning number (for example, six) or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is to be closed. Either of the things that have come is fulfilled. The operation time of the electric chew 22 is an operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and executes this processing. Finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status", Called "2", "3", "4". When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a jackpot determination, a change pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, a change stop command is output after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination processing, an output of an opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric accessory process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting port 21 is stored. If there is no storage, the process moves to step S1407. When the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the change pattern selection processing, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b to the side where the storage location is read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If there is, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above-mentioned steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which the reservations are retained. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. The image is shifted to the reserved digestion image display area side and displayed as the reserved digestion image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are respectively located on the left side. Shift by one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 change start process (step S1406). In the special figure 2 change start process, a change start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the change display of the second special symbol is started, and a change time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection processing is set in the fluctuation time timer. Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2”. The change start command (special figure 2 change start command) set in the special figure 2 change start processing includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit determination processing (step S1402) and the change pattern selection processing (step S1402). Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on the fluctuation time) is included.

  In step S1401, if the special figure 2 reserved ball count is “0” (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 1 reserved ball count is “0” (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved special figure 1 balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number group acquired due to the winning at the first starting port 20 is stored. If there is no storage, the process moves to step S1413. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection processing, the special figure 1 reserved ball count is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side where they are read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special drawing reservation is digested in the order of reservation. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. The image is shifted to the reserved digestion image display area side and displayed as the reserved digestion image 9C. Also, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are respectively located on the right side. Shift by one (FIG. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special figure reservation has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 change start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 change start process, a change start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the change display of the first special symbol is started, and a change time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection processing is set in the fluctuation time timer. Also, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “2” (step S1406). The change start command (special figure 1 change start command) set in the special figure 1 change start processing includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit determination processing (step S1408) and the change pattern selection processing (step S1408). Information about the fluctuation pattern (including information about the fluctuation time) set in step S1409) is included.

  When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is “0” in step S1407 (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may make the determination based on, for example, ON / OFF of a demonstration screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this processing ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the special symbol change display based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is “0”. In other words, the second special figure reservation is consumed prior to the first special figure reservation. According to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, a lottery based on the second special figure reservation has a greater profit for the player than a lottery based on the first special figure reservation (scheduled V passage). It is easy to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The big hit determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the big hit determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same processing flow, and therefore will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probable change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probable change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), a jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the big random number stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure holding first storage area) of the second special figure holding storage area 85b is read. In the special jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure holding first storage area) of the first special figure holding storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game is a big hit using the big hit determination table T1 to be referred to and the big random number value. Here, since the state is in the high-probability state (the probability change flag is ON), it is determined whether or not a big hit is determined based on the table for the high-probability state (big hit determination values “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. judge.

  If the probability change flag is OFF in step S1501 (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination with reference to the normal probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (FIG. 8). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), the jackpot determination is performed based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Determine whether or not.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the big hit flag (step S1506) and determines the big hit type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the special jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the big hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the special jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the random number value of the jackpot type stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the determination of the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is “losing” in step S1503 or step S1505, the special figure stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). Then, the present process ends.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
FIGS. 24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection processing, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the employee is in the time reduction state is made based on whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When it is not the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1602). If the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the big hit flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit is the special map 2 (step S1603). If the big hit is the special map 2 (step S1603: YES), the process is skipped to step S1605 because the big hit type is always the planned V passing big hit. When the big hit is the special map 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the big hit type is the planned V passing big hit (step S1604), and determines the big hit type in the main RAM 84. This is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

  If the jackpot type is the planned V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time-saving state V-passing scheduled jackpot table in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to change the jackpot. A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a variation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first storage area) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of Toku-zu, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first toku-zu of special toku-zu) is stored in the first toku-zu pending storage area 85a. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V passage scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to the V-pass scheduled jackpot in the non-time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in FIG. To "P3", and the variation pattern in FIG. 2 is "P21" to "P23" (address is set). From the read variation pattern random numbers, one of “P1” to “P3” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu, and any of “P21” to “P23” is selected in Toku-zu.

  When the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, a variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”) in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

  If the big hit flag is OFF in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach-achieved random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first storage area) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection processing of Toku-zu, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first toku-zu figure holding) of the first toku-zu reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, of the reach determination table T2, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is "0" to "13"). Determine the presence or absence.

  If the reach random number is a reach-achieved random number (step S1607: YES), that is, if there is a reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach loss table (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with the non-time saving state reach, the portion corresponding to the loss with the reach in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time reduction state shown in FIG. The part “P14”, and in FIG. 2, the variation patterns “P24” to “P31” are referred to. In Toku-zu 1, any one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current Toku-zu 1 retention ball count (1 to 4). In Toku-zu 2, any one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of balls in Toku-zu 2 (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls changes, a function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both of the special figures 1 and 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Short variation patterns are more often selected. Thus, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

  If the reach random number is not a reach random number (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for losing without reach (step S1609). Here, as the table for the non-time saving state without loss, the portion corresponding to the no-reach loss in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is “P15” to The part “P16”, and in FIG. 2, the variation patterns “P32” to “P33” are referred to. In Toku-zu 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current Toku-zu 1 reserved ball count (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either “P32” or “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 reserved ball count (1 to 4). Also in this case, since the variation pattern selected according to the number of reserved balls changes, a function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

  If it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the big hit flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and a description thereof will not be repeated. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in step S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. And different. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the non-time-saving state variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time reduction state determination table T6 is used. Of the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11). For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the planned V passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the scheduled V passing jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. Are referred to as "P41" to "P43", and in FIG. 2, the variation patterns are referred to as "P61" to "P63". From the read variation pattern random numbers, any one of “P41” to “P43” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu 1 and any of “P61” to “P63” in Toku-zu 2 is selected. In addition, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the planned non-passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the scheduled non-passing V jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. To P46). One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value.

  After the selection of the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends the processing. The information of the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game has ended after the special symbol change time has elapsed (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-described fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to “3” (step S1703). Also, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). First, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time savings, and will be described later in detail. After the gaming state management processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1802). If the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to “1” (step S1808), and ends this processing. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again to execute the jackpot determination for the next hold.

  When the big hit flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a big winning port and a V opening / closing member opening pattern according to the type of the won big hit (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the special winning opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 21” is set as the open pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “open pattern 31” is set as the open pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot, together with the setting of the big winning opening and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit open games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set in the round counter (FIG. 13B).

  After setting the release pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset processing is processing for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset processing, a big hit opening command is set to start a big hit game (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

[Gaming state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). If the probable change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the certainty change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the certainty change counter is decremented by one (step S2002). The probability change counter counts the number of times the special symbol changes during the high probability state. Here, “10000” is set in the probability change counter when shifting to the high probability state (substantially, the high probability state continues until the next big hit). The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the counter value has become “0” as a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability change counter is “0” (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is turned off (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time reduction flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of times the special symbol has been changed during the time reduction state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, the time saving counter is set to "100" in the low accuracy and high base state, and "100" or "10000" is set in the high accuracy and high base state. ("100" for "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (latency probability variable jackpot), "10000" for "16RV planned passing jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot" Is done). The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become “0” as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time reduction flag is turned off (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information on the current game state that has just been set (whether the state is the probable change state, the value of the probable change counter, whether the state is the time reduction state, the value of the time reduction counter, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). If the probable change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probable change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probable change flag is turned off (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this processing ends. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the game is in the non-high probability state and the non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in the low base state in the non-time saving state, the gaming machine 1 is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern has been completed in the running big hit game. If the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V-opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls have won the first big winning opening 30. Then, when the predetermined game ball is won, the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) is being opened (step S2202). If it is being opened (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  If the special winning opening is not being opened (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the special winning opening (step S2203). The opening time of the special winning opening is, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has elapsed and the opening start time in the first round game has been reached, or the special winning opening temporarily closed after the opening has been opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) elapses and the timing of opening again is reached. If it is not time to open the special winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  If it is the time (timing) for opening the special winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of the jackpot. After the winning opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In the present embodiment, a large winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when a large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during a single round game, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the opening of the large winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  In the above-mentioned step S2202, when the special winning opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings to the special winning opening in the round game has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 9 pieces per round) or the time to close the special winning opening has been reached. One of the conditions (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening) has been satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) for opening the special winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. As described above, the closing time (interval time) of the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended based on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

  When the round game is over (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221) and determines whether the value of the round counter is “0”. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not been exhausted yet, the process ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when a game ball passes through the V region 39 at “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot” is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled”. The ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V region 39 in the "big hit" is the same length as the ending time. Thereby, even if the game ball is passed to the V region 39 at “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot” for the player, “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled non-passing jackpot” ", It can be recognized that the game ball has not passed to the V region 39. Note that the ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V region 39 at “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing ends.

  In the above step S2200, when the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the last round is finished, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time of the big hit ending has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the big hit end flag (step S2231), turns off the big hit flag (step S2322), and sets the special operation status. Is set to “1” (step S2233). Thereby, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, a game state setting process described later (step S2234) is executed, and this process ends.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”, the game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is an open round. If the round is not the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), the present process is ended. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

  If it is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that a first ball has been won in the first winning port 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning opening 30 in this round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2504). The V-opening / closing member 71 is short-opened in the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), regardless of whether it is “short open” or “long open”. This is for causing a short release (0.1 second in this case) to be executed. In the short opening of the V opening and closing member 71, since the opening time of the V opening and closing member 71 is very short, the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V validity period setting process, the V validity period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid is set during the opening of the V open / close member 71 and several seconds after the V open / close member 71 is closed. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 second) in accordance with the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. One second after the closing is set as the V valid period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the big hit game is not executed) to a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid" means that the V flag is turned ON based on the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a (the V region sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not set to ON even if the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is performed. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 (ball stroke period) is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. This takes into account the period until a game ball that has entered the V region 39 immediately before the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when V passing (the passing of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when V passing is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is turned ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned ON based on the V passage caused by the wrongdoing, and the state is not set to the high probability state. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  If the first winning flag is ON in step S2502, that is, if the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. Is performed (step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that a second ball has been won at the first winning port 30 when the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long release (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short release, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is a long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

  When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 long and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2523). The long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is based on the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B). ). Note that, here, the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum winning opening maximum opening time 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds). The time from time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so that the long opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the long opening of the V-opening / closing member 71 is relatively long, the opening time of the V-opening / closing member 71 is relatively long. It is configured to pass. In the V-valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V-valid period when the V-opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V-invalid period together with the closing of the V-opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. When the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over based on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the closing of the special winning opening. Make a decision.

  If the round game is over (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), closes the V opening / closing member, and disables the V period. A setting process is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a lapse of several seconds (here, 1 second) after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71, during the V invalid period. Set and end this processing.

  If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 can be exemplified, for example, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 in the case of a short opening. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the process ends. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), this processing ends with the V opening / closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continues.

  In step S2540, when determining that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the present process is terminated.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time reduction flag is turned ON (step S2302), and “100” is set in the time reduction counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a “non-high probability state”, a “time saving state”, and a “high base state” (ie, a low-probability high base). The low-probability-high base state ends when one of the conditions of performing the variable display of the special symbol 100 times or winning the next big hit is satisfied.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), and sets “10000” in the probability change counter (step S2305). The V flag is turned off (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time reduction flag (step S2307), and sets “100” or “10000” in the time reduction counter (step S2308). More specifically, "100" for "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" (latency probability variable jackpot) and "10000" for "16RV passing planned jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot". Is set. As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes the “high probability state”, the “time saving state”, and the “high base state” (that is, the high probability high base). The high-accuracy high base state ends when one of the following conditions is satisfied: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or 10000 times, or the next jackpot is won. When the variable display of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the game state thereafter becomes the high-accuracy low-base state, and the high-accuracy state is hidden.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, the jackpot becomes almost before the 10,000-hit jackpot lottery is performed in the high-probability and high-base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot at the special symbol 2 (via the second starting port) in the time reduction state and the jackpot scheduled to pass through V (the special symbol stop symbol data 21H) is generated during the jackpot game. If V passes, it is almost assured that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a high-precision and high-base state until the next jackpot.

  In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information on the currently set game state.

[V region sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If there is no detection of a game ball by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V validity period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds after the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round (ball brush period). Is done. If it is not during the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V passage command (step S2604), and ends the processing. .

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball count processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the ordinary symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the pending ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball number command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the reserved ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number. . After setting the pending ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends the process.

7. Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like appearing in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. The effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93 when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interruption processing (step S4015) and performs the random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds and updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B by one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. In addition, two or more random numbers may be added in addition to one by one. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interruption of the interruption process (step S4025). While the interruption is permitted, the sub-side timer interruption processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed after the sub timer interrupt process is completed and before the next sub timer interrupt process is started.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: Step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The processing during the fluctuation effect is a process for setting a command before the end of fluctuation at a specific timing during the fluctuation effect and causing the display screen 7a to execute a specific display effect, and details thereof will be described later. After the processing during the variable effect, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs setting of display contents of the display screen 7a based on switch data (edge data and level data) output based on a detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process and the like on the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107. , To the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received the various commands executes a voice effect of outputting voice from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 receiving the various commands executes a lamp effect for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission processing, effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4320), and ends this processing. In other processes, for example, a random number update process is performed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), a prefetch effect determination process is performed (step S4420). "Pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect, and determining a pre-reading effect pattern to be executed. The details of the prefetching effect determination processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-described prefetch effect determination processing is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect indicating that it is highly likely that the jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85, and is executed during the variable effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the number is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 on the basis of information on the special figure 1 number of reserved balls, the special figure 2 number of reserved balls, and the normal symbol number of reserved balls included in the reserved number of balls command. The updated values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter are updated. Thus, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the values of the first special figure reservation effect counter, the second special figure reservation effect counter, and the general figure reservation effect counter, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, 9B is updated. On the other hand, if the pending ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described pending display processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). The “variable effect start process” is a process of selecting a variable effect pattern (contents) to be executed during a special symbol change. Details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect ending process is performed (step S4470). The “variable effect end process” is a process for stopping the variable effect executed during the special symbol change. In the variable effect ending process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the variable stop command, and sets a variable effect end command for ending the variable effect. Thereby, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described fluctuation effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of an opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is stored in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores a predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. And displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during opening of a special winning opening or during an interval between opening in a special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data and information on the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. I do. Then, an effect pattern of a round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is directed to the effect of the sub-RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), an ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The “ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the effect control microcomputer 91 receives information on the game state included in the game state designation command (whether the state is the high probability state, the time reduction state, Counter, time-saving counter value, etc.) in the sub-RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-pass command, the effect-control microcomputer 91 causes the sub-RAM 94 to store the information on the V-pass. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process based on a command other than the above (a customer waiting standby command, a RAM clear notification command, and the like), and ends the process.

[Prefetching effect decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the prefetching effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a prior determination information rewriting process (step S4601). To be more specific, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the jackpot pre-judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type pre-judgment result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a view for explaining the configuration of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores the pre-reading effect pattern information in addition to the above-described large hit determination information, large hit type information, and variation pattern information. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect performed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. FIG. 39 (A) shows the jackpot determination information “losing” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” as the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third special figure 2 reservations, respectively. A state is shown in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the storage area and the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the change is stored in the storage area. FIG. 39 (B) shows that a special figure 2 has been won from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is changed to the fourth special figure 2 suspension. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information “big jackpot”, the jackpot type information “21H”, and the variation pattern information “P61” are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, in each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas of the special figure 2 and the area corresponding to the change, “pattern A Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change has ended from the state of FIG. 39 (B) and the pre-determination information shift processing has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the area, the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, The pre-determination information of the four storage areas is cleared. The advance determination information shift processing is executed in the fluctuation effect ending processing (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the area and the first to fourth storage areas of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. If the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), the process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any one of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not “reach has been lost” (step S4603). Whether it is "big hit" or "losing with reach" can be determined, for example, based on a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). If the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “losing without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this processing. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit” or “losing with reach” (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination to determine whether to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, a prefetch effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the prefetch effect random number random number counter, and refers to the acquired random number value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect. Whether or not to perform, and a look-ahead effect pattern for performing a look-ahead effect are determined.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random number is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random number is “56 to 67”, When "pattern A" is selected and the prefetch effect random number is "68 to 127", "pattern B" is selected as the prefetch effect. Also, if the pre-determination result is “losing with reach” and the look-ahead effect random number is “0 to 107”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and if the look-ahead effect random number is “108 to 114”, the look-ahead effect is When "pattern A" is selected and the prefetch effect random number is "115 to 127", "pattern B" is selected as the prefetch effect. Note that the type and content of the prefetching effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

  Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a prefetch effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected prefetch effect pattern is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area is stored. The prefetch effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only is "pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas, "Pattern A" is also set. Thus, the prefetching effect pattern A is also executed in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). . Whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing of executing the pre-reading effect has already passed, the pre-reading effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing of executing the pre-reading effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetch effect is not performed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information on the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating a current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a main effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The key effect pattern determination processing includes a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image on the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable production is completed by superimposing an additional production such as a chance-up production or a look-ahead production on the basic production. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the key effect pattern with reference to the key effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for describing the key effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing an SP1 effect, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing an SP2 effect, a plurality of types of basic effect patterns for performing an SP3 effect, A plurality of types of key effect patterns for performing a no-reach loss effect are set. The type of the key effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1”, the key effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. When the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P72”, the key effect pattern for performing the lossless loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the obtained random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for describing the chance up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 illustrates a chance-up effect pattern executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 includes a portion for determining a chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33” “P41” to “P56” “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, “2-NO”, “2-SP1”, “2-SP2”, “2-SP3”, “3-NO”, “3-SP1”, “3-SP2”, “3-SP3” “ “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3”, and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to combine the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed, and the like. May be determined. From these, what kind of effect is performed as the variable effect is determined.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 converts the variable effect image It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect timer (step S5030), and ends the process. The fluctuation time (FIG. 42) according to the fluctuation pattern fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is set in the fluctuation effect timer. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is “P1”, “40 seconds” is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variable effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the fluctuation effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the fluctuation effect timer is zero. When it is not during the fluctuation effect (step SS4701: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the variable effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the command before the change end in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-fluctuation end command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 or the like that it is a specific timing during the fluctuating effect. In accordance with the information included in the command before the end of the change, the effect contents are switched and a specific image is displayed.

  If it is not the timing to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the pre-change end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is prefetching effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a command before the end of the change including the prefetching effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command not including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thus, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the changing effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect in which a prefetch effect image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect of fading the preview image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. Buffers and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization processing, the display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If the information has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out the predetermined variable effect image specified in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the predetermined variable effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-described processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a command before the end of fluctuation has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-change end command, and when the pre-change end pattern includes prefetch effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined prefetch effect image from the ROM 103, and reads the image. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Even when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not included in the pre-change end command, if a preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an advance fade effect for fading the advance image is performed. Do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above-described processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If the image has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image in which the variable effect has been stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variable effect stop display for displaying the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out the predetermined opening effect image specified by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image designated by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. When the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image specified by the ending effect start command is read from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the process ends.

9. Operation and display effects of the board movable body and display effects of the light guide plate 17 Using FIGS. 46 to 52, the board movable body (the first movable role 14, the second movable role 15, and the third movable role) is used. The operation 18), the display effect of the first movable object 14, and the display effect of the light guide plate 17 will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 drives the first movable auditors 14, the second movable auditors 15, and the third movable auditors 18 during a game effect (display effect), during an initial operation at the time of power-on, or the like. Perform control. The effect control microcomputer 91 irradiates the end surfaces of the first movable role object 14 and the light guide plate 17 with light during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation at the time of power-on, and the like. A display effect to display is performed.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the first movable auditorium 14 moves.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory view illustrating a second mode of the first movable role object 14.
The first movable role object 14 includes four transmissive members (movable light guide plates), each of which is configured to be movable. The four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) have a substantially rectangular shape. The first movable role object 14 can be stopped at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first mode). At this time, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the first movable role object 14 is visible from the player. As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable accessory 14 can move from the state of FIG. 1 to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 47 by moving (advancing) upward. It can be stationary (second aspect). In the second mode, the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) cover almost the entire display screen 7 a on the front surface of the image display device 7. The first movable role 14 can be moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retreating) four transparent members (movable light guide plates) from the state shown in FIG. , Where you can rest.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a first display effect of the first movable accessory 14. The four transmissive members (movable light guide plates) have a main surface serving as an image display area, in which a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is displayed. be able to. When the first panel movable body 14 is in the second mode, the four character partial images BN are close to each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying a second display effect of the first movable accessory 14. Character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” can be displayed in the image display areas of the four transmissive members (movable light guide plates). The first movable auditorium 14 can switch the four character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “R” independently to a visually recognizable state and a hardly visible state.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of the light guide plate. The light guide plate 17 can display a plurality of (seven in this case) smile images SL at different positions on the light guide plate 17. The light guide plate 17 can switch the seven smile images SL between a state in which the seven smile images SL can be visually recognized independently and a state in which the seven smile images SL are hardly visible.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the second movable role object 15.
The second movable role 15 includes a rotating body on which a face is drawn. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable role object 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decorative body 10 (first mode). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body becomes visible. In the second movable role 15, the rotating body advances downward from the state of FIG. 1 and can perform a rotation effect in front of the display screen 7a (second mode).

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the third movable role object 18.
The third movable auditorium 18 is configured such that a frame-shaped member can move up and down, and can be stopped at the retracted position (home position) (first mode). When the third movable auditorium 18 is located at the home position, the third movable auditorium 18 is invisible to the player. By moving (advancing) downward from the home position, the third movable auditorium 18 moves to the extended position (deployed position, extended position) shown in FIG. 52, and can stop there (second aspect). ). In the second aspect, the third movable accessory 18 covers a part of the image display device 7 as viewed from the player. In addition, the third movable auditorium 18 can move to the home position by moving upward (retreating) from the state of FIG. 52, and can stop there.

  The third movable auditorium 18 has a frame shape and a rhombus shape. When the third movable accessory 18 is in the deployed position (in the case of the second mode), the display on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is visible from the hollow portion surrounded by the frame-shaped portion.

10. Effect Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Hereinafter, each effect example (display effect example, movable object effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modification example, and a mode example for the effect example will also be described. The effects described below are based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, variation pattern information, advance determination information, and the like) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, as described above, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in the display effect example, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted, but is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

  The next timer value display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This next timer value display effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the next timer value display effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a.

[Next timer value display effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the next timer value display effect A. In the next timer value display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), a decorative design change effect (change display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. In this state, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numeric image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed. However, the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the display. Here, after “30” is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, “30” means 30 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (C) and FIG. 53 (D), the next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Specifically, when the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (here, 5 seconds), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is changed to the current timer value in an expanded state. It is also displayed. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is “5”, the value “4” to be displayed next is enlarged and displayed together with the current timer value “5”. In FIG. 53 (D), the next timer value image NT representing “4” having transparency and overlapping the current timer value “5” is displayed in an enlarged manner. The next timer value image NT has transparency, and the timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is displayed in an enlarged manner, it is larger than the timer image TM1, and the upper and lower ends of the numeral “4” protrude from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (E), a reduction effect of the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the size and the display position of the next timer value image NT approach the portion (image area) of the timer image TM1 where the counter value is represented, while reducing while overlapping the timer image TM1. In other words, the next timer value image NT is reduced so as to fit in the image area of the timer image TM1 where the counter value is represented. When the size and the display position of the next timer value image NT substantially coincide with the image area of the timer image TM1 in which the counter value is displayed, as shown in FIG. The increment is completed. Here, the next timer value image NT representing “4” is reduced so that the size and the display position match the “5” part of the timer image TM1, and “4” of the next timer value image NT and the timer image are displayed. Immediately after the size and position of TM5 “5” match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with “4”. The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (G), the second next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Similarly to FIG. 53 (D), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed together with the current timer value in an enlarged state. Here, the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is “4”, and the value “3” to be displayed next is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value “4”. The next timer value image NT representing "3" is enlarged and displayed with transparency, overlaps the current timer value "4", and the upper end and lower end of the number "3" protrude from the display screen 7a. It is in a state. Thereafter, the size and the display position of the next timer value image NT approach the numeric portion (counter value portion) of the timer image TM1 while being reduced while overlapping the timer image TM1. When the size and the display position of the next timer value image NT substantially match the counter value portion of the timer image TM1, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed as shown in FIG. Here, the next timer value image NT representing “3” is reduced so that the size and the display position of the next timer value image NT1 coincide with the “4” portion of the timer image TM1, and the next timer value image NT, “3” and the timer image are displayed. Immediately after the size and position of TM1 “4” match, the timer image TM1 becomes “3”. The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

  As described above, when the countdown is performed while repeating the next timer value expansion display effect, the next timer value reduction effect, and the decrement completion effect, the timer value becomes 0 (zero) as shown in FIG. A timer zero display effect is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (J), at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed, an expectation degree suggestion image EI1 indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed. Thereafter, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol fluctuation effect B. In the next timer value display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 54A, a decorative design change effect (change display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 54B, a timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numeric image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed. However, the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the display. Here, after “30” is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, “30” means 30 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the next timer value enlarged display effect is started. Specifically, the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed in an enlarged state together with the current timer value. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is “30”, the value “29” to be displayed next is displayed together with the current timer value “30” in an enlarged state. In FIG. 54 (C), the next timer value image NT representing “29” is enlarged and displayed at a position that does not overlap with the current timer value “30” while being inclined. Since the next timer value image NT representing “29” is enlarged and displayed, a part thereof sometimes protrudes from the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), a reduced rotation effect of the next timer value image NT is executed. Specifically, the next timer value image NT moves toward the timer image TM1 while rotating and reducing, and overlaps the timer image TM1. Thereafter, the reduction is continued while overlapping with the timer image TM1, and the size, orientation, and display position of the numeral portion (counter value portion) of the timer image TM1 approach. When the size and the display position of the next timer value image NT substantially match the counter value portion of the timer image TM1, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed as shown in FIG. Here, the next timer value image NT representing “29” is reduced so that the size and the display position match the “30” part of the timer image TM1, and “29” of the next timer value image NT and the timer image are displayed. Immediately after the size and the position of “30” of TM1 match, the timer image TM1 becomes “29”. The timing at which the timer value of the timer image TM1 is replaced with the timer value of the next timer value image NT may be immediately before or after the next timer value image NT matches the timer image TM1.

  In the next timer value display effect B, the content of the next timer value display effect changes randomly. As an example, as shown in FIG. 54 (F), when the timer value is a predetermined value (here, “5”), the timer image TM1 is decremented without displaying the next timer value. You. Further, as another example, as shown in FIG. 54 (G), an effect similar to the next timer value display effect A is performed. That is, the next timer value image NT representing the transparent “3” overlapping the current timer value “4” is displayed in an enlarged manner, and the upper and lower ends of the numeral “4” protrude from the display screen 7a. Then, the next timer value image NT representing “3” is reduced so that the size and the display position match the “4” portion of the timer image TM1, and “3” of the next timer value image NT and the timer image TM1 are displayed. Immediately after the size and the position of “4” match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with “4” as shown in FIG. Thus, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed.

  As described above, when the countdown is executed while repeating the next timer value display effect with random contents, a timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed as shown in FIG. 54 (I). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (J), at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed, an expectation degree suggestion image EI1 suggesting the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed. Thereafter, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Next timer value display effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol variation effect C. In the next timer value display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), a decorative design change effect (change display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 55B, a first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numeric image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the first timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the display. Here, after "30" is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, “30” means 30 seconds.

  While the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is being performed, a new second timer image TM2 is displayed as shown in FIG. The second timer image TM2 has the same configuration as the first timer image TM1. Note that the second timer image TM2 may have a different configuration from the first timer image TM1. The countdown is started immediately after the second timer image TM2 is displayed. However, the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “09” is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, “09” means 9 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 55 (D) to 55 (G), in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, similarly to the next timer value display effect A, the next timer value enlarged display effect. The countdown is executed while sequentially repeating the next timer value reduction effect and the decrement completion effect. In the next timer value enlarged display effect, specifically, when the timer value of the first timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value (first value), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the first timer image TM1 Is displayed together with the current timer value in an enlarged state. When the timer value of the second timer image TM2 reaches a predetermined value (second value), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the second timer image TM2 is expanded with the current timer value. It is also displayed. The first value and the second value that trigger the start of the next timer value enlarged display effect may be the same value or different values. In the next timer value enlarged display effect, the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be started at the same timing, or may be started at different timings. When the timings are different, the first timer image TM1 may be started first, or the second timer image TM2 may be started first.

  In FIG. 55 (D), the next timer value enlarged display effect is executed in both the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2. When the first timer image TM1 (current timer value) is “05” and the next timer value image NT1 representing the value “4” to be displayed next is enlarged, the current timer value “05” is displayed. It is also displayed. The next timer value image NT1 has transparency, and the first timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT1. Since the next timer value image NT1 is enlarged and displayed, the next timer value image NT1 is larger than the first timer image TM1, and the upper end and the lower end of the numeral “4” protrude from the display screen 7a. When the second timer image TM2 (current timer value) is “09” and the next timer value image NT2 representing the value “8” to be displayed next is enlarged, the current timer value “09” is displayed. It is also displayed.

  In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55 (E), a reduction effect of the next timer value image NT1 is executed. Specifically, the size and the display position of the next timer value image NT1 approach the number portion (counter value portion) of the first timer image TM1 while reducing the size while overlapping the first timer image TM1. When the size and the display position of the next timer value image NT1 substantially match the counter value portion of the first timer image TM1, the decrement of the first timer image TM1 is completed as shown in FIG. .

  The second timer image TM2 in FIG. 55 (E) shows a state where the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT2 has been completed and the decrement has been completed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55 (F), the next next timer value enlarged display effect is executed. In the first timer image TM1 of FIG. 55 (G), the next next timer value enlarged display effect is executed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55 (G), the decrement has been completed after the reduction effect of the next timer value image NT1. The decrement timing of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

  As described above, in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, when the countdown is performed while repeating the next timer value enlarged display effect, the next timer value reduced effect, and the decrement completion effect, FIG. As shown in H), in the first timer image TM1, a timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (I), a first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 55 (I), a timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed, and in FIG. 55 (J), the second timer image TM2 , A second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 indicating the jackpot expectation degree in the fluctuation is displayed. The second expected degree suggestion image EI2 is an image that indicates that the expected degree is higher than the first expected degree suggested image EI1.

[Next timer value display effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol fluctuation effect D. In the next timer value display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 56B, a first timer image TM1 is displayed. At this time, the variable display disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the variable display may be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The first timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The first timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, an area image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numeric image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the first timer image TM1 is displayed, but the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the display. Here, after "30" is displayed as the first timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, “30” means 30 seconds.

  While the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is being performed, a new second timer image TM2 is displayed as shown in FIG. The second timer image TM2 has a different configuration from the first timer image TM1. Each configuration will be described later. The countdown is started immediately after the second timer image TM2 is displayed. However, the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after “08” is displayed as the second timer image TM2, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, "08" means 8 seconds.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (C) to FIG. 55 (G), the countdown of the first timer image TM1 is executed while repeating the next timer value movement display effect and the decrement completion effect. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), in the next timer value movement display effect, “04” which is the next timer value image NT1 is displayed above “05” which is the first timer image TM1. Is done. The next timer value image NT1 is an image representing a value to be displayed next by the first timer image TM1. As shown in FIG. 56 (D), “04” of the next timer value image NT1 moves downward and becomes partially invisible because it is covered by “05” of the first timer image TM1. As shown in FIG. 56 (E), when “04” of the next timer value image NT1 moves to the position of “05” of the first timer image TM1 and is covered by the first timer image TM1, and becomes completely invisible. The value of the first timer image TM1 is decremented by one. As shown in FIG. 56 (F) to FIG. 56 (G), this procedure is repeated to count down the first timer image TM1.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 (C) to 55 (G), the second timer image TM2 performs a countdown while repeating a timer value movement effect and a decrement completion effect in order. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the next timer value image NT2 “07” is displayed above the second timer image TM2 “08”, and the second timer image TM2 is displayed. "09" which is the previous timer value image PT2 is displayed below. The next timer value image NT2 is an image representing a value to be displayed next by the second timer image TM2. The previous timer value image PT2 is an image representing the value displayed immediately before the second timer image TM2. On the left side of the second timer image TM2, a triangular arrow image YG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 56 (D), “07” of the next timer value image NT2, “08” of the second timer image TM2, and “09” of the previous timer value image PT2 are drawn downward while drawing an arc. Moving. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), the second timer image TM2 is displayed, that is, “07” of the next timer value image NT2 is located on the right side of the arrow image YG, so that the second timer image TM2 is displayed. The decrement of the image TM2 is completed. As shown in FIGS. 56 (F) to 56 (G), this procedure is repeated, and the second timer image TM2 is counted down. The decrement timing of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2 may be the same or different.

  As described above, when the countdown is performed in each of the first timer image TM1 and the second timer image TM2, the timer value becomes 0 (zero) in the first timer image TM1, as shown in FIG. ), A timer zero display effect is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (I), a first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot in the change is displayed at the position where the first timer image TM1 was displayed. In the second timer image TM2 of FIG. 56 (I), a timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed. In FIG. 56 (J), the timer value is displayed at the position where the second timer image TM2 is displayed. Then, a second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 indicating the jackpot expectation degree in the fluctuation is displayed. The second expected degree suggestion image EI2 is an image that indicates that the expected degree is higher than the first expected degree suggested image EI1.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the next timer value display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, in a state where the timer image TM is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed next to the first timer value represented by the timer image TM1. The next timer value display effect in which the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is displayed on the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is overlapped with at least one minute of the timer image TM1 and displayed. Is done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value has transparency, and the timer image TM1 Becomes visible through the next timer image NT. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is different from the timer image TM1 representing the first timer value. Is displayed as a large image, the first timer value is reduced so as to fit in the displayed image area, and replaced with the first timer value, so that the second timer value becomes the timer image TM1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 to FIG. 55, in the next timer value display effect, the next timer image NT representing the second timer value is obtained by partially displaying the second timer value from the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a protruding image. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the next timer value display effect is started after the timer value represented by the timer image TM1 reaches a predetermined value. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the next timer value display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the next timer value display effect in FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer image TM has been described as counting down. However, the timer image TM may count up. Further, the count value is not limited to a number, and may be a specific character, graphic, symbol, or the like. For example, the countdown may be a mode in which images such as a rabbit, a turtle, and a bear are sequentially displayed. Alternatively, Roman numerals may be used.

[Modification 2]
The next timer value display effects of FIGS. 53 to 56 may be appropriately combined. For example, the timer image TM in FIG. 53 may have the same mode as the second timer image TM2 in FIG. Each of the next timer value display effects in FIGS. 53 to 56 may not include a part of the effect. For example, in FIG. 53, the expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the next timer value display effect shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer value of the timer image TM is finally set to zero. However, the timer value of the timer image TM may end at a value other than zero. For example, after the timer value of the timer image TM becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2), the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may be displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image representing a timer value,
In a state in which the timer image is displayed on the display means, an image representing a second timer value displayed next to the first timer value represented by the timer image is displayed on the display means A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
In the effect, an image representing the second timer value is displayed so as to overlap at least one minute of the timer image.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-2,
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image having transparency, and the timer image is visually recognizable via the image representing the second timer value. Machine.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-3,
In the effect, after the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image larger than the image representing the first timer value, the image is displayed in the image area where the first timer value is displayed. Wherein the second timer value becomes the timer image by replacing the first timer value with the first timer value.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-4,
In the effect, the image representing the second timer value is displayed as an image in which a part of the second timer value protrudes from the display unit.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A1-5,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect is started after a timer value represented by the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

  The timer display number suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This timer display number suggestion effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a timer display number suggestion effect, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This timer display number suggestion effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one change effect). In addition, you may make it perform the effect which suggests the number of times of timer display during a plurality of fluctuations (a plurality of fluctuation productions) of a special symbol.

[Timer display count suggestion effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the timer display number suggestion effect A.
In the timer display number suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), a first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in an upper area. The timer number suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as “two timers remaining”, indicating that the timer display appears two more times after the first timer count suggestion display effect.
The timer count suggestion display XA2 has a function of suggesting that the timer display is performed in addition to suggesting the number of timer display that may appear in the future.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), a first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 57C shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. Thereafter, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), a chance up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 has reached a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANCE" indicating that the big hit expectation degree is medium. I have. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63. When the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A character suggesting the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As a chance up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), a second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer count suggestion display effect, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in an area above the timer display area XA1. The timer number suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 57 (E), the timer number suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "one timer remaining", indicating that the timer display appears once after this second timer number suggestion display effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 57F shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. Thereafter, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (G), a chance up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 has reached a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 has a display of "extensive heat" indicating that the big hit expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63. When the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A character suggesting the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As a chance up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

[Timer display count suggestion effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for describing timer display number suggestion effect B.
In the timer display number suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), a first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in an upper area. The timer number suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 58 (B), the timer number suggestion display XA2 is indicated as “two timers remaining”, and it is suggested that the timer display appears two more times after the first timer number suggestion display effect.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), a first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect was performed, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "one more timer", and the timer number suggestion display XA2 is compared with the first timer number suggestion display effect. Decrease by one, and the timer display indicates that it will appear once more. FIG. 58C shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. Thereafter, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), a chance up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 has reached a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANCE" indicating that the big hit expectation degree is medium. I have. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63. When the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A character suggesting the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As a chance up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), a second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer count suggestion display effect, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in an area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 58E, the timer count suggestion display XA2 indicates “one timer remaining”. Then, after this second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display suggests that it appears once more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 58 (F) shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of timer display XA3. Thereafter, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), a chance up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 has reached a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 has a display of "extensive heat" indicating that the big hit expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63. When the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A character suggesting the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As a chance up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

[Timer display count suggestion effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining timer display number suggestion effect C.
In the timer display number suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), a first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in an upper area. The timer number suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 59 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as “two timers remaining”, and after the first timer count suggestion display effect, it indicates that the timer display appears two more times.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), a timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, a timer standby indication XA5 is displayed in an area below the timer display area XA1. Timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer waiting suggestion display XA5 is displayed as "waiting for XX seconds", indicating that the timer display is waiting and will start from now. In this case, the number of “X” in the timer waiting indication XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value of the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer of 1 to 9, the number of “X” in the timer standby indication XA5 is set to one, and “X seconds standby” is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If it is an integer of 100 or more, the number of “X” in the timer waiting indication XA5 may be three, and “waiting for XXX seconds” may be displayed. In addition, the character is not limited to “X” and may be another alphabet, or a symbol such as “「 ”,“ □ ”,“ △ ”,“? ”,“! ”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), a first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect was performed, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "one more timer", and the timer number suggestion display XA2 is compared with the first timer number suggestion display effect. Decrease by one, and the timer display indicates that it will appear once more. FIG. 59 (D) shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of timer display XA3. Thereafter, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), a chance up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 has reached a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANCE" indicating that the big hit expectation degree is medium. I have. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63. When the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A character suggesting the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As a chance up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), a second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer count suggestion display effect, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in an area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. Then, after this second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display suggests that it appears once more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (G), a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 59F shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. Thereafter, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), a chance up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 has reached a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 has a display of "extensive heat" indicating that the big hit expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63. When the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A character suggesting the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As a chance up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

[Timer display count suggestion effect D]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the timer display count suggesting effect D.
In the timer display number suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), a first timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display area XA1 and the character CRA are displayed. The timer display area XA1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in an upper area. The timer number suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future. In FIG. 60 (B), the timer count suggestion display XA2 is indicated as “two timers remaining”, and indicates that the timer display appears two more times after the first timer count suggestion display effect.
Further, the timer display area XA1 is arranged on a variable area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), a timer standby effect is executed. In the timer standby effect, a timer standby indication XA5 is displayed in an area below the timer display area XA1. Timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. The timer waiting suggestion display XA5 is displayed as "waiting for XX seconds", indicating that the timer display is waiting and will start from now. In this case, the number of “X” in the timer waiting indication XA5 is the same as the number of digits of the initial value of the timer display. For example, if the initial value of the timer display is an integer of 1 to 9, the number of “X” in the timer standby indication XA5 is set to one, and “X seconds standby” is displayed, and the initial value of the timer display is If it is an integer of 100 or more, the number of “X” in the timer waiting indication XA5 may be three, and “waiting for XXX seconds” may be displayed. In addition, the character is not limited to “X” and may be another alphabet, or a symbol such as “「 ”,“ □ ”,“ △ ”,“? ”,“! ”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), a first timer display effect is executed. In the first timer display effect, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed in the area above the timer display area XA1, and the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. In this case, since the first timer display effect was performed, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is indicated as "one more timer", and the timer number suggestion display XA2 is compared with the first timer number suggestion display effect. Decrease by one, and the timer display indicates that it will appear once more. FIG. 60D shows that 70 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. Thereafter, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Also, during the first timer display effect, a role effect in which the second movable role 15 moves to the deployed position is performed. In this role production, the second movable role 15 displays at least a part of the timer display area XA1 (timer number suggestion display XA2 and timer display XA3) and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as viewed from the player. cover.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), a chance up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the timer display area XA1, the button display XA4, and the transformed character CRA are displayed. In the timer display area XA1, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 has reached a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 is displayed with "CHANCE" indicating that the big hit expectation degree is medium. I have. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63. When the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A character suggesting the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As a chance up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), a second timer number suggestion display effect is executed. In the second timer count suggestion display effect, a timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed in an area above the timer display area XA1. The timer count suggestion display XA2 is a display for suggesting (notifying) the number of timer displays that may appear in the future, and in FIG. 60 (F), the timer count suggestion display XA2 indicates “one timer remaining”. Then, after this second timer number suggestion display effect, the timer display suggests that it appears once more.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), a second timer display effect is executed. In the second timer display effect, the timer display XA3 is executed in the area below the timer display area XA1. FIG. 60F shows that 30 seconds is set as the initial timer value of the timer display XA3. Thereafter, the timer display XA3 counts down. The timer display XA3 may count up.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, the button display XA4 and the transformed character CRA are displayed. This chance-up effect is executed when the timer value of the timer display XA3 has reached a predetermined value (zero), and the button display XA4 has a display of "extensive heat" indicating that the big hit expectation is high. Further, the button display XA4 is a display for urging the player to press the effect button 63. When the player presses the effect button 63, a predetermined character indicating the jackpot expectation degree newly appears. , A character suggesting the jackpot expectation is newly displayed. As a chance up effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a zone effect, or the like may be executed.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned effects A to D indicating the number of timer display times, other effects (such as other timer display number suggestion effects) may be incorporated into one effect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer display number suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the effects A to D of the timer display number suggestion effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is performed and the timer number suggestion display XA2 is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed. After that, the timer display XA3 is performed. According to this configuration, the timer count suggestion display XA2 is performed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate, so that the player can watch the effect while looking at the situation where the timer display appears. Since the timer display XA3 is performed after the timer count suggestion display XA2 is performed, when the timer display XA3 is displayed, it is possible to give an expectation for future development while paying attention to the remaining number of timer displays. it can. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the effects A to D indicating the number of times of timer display, the timer display XA3 is displayed in the variable display area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the timer display XA3 more noticeable than the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and to give the player a sense of expectation for future development. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the timer display number suggestions effects A to D, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is displayed in a variable display area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the timer count suggestion display XA2 can be made more noticeable than the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the player can have a sense of expectation for future development. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the timer display number suggestion effects A to D, in the first timer number suggestion display effect, the number of times the timer display suggested by the timer number suggestion display XA2 is performed is two or more. According to this configuration, when the timer count suggestion display XA2 appears, the timer display is performed a plurality of times, so that the degree of attention to the timer count suggestion display XA2 can be increased for the player. . As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the timer display number suggestion effects A to D, after the first timer number suggestion display effect, the first timer display effect is performed, and thereafter, the second timer number suggestion display effect is performed, and the second timer number suggestion display is performed. In the effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 suggests that the timer display is performed one less number of times than the timer number suggestion display XA2 in the first timer number suggestion display effect. That is, in the second timer number suggestion display effect, the “number of times the timer display is performed in the future” represented by the timer number suggestion display XA2 is “1”, and in the first timer number suggestion display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 represents “The number of times that timer display is performed in the future” is “2”. According to this configuration, every time the timer display is performed, the “number of times that the timer display is performed in the future” represented by the timer number suggestion display XA2 is decremented by 1. Therefore, the “future timer display is performed in the timer number of times display XA2. The number of times that is performed can be accurately indicated. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the timer display number suggestion effects B to D, in the first timer display effect, the timer number suggestion display XA2 is continuously displayed while the timer display XA3 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the timer count suggestion display XA2 is displayed together with the timer display XA3, the timer count suggestion display XA2 provides a great sense of expectation for the appearance of the next timer effect while enjoying the timer effect of the timer display XA3. Can be granted. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the timer display number suggestion effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the production suggestion effect of the timer of the gaming machine of the embodiment,
[Modification 1]
In the timer display number suggestion display effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first timer number suggestion display effect, the number of times indicated by the timer number suggestion display XA2 is “2”. The present invention is not limited thereto, and the number of times indicated by the timer number suggestion display XA2 may be three or more or one. In the timer display count effect, timer displays for the number of times indicated by the timer count suggestion display XA2 are executed. For example, if the number of times suggested by the timer number suggestion display XA2 is “3”, then the timer display is executed three times.

[Modification 2]
In the timer display effect D, the second movable role 15 is moved so as to cover the timer display area XA1 in the timer display effect. However, the timer display during the timer standby is also performed in the timer standby effect. It may be movable so as to cover the area XA1.

[Modification 3]
In the timer display number suggestion display effects A to D, the timer number suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed in the timer display area XA1, and the timer number suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed adjacent to each other. The present invention is not limited to this, and the timer count suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 may be displayed separately.

[Modification 4]
In the timer display number suggestion display effects A to D, when the timer value of the timer display XA3 becomes a predetermined value (zero), a chance-up effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the chance-up effect, a predetermined chance-up effect is performed. May be performed. The predetermined effects include pseudo continuous effects, look-ahead effects, zone effects, reach effects, super reach effects, mini-game effects, mission effects, and the like.

[Modification 5]
In the timer display number suggestion display effects A to D, the timer number suggestion display XA2 and the timer display XA3 are displayed on the variable regions of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but are not limited thereto. XA2 and / or timer display XA3 may be displayed in an area different from the variable area of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of changing a decorative pattern,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a timer display,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a timer number suggestion display indicating that the timer display is performed a predetermined number of times,
There is a case where a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect is performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and after the third display effect is performed. , The second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect XA-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is displayed in a decorative symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect XA-1 or Aspect XA-2,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is displayed in a decorative symbol display area where the decorative symbol is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-3,
The predetermined number of times the timer display is performed in the third display effect is 2 or more;
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XA-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed again, and in the third display effect, The timer count suggestion display indicates that the timer display is performed one less number than the predetermined count,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XA-1 to XA-5,
In the combination effect, the timer number suggestion display in the third display effect is continuously displayed during the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the timer count effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This timer count effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the change display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). The process is executed at the start of the variable display of the symbol, at the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the variable effect of the decorative symbol, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. More specifically, this timer count effect is a display that counts a timer value using a timer image, and controls the movable body to move in a predetermined manner every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, or a predetermined image is displayed. Is an effect that indicates that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time by changing to the mode of (1).

[Timer effect A]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect A.
In the timer count effect A, first, a reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a variation effect of the decoration symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, a left decoration symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, a medium decoration symbol 8C is displayed on the middle symbol display area, A right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In the reach effect of FIG. 61 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array, and the decorative symbol 8C is changing (scrolling downward). In the present example, the reach symbol array indicates “7 ↓ 7”, and characters “reach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Further, in this reach effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are provided at the four corners of the display screen 7a. A state is shown in which the first movable members 14 are respectively located at the home positions (origins) (see FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the reach effect shown in FIG. In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (battle effect display screen) displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (cracked), and is visible from the torn area. It is formed on the side (rear side). Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 61 (B), the characters and the number of “50 seconds remaining” indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. In this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the reach effect shown in FIG. 61A are deleted, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB of the player battle on the display screen 7a. A battle effect in which an image is displayed is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are shown in FIG. 61 (A). Like the reach direction, each is waiting at the home location (origin).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), a count suggesting upper right character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggesting upper right character effect, two seconds have elapsed (countdown) since the timer image TM displayed 50 seconds as the timer initial value in the timer display effect shown in FIG. This shows a state where 48 seconds have elapsed. Thus, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, only the upper right first movable object 14a among the first movable members 14 located in the home position is movable, and the first advance position is displayed on the display screen 7a. Advance to In other words, the upper right first movable role 14a moves when the countdown of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61B is reduced by 2 seconds. In addition, the first upper right movable object 14a immediately retreats to the home position after having advanced to the first advance position. Further, in the count suggesting upper right character effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), a count suggesting lower right character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the count suggesting lower right role production, in the count suggesting upper right role production shown in FIG. 61 (C), two seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value becomes 46. This shows a state in which seconds have elapsed. Thus, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, only the lower right first movable role 14b of the first movable role 14 located in the home location is movable, and the second advance on the display screen 7a is performed. Advance to the position. In other words, the lower right first movable role 14b moves when counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggesting upper right role production shown in FIG. 61 (C). Here, the fluctuation range of the lower right first movable role 14b is larger than the fluctuation range of the upper right first movable role 14a shown in FIG. 61 (C). That is, the distance from the home location to the second advance position is larger than the distance from the home location to the first advance position. Note that the lower right first movable object 14b immediately retreats to the home position after having advanced to the second advance position. In addition, in the count suggesting lower right part effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), a count suggesting lower left character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the count suggesting lower left role production, in the count suggesting lower right role production shown in FIG. 61 (D), two seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 46 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value becomes 44. This shows a state in which seconds have elapsed. Thus, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, only the lower left first movable role 14c of the first movable role 14 located in the home position is movable, and the third advance position is displayed on the display screen 7a. Advance to In other words, the lower left first movable role 14c moves when the countdown is performed for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggesting lower right role effect shown in FIG. 61 (D). Here, the fluctuation range of the lower left first movable role 14c is larger than the fluctuation range of the lower right first movable role 14b shown in FIG. 61 (D). That is, the distance from the home location to the third advance position is greater than the distance from the home location to the first and second advance positions. When located at the third advance position, the lower left first movable role 14c covers the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM so as to be visible. That is, the first movable role object 14 visibly fluctuates the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. Note that the lower left first movable role 14c immediately retreats to the home location after having advanced to the third advance position. In the count suggesting lower left part effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), a count suggesting upper left character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggesting upper left role production, in the count suggesting lower left role production shown in FIG. 61 (E), two seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 44 seconds have been displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value has reached 42 seconds. Is shown. Thus, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, only the upper left first movable role 14d of the first movable role 14 located in the home position is movable, and the fourth advance position is displayed on the display screen 7a. Advance to In other words, the upper left first movable role 14d moves when counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggesting lower left role effect shown in FIG. 61 (E). Here, the fluctuation range of the upper left first movable role 14d is larger than the fluctuation range of the lower left first movable role 14c shown in FIG. That is, the distance from the home location to the fourth advance position is larger than the distance from the home location to the first, second, and third advance positions. When located at the fourth advance position, the upper left first movable role 14d covers the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM so as to be visible. That is, the first movable role object 14 visibly fluctuates the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. Note that the upper left first movable object 14d immediately retreats to the home position after having advanced to the fourth advance position. In the count suggesting lower left part effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), a count suggesting all-locals effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggesting all role productions, in the count suggestion upper left role production shown in FIG. 61 (F), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 42 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value becomes 40 seconds. Is shown. Thus, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, all the first movable auditors 14 located in the home location are movable, and advance on the display screen 7a to the fourth advance position. In other words, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are the count suggesting upper left role production shown in FIG. 61 (F). It moves when it counts down for 2 seconds from the timer value. That is, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 61 (B), when 10 seconds have elapsed (countdown) from the display of the timer initial value of 50 seconds on the timer image TM, all the first movable auditors 14 move. . It should be noted that all of the first movable auditors 14 advance to the fourth advance position and then immediately retreat to the home position. In addition, in this count suggesting all role production, a battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  As described above, in the timer count effect A shown in FIG. 61, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (in this example, every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds), the first movable role 14 as a movable body is set. Are movably controlled in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, each time two seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or from the timer value as the starting point, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first The movable role 14c and the upper left first movable role 14d sequentially (clockwise) move, indicating that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). In addition, each of the first movable auditors 14 can advance in four stages from the first advance position to the fourth advance position, and the upper right first movable auditorium 14a is in the first advance position, The first movable role 14b is in the second advance position, the lower left first movable role 14c is in the third advance position, the upper left first movable role 14d is in the fourth advance position, and the range of variation on the display screen 7a is different. So that it fluctuates. As a result, the fact that the predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or from the timer value as the starting point, indicates that both the movable character and the fluctuation width of the movable character are counted. It is possible to suggest. Further, every time the timer is displayed, or every 10 seconds from the timer value serving as the starting point, the first movable accessory 14 is entirely movable, and the fourth movable accessory 14 advances on the display screen 7a for the fourth time. It is designed to advance to the position. Accordingly, it is also suggested from the timer value at the time of displaying the timer or that the predetermined time (10 seconds) is counted from the timer value serving as the starting point, by both the number of movable characters and the fluctuation width thereof. Has become possible.

[Timer effect B]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B.
In the timer count effect B, first, although not shown, a reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 61 (A). On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a variation effect of the decoration symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, a left decoration symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, a medium decoration symbol 8C is displayed on the middle symbol display area, A right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In the reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array, and the decorative symbol 8C is in a state of being changed (scrolling). Further, in this reach effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are provided at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The first movable members 14 are respectively located at the home positions (origins) (see FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62A, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the reach effect. In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (battle effect display screen) displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (cracked), and is visible from the torn area. It is formed on the side (rear side). Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 62 (A), characters and numbers “50 seconds left” indicating 50 seconds as a timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Also, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect are erased, and an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle on the display screen 7a is displayed. Is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are each in the home position, similarly to the reach effect. (Origin) waiting.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a count suggestion upper right and lower left character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the lower right and upper left role production of the count suggestion, in the timer display production shown in FIG. 62A, two seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is displayed. Indicates a state in which 48 seconds have elapsed. Thus, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, of the first movable roles 14 located at the home location, the first upper movable portion 14a and the lower left lower portion 14a are arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a. The one movable role 14c moves, and advances on the display screen 7a to the first advance position. That is, the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower left first movable role 14c move as a pair when the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 62 (A) is counted down for 2 seconds. Note that the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower left first movable role 14c immediately retreat to the home position after having advanced to the first advance position. In addition, in the count suggestion upper right and lower left part effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), a count suggestion lower right and upper left character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the count suggesting lower right and upper left role effect, 2 seconds elapse (count down) after 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggesting upper right and lower left role effect shown in FIG. Indicates a state in which 46 seconds have elapsed. Thus, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, of the first movable roles 14 located in the home location, the lower right first movable role 14b diagonally arranged on the display screen 7a and the upper left side The first movable role object 14d moves, and advances to the second advance position on the display screen 7a. That is, the lower right first movable role 14b and the upper left first movable role 14d are movable in pairs when counted down for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggestion upper right lower left role production shown in FIG. 62 (B). I do. Here, the fluctuation range of the lower right first movable role 14b and the upper left first movable role 14d is larger than the fluctuation range of the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower left first movable role 14c shown in FIG. 62 (B). Is also getting bigger. That is, the distance from the home location to the second advance position is larger than the distance from the home location to the first advance position. Note that the lower right first movable role 14b and the upper left first movable role 14d advance to the second advance position and then immediately retreat to the home position. In addition, in the count suggesting lower right and upper left role effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), a count suggesting all-locals effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggesting all role productions, in the count suggestion lower right and upper left role productions shown in FIG. 62 (C), two seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 46 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value was reduced. The state at 44 seconds is shown. Thus, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, all of the first movable auditors positioned at the home location are movable, and advance on the display screen 7a to the fourth advance position. That is, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are the count suggesting lower right upper left portion shown in FIG. 62 (C). It moves when it counts down for 2 seconds from the effect timer value. Here, all the fluctuation widths of the first movable role 14 are larger than the fluctuation ranges of the lower right first movable role 14b and the upper left first movable role 14d shown in FIG. 62 (C). That is, the distance from the home location to the fourth advance position is larger than the distance from the home location to the first and second advance positions. The lower left first movable role 14c and the upper left first movable role 14d cover the timer image display area TMH and a part of the timer image TM in a state where they are located at the fourth advance position. That is, the first movable role object 14 visibly fluctuates the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. It should be noted that all of the first movable auditors 14 advance to the fourth advance position and then immediately retreat to the home position. In addition, in this count suggesting all role production, a battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), on the display screen 7a, a jump count suggestion all-characters effect is executed. In this jump count suggesting all role production, the timer value displayed on the timer image TM in the count suggestion all role production shown in FIG. 62 (D) has changed from 44 seconds to 34 seconds. . That is, even though 10 seconds have not actually elapsed since the count suggesting all of the bonus character effects shown in FIG. 62 (D) (actually, for example, about 2 seconds have elapsed), the timer value suddenly changes from 44 seconds to 34 seconds. This shows a flying state. Thus, when the timer value reaches 34 seconds, all of the first movable auditors 14 located in the home location are movable, and fluctuate on the display screen 7a in a predetermined manner. The variation in the predetermined mode is performed as follows. That is, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d immediately advance from the home location to the first advance position. The operation of retreating from the first advance position to the home position is repeated a predetermined number of times at high speed. That is, as shown by arrows A, B, C, and D, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d It moves back and forth between the position and the first advance position and fluctuates in small increments of a predetermined time. Here, in FIG. 62 (E), the first advance position is indicated by a two-dot chain line. It should be noted that all of the first movable auditors 14 are located at the home location when the change in the predetermined mode is completed. In addition, in this jump count suggesting all character effects, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), on the display screen 7a, a long count suggestion upper right lower left character effect is executed. In this long count suggestion upper right lower left role production, 14 seconds elapse (countdown) after 34 seconds have been displayed on the timer image TM in the jump count suggestion all role production shown in FIG. At 20 seconds, of the first movable roles 14 located at the home location, the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower left first movable role 14c arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a are movable. , On the display screen 7a, respectively, are shown as having advanced to the first advance position. That is, when the timer value shown in FIG. 62 (F) reaches 20 seconds, the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower left first movable role 14c move in pairs and advance to the first advance position. To maintain its advance state. In addition, in the long count suggesting upper right and lower left part effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), on the display screen 7a, a long count suggesting lower right and upper left character effect is executed. In this long count suggesting lower right and upper left role production, in the long count suggesting upper right and lower left role production shown in FIG. 62 (F), despite the fact that 2 seconds have elapsed since 20 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM. , A state in which the timer value is maintained at 20 seconds. Thus, when two seconds have passed since the production of the upper right and lower left characters shown in FIG. 62 (F) suggests a long count, the upper right first movable member 14a that has advanced to the first advance position and maintained the advanced state is displayed. The lower left first movable role 14c retracts to the home location. At the same time, of the first movable roles 14 located in the home location, the lower right first movable role 14b and the upper left first movable role 14d arranged diagonally on the display screen 7a are movable. , Respectively, on the display screen 7a to the second advance position. In other words, the lower right first movable role 14b and the upper left first movable role 14d move as a pair when two seconds have elapsed since 20 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and reach the second advance position. Advance and maintain its advanced state. In addition, in the long count suggesting lower right and upper left role effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), on the display screen 7a, a long count suggestion all-principal-part effect is executed. In this long count suggesting all role production, four seconds have elapsed since 20 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM in the long count suggestion upper right lower left role production shown in FIG. 62 (F) (see FIG. 62 (G)). This shows a state in which the timer value is maintained at 20 seconds despite the fact that two seconds have elapsed since the indicated lower count left upper left character effect effect was performed (indicated by the indicated long count). Thus, when four seconds have passed since the production of the upper right and lower left roles shown in FIG. 62 (F) suggests the long count, the lower right first movable role 14b and the upper left first movable role 14d are maintained in the second position. The vehicle advances from the advanced position to the fourth advanced position. At the same time, the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower left first movable role 14c located in the home location advance to the fourth advance position, respectively. That is, when four seconds have elapsed from the effect of the long count suggestion shown in FIG. 62 (F) on the upper right and lower left role, the lower right first movable role 14b and the upper left first movable role 14d move again as a pair. , Further advance from the second advance position to the fourth advance position and maintain the advanced state, while the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower left first movable role 14c move again as a pair and move home. The vehicle advances from the position to the fourth advance position and maintains the advanced state. Thereby, on the display screen 7a, all the first movable roles 14, that is, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role are displayed. The object 14d advances to the fourth advance position, and the state is maintained. In addition, in this long count suggesting all role production, a battle production is continuously executed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, two seconds have elapsed since the production of the long count suggesting all the roles shown in FIG. 62 (H), that is, six seconds elapses from the upper right and lower left role productions shown in FIG. 62 (F). At that time, all the first movable auditors 14 retreat from the maintained fourth advance position to the home position, and 14 seconds are displayed as the timer value on the timer image TM.

  As described above, in the timer count effect B shown in FIG. 62, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (in this example, every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds), the first movable unit constituted by a plurality of movable bodies is used. Two predetermined movable members of the movable role object 14 are controlled to move in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, each time two seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value, the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower left first movable role 14c, or the lower right The first movable role 14b and the upper left first movable role 14d move as a pair, indicating that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, the paired upper right first movable role 14a, lower left first movable role 14c, lower right first movable role 14b, and upper left first movable role 14d have different ranges of variation on the display screen 7a. So that it fluctuates. Accordingly, the fact that the predetermined time (2, 4 seconds) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point is also indicated by both the movable character and the fluctuation width thereof. Has become possible. In addition, as a special effect in the timer count effect, an effect in which the timer value was counted in a time shorter than the actual elapsed time, or an effect in which the timer value was counted in a time longer than the actual elapsed time Is performed, the movable body moves in a special variation mode (FIGS. 62 (E) and 62 (F) to 62 (H)). This makes it possible to indicate that the timer value has been counted at a time different from the actual elapsed time by the movable body moving in a special variation mode.

[Timer effect C]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C.
In the timer count effect C, first, a reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a variation effect of the decoration symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, a left decoration symbol 8L is displayed on the left symbol display area, a medium decoration symbol 8C is displayed on the middle symbol display area, A right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In the reach effect of FIG. 63 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement, and the decorative symbol 8C is changing (scrolling downward). In the present example, the reach symbol array indicates “7 ↓ 7”, and characters “reach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Also, in this reach production, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are provided at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The state in which the first movable auditors 14 are respectively located at the home position (origin) is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the reach effect shown in FIG. In the timer image display area TMH, a part of the effect screen (battle effect display screen) displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (cracked), and is visible from the torn area. It is formed on the side (rear side). Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 63 (B), characters and numbers “50 seconds left” indicating 50 seconds as a timer initial value are displayed with the numbers enlarged from the characters. Further, in this timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (A) are deleted, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side battle on the display screen 7a. A battle effect in which an image is displayed is executed. In this timer display effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are shown in FIG. 63 (A). Like the reach direction, each is waiting at the home location (origin).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), a count suggesting upper right character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the count suggesting upper right character effect, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63 (B), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is reduced. This shows a state where 48 seconds have elapsed. Thus, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, only the upper right first movable role 14a of the first movable role 14 located in the home location is movable, and the fourth advance position is displayed on the display screen 7a. Advance to That is, the upper right first movable role 14a is movable when counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63 (B), advances to the fourth advance position, and maintains the advanced state. In the count suggesting upper right role effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), a count suggesting lower right character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the count suggesting lower right role production, in the count suggesting upper right role production shown in FIG. 63 (C), two seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value becomes 46. This shows a state in which seconds have elapsed. Thus, when the timer value reaches 46 seconds, only the lower right first movable role 14b of the first movable role 14 moves, and advances on the display screen 7a to the fourth advance position. That is, the lower right first movable role 14b is movable when counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggesting upper right role effect shown in FIG. 63 (C), advances to the fourth advance position, and changes its advance state. maintain. Thereby, on the display screen 7a, of the first movable roles 14, among the first movable roles 14, the upper right first movable role 14a and the lower right first movable role 14b have advanced to the fourth advance position and maintained the advanced state. State. In the count suggesting lower right part effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), on the display screen 7a, a count suggesting lower left part effect is executed. In the count suggesting lower left role production, in the count suggesting lower right role production shown in FIG. 63 (D), 2 seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 46 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value becomes 44. This shows a state in which seconds have elapsed. Thus, when the timer value reaches 44 seconds, only the lower left first movable auditory 14c among the first movable auditors 14 moves, and advances on the display screen 7a to the fourth advance position. That is, the lower left first movable role 14c is movable when counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggesting lower right role effect shown in FIG. 63 (D), and advances to the fourth advance position to change its advance state. maintain. As a result, on the display screen 7a, of the first movable roles 14, among the first movable roles 14, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, and the lower left first movable role 14c advance to the fourth advance position. Then, the advanced state is maintained. In addition, the lower left first movable role 14c visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM when located at the fourth advance position. That is, the first movable role object 14 visibly fluctuates the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. In addition, in the count suggesting lower left part effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), a count suggesting upper left character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this count suggesting upper left role production, in the count suggesting lower left role production shown in FIG. 63 (E), two seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 44 seconds have been displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value has reached 42 seconds. Is shown. Thus, when the timer value reaches 42 seconds, only the upper left first movable auditory 14d among the first movable auditors 14 moves, and advances on the display screen 7a to the fourth advance position. That is, the upper left first movable role 14d is movable when counted down by 2 seconds from the timer value of the count lower left lower role production effect shown in FIG. 63 (E), advances to the fourth advance position, and maintains the advanced state. I do. Thereby, on the display screen 7a, all the first movable roles 14, that is, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role are displayed. The object 14d advances to the fourth advance position, and the state is maintained. In addition, the upper left first movable object 14d visibly covers a part of the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM when located at the fourth advance position. That is, the first movable role object 14 visibly fluctuates the timer image display area TMH and the timer image TM. In addition, in the count suggesting lower left part effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), count suggestion first and second character effects are executed on the display screen 7a. In the count suggesting first and second role productions, in the count suggestion upper left role production shown in FIG. 63 (F), two seconds have elapsed (countdown) since 42 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is displayed. Indicates a state in which the time has reached 40 seconds. Thus, when the timer value reaches 40 seconds, the second movable role 15 (see FIG. 1) located at the home location advances on the display screen 7a to the center advance position. That is, the second movable role 15 moves when the countdown is performed for 2 seconds from the timer value of the count suggesting upper left role role effect shown in FIG. 63 (F). That is, in the timer display effect shown in FIG. 63 (B), when 10 seconds have elapsed (countdown) from the display of the timer initial value 50 seconds as the timer image TM, the first movable auditors 14 are all in the fourth position. In a state in which the second movable role is advanced to the advanced position, the second movable role 15 moves and advances to a central advanced position substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. In a state where the second movable role 15 has advanced to the center advance position, the second movable role 15 includes the right upper first movable role 14a and the lower right first movable role 14b on the right side, and the lower left first movable position on the left side. It is located between the character 14c and the upper left first movable character 14d, that is, stopped at a position that does not overlap with all the first movable characters 14, and visually recognizes the timer image display area TMH and a part of the battle effect. It is impossible to cover (the timer image TM is not covered). In the count suggestion first and second role effects, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a. Thus, after the second movable role 15 has advanced to the central advance position, it immediately retreats to the home position. At the same time, all the first movable auditors 14 that have advanced to the fourth advance position retreat to the home position. In the count suggesting lower left part effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Thus, in the timer count effect C shown in FIG. 63, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (in this example, every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds), the first movable role of a different type as the movable body is set. The object 14 and the second movable role 15 are controlled to move in a predetermined manner. That is, for example, each time two seconds are counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or from the timer value as the starting point, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first The movable role 14c, the upper left first movable role 14d, and the second movable role 15 sequentially move to indicate that the timer value has been counted for a predetermined time (2 seconds). Moreover, each of the first movable auditors 14 sequentially advances to a predetermined advance position (fourth advance position), and then maintains the advanced state until the second movable auditorium 15 moves. As a result, the count of the predetermined time (2, 4, 6, 8 seconds) from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point indicates that both the movable character and its advance state It is possible to suggest. Further, every 10 seconds from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or every 10 seconds from the starting timer value, all the first movable characters 14 advance to the predetermined advance position (fourth advance position). In this state, the second movable role 15 moves and advances to a predetermined advance position (center advance position). As a result, the counting of a predetermined time (10 seconds) from the timer value when the timer is displayed or the timer value as the starting point, which is a well-defined interval, indicates the type of the movable movable object and its advance state. It is possible to suggest both.

[Timer Direction D]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D.
In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), a decorative design change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 64A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward). In addition, in this decorative design variation effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are provided at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The first movable roles 14 are located at the home positions (origins), respectively (see FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), a timer character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer character display effect, a character image CA1 as a specific image is displayed in the character image display area CAH at the left center of the display screen 7a during the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. In the character image display area CAH, a part of the effect screen (battle effect display screen) displayed on the display screen 7a is broken (cracked), and the character image display area CAH is visible from the torn area. It is formed on the side (rear side). Further, a timer image TM is displayed on the lower right side in front of the character image display area CAH. This timer image TM is displayed so as to cover a part of the character image display area CAH (character image CA1) over the character image display area CAH and the effect screen being displayed on the display screen 7a. Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 64 (B), the characters and numerals “50 seconds left” indicating 50 seconds as the timer initial value are displayed with the numerals enlarged from the characters. In this timer character display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 64A are deleted, and on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB on the player side are displayed. A battle effect in which an image in which a battle is displayed is displayed. In this timer character display effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are shown in FIG. Similar to the reach direction shown, each is waiting at the home location (origin).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), a character fade-out effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character fade-out effect is a timer character display effect shown in FIG. 64B, in which the character image CA1 fades out with the lapse of time immediately after 50 seconds as the timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM (in the illustrated example). , The character image CA1 is indicated by a dashed line). In the character fade-out effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are shown in FIG. 64 (B). As in the case of the timer character display effect, they are each waiting at the home position (origin). In the character fade-out effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), a count suggesting character erasing accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count suggesting character erasing character effect is a timer character display effect shown in FIG. 64B, in which one second has elapsed (countdown) since 50 seconds as a timer initial value is displayed on the timer image TM, This shows a state in which the timer value has reached 49 seconds. Thus, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, the character image CA1 that has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely deleted. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by one second at the timing when the character image CA1 becomes invisible. In other words, the character image CA1 becomes difficult to recognize every second, and the timer image TM switches at the timing when the character image CA1 becomes difficult to recognize. In addition, since the character image CA1 fades out from a display mode that is visually recognizable in one second to a display mode that is difficult to view, the visual state of the character image CA1 during this time indicates a timer value of 1 second or less. ing. Further, in this count suggesting character erasing character effect, when the timer value reaches 49 seconds, all of the first movable character 14 located in the home position are movable, and the second movable character 14 is advanced to the second on the display screen 7a. Advance to the position. That is, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are timers for the timer character display effect shown in FIG. It moves when it counts down from the value for 1 second. It should be noted that all of the first movable auditors 14 immediately retreat to the home position after having advanced to the second advance position. Further, in the count suggesting character erasing character effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), a timer / multiple character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The timer / multiple character display effect is an effect that is performed immediately after the character image CA1 is erased by the count suggesting character erasing character shown in FIG. In this timer / multiple character display effect, character images CA1 and CA2 as specific images are displayed in the character image display area CAH. That is, a plurality of character images are displayed in the character image display area CAH. In this timer / multiple character display effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are respectively home home (origin). ), And a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), a count suggestive character reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count suggesting character reduction effect is a count suggesting character erasing character effect shown in FIG. 64 (D). One second elapses (counts down) after 49 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is 48 seconds. Is shown. Although illustration is omitted, only one character image CA2 of the character images CA1 and CA2 fades out as time elapses for one second after 49 seconds is displayed on the timer image TM. Thus, when the timer value reaches 48 seconds, the character image CA2 that has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely deleted. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by one second at the timing when the character image CA2 becomes invisible. In the count suggesting character reduction effect, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are each home home (origin). , And the battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), a count suggesting character erasing accessory effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This count suggesting character erasing character effect is a count suggesting character decreasing effect shown in FIG. 64 (F). One second has elapsed (countdown) since 48 seconds are displayed on the timer image TM, and the timer value is 47 seconds. Is shown. Although not shown, the character image CA1 fades out as time elapses for one second after 48 seconds is displayed on the timer image TM. Thus, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, the character image CA1 that has faded out in the character image display area CAH is completely deleted. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by one second at the timing when the character image CA1 becomes invisible. In other words, when two seconds have elapsed since 49 seconds were displayed on the timer image TM, both the character images CA1 and CA2 were completely erased, and the timer value was counted at a timing when both the character images CA1 and CA2 became invisible. Seconds are subtracted. That is, the count of the timer value is decremented by the number of seconds equal to the number of deleted character images (for example, if three character images are deleted, the count of the timer value is decremented by 3 seconds). Furthermore, in this count suggesting character eradicating character effect, when the timer value reaches 47 seconds, all of the first movable character 14 located in the home position are movable, and the fourth advance on the display screen 7a is advanced. Advance to the position. That is, the upper right first movable role 14a, the lower right first movable role 14b, the lower left first movable role 14c, and the upper left first movable role 14d are timers for the count suggesting character decrease effect shown in FIG. It moves when it counts down from the value for 1 second. It should be noted that all of the first movable auditors 14 advance to the fourth advance position and then immediately retreat to the home position. Further, in the count suggesting character erasing character effect, a battle effect is continuously executed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the timer image TM, the character image display area CAH, the battle effect, and the timer image TM displayed on the display screen 7a after all the first movable characters 14 shown in FIG. 64 (G) return to the home position. Is switched to display the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 64 (A), and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed. In other words, this reach effect is a timer / multiple character display effect shown in FIG. 64 (E), a count suggesting character erasing character effect effect shown in FIG. 64 (G), and a plurality of character images are displayed. This is performed when all the first movable auditors 14 have advanced to the fourth advance position, that is, the display of a plurality of character images and the advance of the first movable auditors 14 to the fourth advance position are not performed. , A chance up production.

  As described above, in the timer count effect D shown in FIG. 64, every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (in this example, every time the timer value is counted for one second), the character image as the specific image is displayed in the predetermined mode. To change. That is, for example, the display mode changes from a display mode in which the character image is recognizable to a display mode in which the character image is difficult to be recognized from the timer value at the time when the timer is displayed, or during a lapse of one second from the timer value serving as the starting point. . Moreover, when the character image is changed to a display mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize, all the first movable auditors 14 advance to a predetermined advance position. Thus, the counting of the predetermined time (1 second) from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the starting timer value indicates that the change of the display mode of the character image as the specific image and the predetermined character It is possible to suggest both by the fact that it is movable. Further, effects such as displaying a plurality of character images and changing the advance position of the first movable auditors character 14 are performed. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the change of the decorative pattern based on the number of displayed character images and the advance position of the movable accessory.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer count effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the movable body is controlled to move in a predetermined manner every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time. In addition, the movable body is formed of a member having high transparency, and is configured to be able to visually recognize the timer value regardless of how the movable body is controlled. According to this configuration, the player can count the predetermined time from the timer value when the timer is displayed, or the timer value when the timer is displayed, by just looking at the movable body without watching the timer value. You will understand. As a result, for example, when the player counts up to a specific timer value, an advantageous privilege is likely to be given (the jackpot expectation level is increased), and the timer value has become an advantageous privilege. Can be easily understood. In addition, by moving the movable body in various modes, it is possible to perform an effect that indicates not only the timer value but also an advantageous privilege (big hit expectation). For example, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, one of the plurality of movable bodies can be moved in a predetermined manner, or at least two or more of the plurality of movable bodies can be moved in a predetermined manner. It becomes possible. This allows the player to gaze with expectation on which of the plurality of movable bodies has moved or how many of the plurality of movable bodies have moved. Become. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, a plurality of movable bodies move sequentially (clockwise), and each of the movable bodies moves. It is configured such that the fluctuation range from the home position at the time differs. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate from the timer value at the time when the timer is displayed, or from the timer value serving as the starting point, that the counting has been performed for a predetermined time by both the movable movable body and the fluctuation width thereof. Has become. Further, every time a specific number of seconds is counted, all of the movable bodies move, and advance to the advance position having the largest fluctuation range. Thereby, the fact that a specific number of seconds (for example, a number of seconds such as 10 seconds with a good separation) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value as the starting point is determined by the movable movable body. Both the number and its variance can be used to suggest. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, one pair of movable bodies among a plurality of pairs of movable bodies moves, In addition, the plurality of pairs of movable bodies are configured such that the range of fluctuation from the home position when the pair of movable bodies moves is different for each pair. According to this configuration, it is suggested from both the timer value when the timer is displayed or the timer value as the starting point that the counting has been performed for the predetermined time by both the movable pair in the movable pair and the fluctuation width thereof. It becomes possible. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, as a special effect in the timer count effect, when an effect in which the timer value is counted in a shorter time than the actual elapsed time is performed, or When an effect in which the timer value is counted for a time longer than the elapsed time is performed, the movable body is configured to move in a special variation mode. According to this configuration, when suggesting the provision of an advantageous privilege (big hit expectation) in a special effect in such a timer count effect, the movable body is moved in a special change mode different from the normal change mode. Since the movable body is movable, this enables the player to easily recognize that the suggestion of the advantageous privilege has been made only by watching that the movable body has undergone the special fluctuation mode. That is, the player gazes with a sense of expectation as to whether or not the movable body moves in a special variation mode. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the plurality of movable bodies move sequentially (clockwise). After sequentially moving to a predetermined advance position, the advanced state is maintained until all movable bodies are movable. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate from the timer value when the timer is displayed or that the timer has been counted for a predetermined time from the starting timer value by both the movable movable body and its advance state. Become. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, each time a specific number of seconds is counted, a different type of movable body is simultaneously moved. According to this configuration, the fact that a specific number of seconds (for example, a number of seconds such as 10 seconds with a good separation) has been counted from the timer value when the timer is displayed or from the timer value serving as the starting point is movable. This can be indicated by the type of the movable body. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the character image as the specific image is changed to a predetermined mode. More specifically, each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the display mode is changed from a display mode in which the character image as the specific image is viewable to a display mode in which the character image is difficult to view. According to this configuration, it is suggested by changing the display mode of the character image as the specific image that the predetermined time has been counted from the timer value when the timer was displayed or from the timer value as the starting point. Becomes possible. Further, when the character image changes to a display mode that is difficult to view, the movable body advances to a predetermined advance position. Thereby, it is suggested from the timer value when the timer is displayed or that the counting is performed for a predetermined time from the starting timer value by both the change of the display mode of the character image as the specific image and the movable of the movable body. It becomes possible to do. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the timer count effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, the movable body is arranged so as to be visible from the player in the state where the movable body is located in the home location, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not something. For example, the movable body may be arranged so as to be invisible to a player in a state where the movable body is located at the home location. Alternatively, only a specific movable role of the plurality of movable bodies may be arranged so as to be visible to the player. With this configuration, the movable body suddenly appears from a position invisible to the player every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, so that the operation of the movable body can be impressed on the player, and as a result, It can improve the interest of the people. In addition, the movable body is provided at the four corners of the display screen, but this is not a limitation, and the movable body may be provided symmetrically vertically and horizontally except at the four corners of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, in the timer display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the reach effect are deleted, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not something. For example, in the timer display effect, the reach symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed on the rear side of the movable bodies (the upper right first movable role 14a and the upper left first movable role 14d) located in the home location. You may make it. In this case, the entire reach symbol may be displayed on the rear side of the movable body. According to this structure, since the movable body has high transparency, it is possible to perform an effect as if the movable body and the reach symbol are related to each other, and as a result, it is possible to improve interest in the game. The effect displayed in place of the decorative pattern in the timer display effect may not be a battle effect, but may be, for example, a step-up effect or a story effect.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, a timer image including characters and numerals is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image may be displayed using only numbers. In addition, the timer image may be displayed in various fonts and colors to indicate the degree of expectation that the privilege is given by the font and color. Furthermore, although the timer image is shown in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, it may be displayed in a countup manner in which the timer value counts up.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the movable body is moved every time the timer value is counted for 2 seconds, but the movable body has a timer value other than 2 seconds. It may be movable each time it is counted by time. As shown in FIG. 64, the character image as the specific image is deleted every time the timer value is counted for one second when one is displayed, and the timer value is counted for two seconds when two are displayed. The character image is deleted every time the character image is deleted. However, the time at which the character image is deleted can be set arbitrarily.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, when a plurality (two) of character images are displayed as specific images, the number of timer images is increased by one every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (for example, one second). Although the deletion is performed one by one, a plurality of (two) deletions may be performed collectively every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time (for example, two seconds). Further, when the character images are deleted one by one, the displayed character image may be associated with the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested by the order in which the character images are deleted. For example, when a character image with a low jackpot expectation disappears before a character image with a high jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when it disappears later.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the timer image is displayed in the timer image display area, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image may be displayed so as to cover a part of the timer image display area over the timer image display area and the effect screen being displayed according to the display mode of the timer image shown in FIG. 64. Good.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A3-1]
A movable movable body,
Control means for controlling the movable body to move in a predetermined manner;
Display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
A gaming machine with
The display means displays a predetermined timer image as one of the plurality of display effects, and performs an effect including a display of counting a timer value using the timer image,
The control means may control the movable body to move in a predetermined manner every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A3-2]
The movable body is provided in plurality,
Each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, one of the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1.
[Aspect A3-3]
The movable body is provided in plurality,
Every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, at least two or more of the plurality of movable bodies may move in a predetermined manner.
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2.
[Aspect A3-4]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is an effect that includes displaying a predetermined timer image and counting the timer value using the timer image.
The second effect is an effect that changes the specific image into a predetermined mode,
The display means may change the specific image to a predetermined mode every time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A3-5]
Each time the timer value is counted for a predetermined time, the display unit may change from a display mode in which the specific image can be viewed to a display mode in which the specific image is difficult to view,
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4, wherein:

  Hereinafter, the timer effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68. This timer effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the change display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). Is executed at the start of the variable display, at the start of the decorative pattern variable effect, during the decorative pattern change effect, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. More specifically, the timer effect is an effect including a display for counting a timer value using a timer image and a display for stopping or digesting the timer value at a predetermined value, and the timer value is stopped or digested at a predetermined value. This is an effect in which, when a display effect is performed, the specific image is simultaneously displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode.

[Timer effect A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A.
In the timer effect A, first, a timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this timer effect execution effect, the decoration effect is performed in synchronization with the special symbol change display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left design display area has a left decoration design 8L and a middle design. A middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 65 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect in which an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed on the lower portion of the display screen 7a is executed. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. Direction is not executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), on the display screen 7a, a timer effect suggestion effect is executed. In the timer effect suggestion effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 65 (A), the character “WIN!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "WIN!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a while the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. The timer image display area TMH is displayed on the display screen 7a, in which a part of the effect screen (decorative display screen of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R) being displayed on the display screen 7a is torn (broken) and is visible from the torn area. It is formed on the back side (rear side) of the middle effect screen. Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 65 (C), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), a timer digestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 65 (C) is counted down to 0 seconds during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, indicating that the timer value has been exhausted. It is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the deleted timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to a player, and the big hit expectation of the change (the big hit type expectation) depends on the type of the specific image (character MKE). ). In FIG. 65 (E), the character MKE of “chance” is displayed at substantially the same position where the timer image TM was displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), a specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 65 (E), and instead of the deleted decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, The character MLG is displayed on the display screen 7a. The character MLG is displayed as a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to the player, and the big hit expectation of the change (including the big hit type expectation) depends on the type of the specific image (character MLG). ). Here, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the character MLG is composed of the same character as the character MKE, is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and part of the character MKE is displayed by the character MKE. Covered readable. That is, the character MLG is displayed substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH (for example, 3 to 5 times larger) than the character MKE, and the timer image display area is displayed. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part thereof is displayed in a manner that can be read by the character MKE. By displaying the character MLG with the same character as the character MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the screen of the specific image superimposed effect shown in FIG. 65 (F) is switched. That is, the character MLG and the character MKE shown in FIG. 65 (F) are deleted, and a reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array on the display screen 7a is executed. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array.

[Timer effect B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect B.
In the timer effect B, first, a timer effect execution enable / disable effect is executed as shown in FIG. In this timer effect execution effect, the decoration effect is performed in synchronization with the special symbol change display. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left design display area has a left decoration design 8L and a middle design. A middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 66 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
Further, a battle effect in which an image in which the player's ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed on the lower portion of the display screen 7a is executed. This battle effect is an effect for deciding whether or not to execute a timer effect. As a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA loses. Direction is not executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), a timer effect possible indication effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer effect suggestion effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 66 (A), the character “WIN!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "WIN!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66 (C), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), a timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66 (C) was counted down to 5 seconds during the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value stopped halfway. It is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 5 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the deleted timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to a player, and the big hit expectation of the change (the big hit type expectation) depends on the type of the specific image (character MKE). ). In FIG. 66 (E), the character MKE of “chance” is displayed at almost the same position where the timer image TM was displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), a specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 66 (E), and instead of the deleted decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, The character MLG is displayed on the display screen 7a. The character MLG is displayed as a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to the player, and the big hit expectation of the change (including the big hit type expectation) depends on the type of the specific image (character MLG). ). Here, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the character MLG is composed of the same character as the character MKE, is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and a part of the character MKE is displayed by the character MKE. Covered readable. That is, the character MLG is displayed substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH (for example, 3 to 5 times larger) than the character MKE, and the timer image display area is displayed. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part thereof is displayed in a manner that can be read by the character MKE. By displaying the character MLG with the same character as the character MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), a specific image alone effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the specific image single effect, the character MKE is deleted from the character MLG and the character MKE displayed in the specific image superimposed effect illustrated in FIG. 66 (F), and only the character MLG is displayed alone on the display screen 7a. You. That is, the timer image display area TMH is deleted. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG is changed obliquely (downward to the right) from the display mode displayed horizontally in the specific image superimposition effect, and is entirely displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the entirety of the character MLG, the player can completely visually recognize the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to the player, and more accurately display the current game state. We can grasp it and have great expectations for further development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66H, a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the screen of the specific image single effect shown in FIG. 66 (G) is switched. That is, the character MLG shown in FIG. 66 (G) is deleted, and a reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array on the display screen 7a is executed. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array.

[Timer effect C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 67A, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the decorative symbol fluctuating effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuating display. The right decorative design 8R is displayed in the middle decorative design 8C and the right design display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 67 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed and displayed. Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 67 (A), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), a timer digestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 67 (A) is counted down to 0 second during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, indicating that the timer value has been exhausted. It is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the deleted timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to a player, and the big hit expectation of the change (the big hit type expectation) depends on the type of the specific image (character MKE). ). In FIG. 67 (C), the character MKE of “chance” is displayed at substantially the same position where the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are deleted, and a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a in place of the deleted decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. . The characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed as specific images related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree of the change depends on the type of the specific image (characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3). (Including the jackpot type expectation) (the jackpot expectation: character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are different from character MKE (character MSG1 of “hot heat”, character MSG2 of “hold change”, character MSG3 of “NEXT”) And is displayed at the rear side of the character MKE in approximately the same size as the character MKE. The display positions of these characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 move so as to rotate in a predetermined direction. If the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 overlap with the character MKE during the movement, part or all of the characters MKE pass through the rear side of the character MKE and become characters MKE. It is displayed in a manner to be covered. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), a specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 67C, and the specific image is replaced with the specific image instead of the deleted characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3. Is displayed in the effect image display area EGH. The character MLG is the same character as the character MKE, is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and a part of the character MKE is readable by the character MKE. That is, the character MLG is displayed substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH (for example, 3 to 5 times larger) than the character MKE, and the timer image display area is displayed. The TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part thereof is displayed in a manner that can be read by the character MKE. That is, in the timer image change effect (FIG. 67 (C)), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 displayed as the specific image do not have the same character (“chance”) as the character MKE, and the subsequent specific image superimposition effect ( In FIG. 67 (D), a character MLG as a specific image of the same character as the character MKE is displayed instead of the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3. In this manner, when the same character MLG as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the jackpot expectation degree of the change becomes the highest (the jackpot expectation degree: character MLG> character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). By displaying the same character MLG as the character MKE, the player can have great expectations for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), a specific image alone effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the specific image single effect, the character MKE is deleted from the character MLG and the character MKE displayed in the specific image superimposed effect illustrated in FIG. 67D, and only the character MLG is displayed alone on the display screen 7a. You. That is, the timer image display area TMH is deleted. At this time, the display mode of the character MLG is changed obliquely (downward to the right) from the display mode displayed horizontally in the specific image superimposition effect, and is entirely displayed on the display screen 7a. By displaying the entirety of the character MLG, the player can completely visually recognize the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to the player, and more accurately display the current game state. We can grasp it and have great expectations for further development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), a certain-change reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this certain-change reach effect, the screen of the specific image alone effect shown in FIG. 67 (E) is switched. That is, the character MLG shown in FIG. 67 (E) is erased, and a positive variation reach effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the maximum variable jackpot reach symbol array on the display screen 7a is executed. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In the present example, the jackpot symbol arrangement “777” is “16RV passing planned jackpot” (probably variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy-high base state) until the game state hits the next jackpot. ) Is a jackpot.

  On the other hand, it is assumed that “NEXT” is displayed as the character MLG in the specific image superimposition effect as shown in FIG. 67 (G) instead of FIG. 67 (D). That is, in the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67 (G), the characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are erased from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 67 (C), and the erased characters MSG1, MSG2 are displayed. , MSG3, a character MLG is displayed in the effect image display area EGH as a specific image. The character MLG is not the same character as the character MKE (“chance”), but is displayed as a character obtained by enlarging (for example, 3 to 5 times) the character MSG3 (“NEXT”). That is, in this specific image superimposition effect, MSG3 is selected from the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 displayed in the timer image change effect (FIG. 67 (C)), and the back of the timer image display area TMH is set as the character MLG. Is displayed substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH, which is larger than the character MKE. As described above, when the character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the variation is greater than when the same character MLG is displayed. Is large (big hit expectation: character MLG> character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). By displaying the character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE, the player cannot have much expectation for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), a normal reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. As described above, when the same character MLG as the character MKE is displayed in the specific image superimposition effect, the specific image alone effect illustrated in FIG. 67E is performed as an effect that gives the player an expectation. However, when a character MLG that is not the same as the character MKE is displayed in the specific image superimposition effect, the specific image alone effect is omitted, and the normal reach effect shown in FIG. 67 (H) is executed. In this normal reach effect, the screen of the specific image superimposition effect shown in FIG. 67 (G) is switched, and the normal reach effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop in the reach pattern of the normal jackpot on the display screen 7a. Be executed. In this example, “8 ↓ 8” is shown in the reach symbol array. In this example, the jackpot symbol array “888” is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot” (normal jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times The gaming state is a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state), and thereafter, it is a jackpot in a low-probability low-base state (normal state).

[Timer effect D]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D.
In the timer effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 68A, a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer display effect, the decorative symbol fluctuating effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol fluctuating display. The right decorative design 8R is displayed in the middle decorative design 8C and the right design display area. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 68 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed in the timer image display area TMH at the left center of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being changed and displayed. Timer image TM is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 66 (C), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value. When the timer image TM is displayed, a battle effect is performed at the center of the display screen 7a instead of the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Although not shown, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a small size at the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), a timer digestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer digestion effect, the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 68 (A) is counted down to 0 seconds during the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, indicating that the timer value has been exhausted. It is shown. Further, a battle effect is continuously performed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, an image in which the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), a timer image change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer image change effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM stops at 0 seconds. In this timer image change effect, the timer image TM is deleted, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the timer image display area TMH instead of the deleted timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is displayed as a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to a player, and the big hit expectation of the change (the big hit type expectation) depends on the type of the specific image (character MKE). ). In FIG. 68 (C), the character MKE of “CHANCE” is displayed at substantially the same position where the timer image TM was displayed. Further, in the timer image change effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are deleted, and a plurality of characters MSG1, MSG2, MSG3 are displayed on the display screen 7a in place of the deleted decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. . The characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed as specific images related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to the player, and the jackpot expectation degree of the change depends on the type of the specific image (characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3). (Including the jackpot type expectation) (the jackpot expectation: character MSG1> character MSG2> character MSG3). Here, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are different from the character MKE (the character MSG1 of “participation”, the character MSG2 of “pending change”, and the character MSG3 of “NEXT”). The character MKE is displayed on the rear side of the character MKE in substantially the same size as the character MKE. The display positions of these characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 move so as to rotate in a predetermined direction. If the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 overlap with the character MKE during the movement, part or all of the characters MKE pass through the rear side of the character MKE and become characters MKE. It is displayed in a manner to be covered. That is, the characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed in the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), a specific image superimposition effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image superimposition effect, the characters MSG2 and MSG3 are deleted from the display state of the timer image change effect shown in FIG. 68 (C), and the character MSG1 (“participation”) is enlarged and displayed substantially at the center of the display screen 7a. You. That is, the display mode of the character MSG1 changes to the character MLG as the specific image, and the character MSG1 is displayed in the effect image display area EGH. Further, the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH changes from “chance” to “participation” and is enlarged and displayed. That is, the character MKE as the first display mode of the specific image and the character MLG as the second display mode of the specific image are displayed as the same character. The character MLG is displayed larger than the character MKE behind the character MKE, and a part of the character MLG is readable by the character MKE. That is, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the character MLG is displayed substantially at the center of the effect image display area EGH located behind the timer image display area TMH as compared with the character MKE (for example, 2). In addition, the timer image display area TMH and the effect image display area EGH are superimposed, and a part thereof is displayed in a form that can be read by the character MKE. In this manner, when the same character MLG as the character MKE displayed in the timer image display area TMH is displayed in the effect image display area EGH, the jackpot expectation degree of the change becomes the highest (the jackpot expectation degree: character MLG> character MSG2> character MSG3). By displaying the same character MLG as the character MKE, and furthermore, the character MKE is displayed in the same character as the character MLG by changing and enlarging the character that was initially displayed, so that the player can With this development, we can have even higher expectations.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), a specific image character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this specific image character effect, the character MKE is deleted from the character MLG and the character MKE displayed in the specific image superimposed effect shown in FIG. 68 (D), and only the character MLG is displayed on the display screen 7a. That is, the timer image display area TMH is deleted. At this time, the character MLG is displayed diagonally (downward to the right) from the horizontal display in the specific image superimposition effect, and is entirely displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. A character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a name CNA (“OARO”) of the character CRC is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character CRC is displayed based on the display of “participation” as the character MLG. In the battle effect (FIG. 68 (B)), the character CRC and the enemy character CRB together with the ally character CRA on the player side are displayed. A character that battles. Note that there are a plurality of types of characters CRC displayed in the specific image character effect, and the type of the character CRC indicates a large hit expectation degree (including the big hit type expectation) of the variation. Note that “OARO” as the character CRC displayed here is a character having a relatively high jackpot expectation. Since the character MLG is displayed in its entirety, the player can completely visually recognize the character MLG displayed as a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to the player, and can more accurately display the current game state. With the appearance of the character CRC “OARO” that can be grasped and has a relatively high jackpot expectation, it is possible to have great expectations for further development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), a certain-change reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this certain-change reach effect, the screen of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (E) is switched. That is, the character MLG, character CRC, and name CNA shown in FIG. 68 (E) are erased, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop on the reach symbol arrangement of the large hit jackpot on the display screen 7a. Is done. In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In the present example, the jackpot symbol arrangement “777” is “16RV passing planned jackpot” (probably variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy-high base state) until the game state hits the next jackpot. ) Is a jackpot.

  On the other hand, suppose that the name CNA (“ZERO”) is displayed as the character CRC as shown in FIG. 68 (G) instead of FIG. 68 (E) in the specific image character effect. "ZERO" as the character CRC is a character having a relatively low jackpot expectation degree, and has a lower jackpot expectation degree than the above-mentioned "OARO". That is, the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (G) is changed from the display state of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (E) to a character CRC instead of the character “OARO” having a relatively high jackpot expectation. A character "ZERO" having a relatively low jackpot expectation is displayed. In this way, by displaying the character CRC having a relatively low jackpot expectation in the specific image character effect, the player cannot have much expectation for the subsequent development.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), a normal reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal reach effect, the screen of the specific image character effect shown in FIG. 68 (G) is switched, and the normal reach effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stop in the reach pattern of the normal jackpot on the display screen 7a. Be executed. In this example, “8 ↓ 8” is shown in the reach symbol array. In this example, the jackpot symbol array “888” is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot” (normal jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times The gaming state is a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state), and thereafter, it is a jackpot in a low-probability low-base state (normal state).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the timer effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65 to FIG. 68, the first effect displays a predetermined timer image, displays a timer value using the timer image, and displays the timer value. The second effect is an effect including a display of a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to the player, and the timer value is a predetermined value in the first effect. When the display effect to be stopped or exhausted is performed, the effect of simultaneously displaying the specific image in the first display mode and the second display mode as the second effect is performed. According to this configuration, when the timer value is stopped or exhausted at the predetermined value, the specific image related to the provision of the advantageous privilege to the player is displayed, so the player increases the ever-changing timer value. You can enjoy the game while watching with expectation. In addition, since the specific image is displayed simultaneously in the first display mode and the second display mode, by changing the combination of the display modes in various ways, the degree of expectation of the player for the subsequent development of the game is changed. Can be done. Thus, the player can be delighted. Further, the timer value to be stopped is associated with the specific image, and the expectation degree of the player can be changed by the numerical value of the stopped timer value. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the first display mode of the specific image is a display mode that is displayed instead of the timer image at the display position of the timer image. The second display mode has a configuration in which a part displayed behind the timer image is partially covered by the specific image of the first display mode. According to this configuration, the specific image displayed in the second display mode can be estimated by the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the specific image is a predetermined character, and the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image display the same character. In the display mode, the characters in the second display mode, which are partially covered by the characters in the first display mode, are configured to be readable display modes. According to this configuration, although the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode are partially covered, the display mode is the same as the characters displayed in the first display mode and can be read. Therefore, the player can accurately guess the characters of the specific image displayed in the second display mode and enjoy the game with great expectation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, when the characters in the first display mode are deleted, the display modes are changed and displayed as a whole when the characters in the first display mode are deleted. It has a configuration. According to this configuration, the characters of the second display mode that are partially covered are displayed entirely, so that the player can verify whether the characters of the second display mode that he or she guessed were correct. Can be. Furthermore, since the display mode of the characters in the second display mode changes when it is entirely displayed, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the player by, for example, changing the display mode in various ways. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68, when the entire display of the second display mode is deleted, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach state. According to this configuration, when the character in the second display mode is entirely displayed, the game always reaches the reach, and the player is delighted with whether or not the character in the second display mode is entirely displayed. Furthermore, it is also possible to associate the character of the second display mode with the jackpot expectation degree and change the jackpot expectation degree by the character of the second display mode displayed as a whole. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the timer effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65 to FIG. 68, the specific image displayed in place of the timer value in the timer image display area displays predetermined characters. It is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be an image of a symbol, a mark, a picture, a character, or an object or article having a specific shape.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in the timer display effect, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value is counted down, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, in the timer display effect, the timer value may be changed irregularly (random change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed by a count-up method in which a timer value is counted up. Further, in the timer display effect, 10 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer, but this is not limited to 10 seconds and is arbitrary. Further, in the timer stop effect shown in FIG. 66, the timer image change effect is executed when the timer value stops at 5 seconds, but this is not limited to 5 seconds and is optional.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the specific image alone effect (FIG. 65, FIG. 66) or the specific image character effect (FIG. 68) is executed from the specific image superimposition effect, The character as the specific image is displayed in a diagonal manner (downward to the right) from the display mode displayed horizontally, so that the entire image is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the display mode may be changed to an arc shape, a vertical shape, a zigzag shape, or the like instead of the diagonal shape, and the entire display may be performed. Then, in this case, the color may also be changed. Further, the display mode may be changed in a plurality of types, and the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on which type the display mode changes.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, in the timer image change effect, three characters MSG1, MSG2, and MSG3 are displayed as specific images in the effect image display area. The invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of these specific images may be other than three, or at least two or more. Further, these specific images may be other than characters, and may be images of symbols, marks, pictures, characters, or objects or articles having a specific shape. Furthermore, the same image (for example, “chance”) as the specific image displayed in the timer image display area may be displayed in these specific images.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, one character participates in the specific image character effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the specific image character effect, a plurality of characters may participate. In addition, the character who participated in the battle battles with the enemy character CRB together with the ally character CRA on the player side. On the contrary, the character that has participated in the battle may battle with the ally character CRA on the player side together with the enemy character CRB. You may. In this case, a plurality of character colors of the character MLG of “participation in war” may be provided, and it may be determined according to the character colors whether the participating character is attached to the ally character CRA or the enemy character CRB.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means can execute a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is a display that displays a predetermined timer image, a display that counts a timer value using the timer image, and a display that includes a display that stops or consumes the timer value at a predetermined value.
The second effect is an effect that includes a display of a specific image related to the provision of an advantageous privilege to a player,
When a display effect in which the timer value is stopped or exhausted at a predetermined value in the first effect is performed, the display means displays the specific image as a second effect in a first display mode and a second display mode. Perform the effect to be displayed at the same time,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect A4-2]
The first display mode of the specific image is a display mode displayed at a display position of the timer image in place of the timer image,
The second display mode of the specific image is a display mode in which a part displayed behind the timer image is covered by the specific image of the first display mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1, characterized in that:
[Aspect A4-3]
The specific image is a predetermined character, and the first display mode and the second display mode of the specific image are display modes in which the same character is displayed,
The characters in the second display mode, which are partially covered by the characters in the first display mode, are readable display modes.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2, characterized in that:
[Aspect A4-4]
When the characters in the first display mode are erased, the characters in the second display mode are changed to be entirely displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3, wherein:
[Aspect A4-5]
It is provided with a decorative pattern display means capable of displaying a variable display of the decorative pattern,
The decorative symbol display means displays the decorative symbol in a reach state when the entire display of the second display mode is deleted.
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-4, characterized in that:

  The image transmission display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This image transmissive display effect can be executed, for example, during a fluctuation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the image transparent display effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the display image. This is an effect of displaying an image on 7a.

[Transparency display effect A]
FIG. 69 is a view for explaining the image transparent display effect A. As shown in FIG. 69 (A), a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmissive display effect A, a specific image (small image) IZ of "SMILE Iku!" Is displayed on the display screen 7a during the fluctuation effect. This image becomes visible through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), in a state where the cold image IZ is displayed, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the cold image IZ of the display screen 7a and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and are visually recognized. A superimposed effect is made possible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (C) to FIG. 69 (E), an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). At this time, each of the four transmissive members may be in contact with each other or may have a slight gap. As shown in FIG. 69 (D), when the first movable auditorium 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed.

  In the second mode in which the first movable role 14 has completed moving to the advanced position, the first movable role 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the first movable role 14. State. A continuous image IZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, a character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable character 14, and a smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a random position. The displayed composite effect is executed. At this time, the cold image IZ displayed on the display screen 7a moves within the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes its display position, so that the character image MJ, the cold image IZ, Two or three of the smile images SL sometimes overlap and become visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (F) and FIG. 69 (G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect is provided in which the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are repeatedly switched between a state in which they can be visually recognized at random and a state in which they are difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a random position. In addition, there are a case where a plurality of images IZ of the display screen 7a are displayed on the display screen 7a and a case where a single image is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, there are cases where each moves and stops. As a result, two or three of the character image MJ, the cold image IZ, and the smile image SL sometimes overlap and become visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (H) to FIG. 69 (J), a retreat movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, each of the four transmissive members is switched between a state in which the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are randomly visible and a state in which the character images MJ are difficult to visually recognize. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role 14. (First aspect).

[Transparent image display B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for describing the image transmission display effect B. As shown in FIG. 70A, a light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transparent display effect B, a decorative design change effect (change display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the variable display is being executed, the timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The timer image TM1 becomes visible through the light guide plate 17. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numeric image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed. However, the countdown may be started after a certain time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, “30” means 30 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is provided in which the timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a and the smile image SL on the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C) to FIG. 70 (E), an advance movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). At this time, each of the four transmissive members may be in contact with each other or may have a slight gap. As shown in FIG. 70 (D), when the first movable role object 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed.

  In the second mode in which the first movable role 14 has completed moving to the advanced position, the first movable role 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the first movable role 14. State. The timer image TM1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a random position. Is performed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues to count down, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. The character image MJ, the timer image TM1, and the smile image SL can be visually recognized, with two or three of them sometimes overlapping.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F) and FIG. 70 (G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect is provided in which the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are repeatedly switched between a state in which they can be visually recognized at random and a state in which they are difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a random position. The timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL are displayed. The two sometimes overlap and become visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (H) to FIG. 70 (J), a retreat movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, each of the four transmissive members is switched between a state in which the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are randomly visible and a state in which the character images MJ are difficult to visually recognize. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role 14. (Second aspect). In the timer image TM1, when a timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed, an expectation degree suggestion image EI1 indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. Is done. Thereafter, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Transparent image display C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for describing the image transmission display effect C. As shown in FIG. 71A, a light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmission display effect C, a decorative design change effect (change display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the decorative pattern repeatedly displays a variable display and a stop display, and here, a state in which the display is stopped and displayed is shown. As described above, when the decorative symbol repeatedly changes and stops, the timer image TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the timer image TM1 is executed as one of the prefetch effects. This timer image TM1 becomes visible through the light guide plate 17. The timer image TM1 includes a two-digit number image (digital display image) representing a timer value (count value). The timer image TM1 may or may not include a frame image, a region image, a pattern image, and the like other than the numeric image. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the timer image TM1 is displayed. However, the countdown may be started after a certain time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, after "30" is displayed as the timer image TM1, the timer value is decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second. That is, “30” means 30 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposed effect is provided in which the decorative image or the timer image TM1 stopped and displayed and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. It is. As a result of the superimposition effect, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the stopped and displayed decorative pattern explodes and disappears. That is, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 appear at random on the stop-displayed decorative symbols, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative symbols were destroyed by the smile images SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 71 (C) and 71 (D), the value to be displayed next as the timer value of the timer image TM1 is displayed together with the current timer value in an enlarged state. For example, when the timer image TM1 (current timer value) is “5”, the value “4” to be displayed next is enlarged and displayed together with the current timer value “5”. In FIG. 70 (D), the next timer value image NT representing “4” having transparency and overlapping the current timer value “5” is displayed in an enlarged manner. The next timer value image NT has transparency, and the timer image TM1 is visible through the next timer image NT. Since the next timer value image NT is displayed in an enlarged manner, it is larger than the timer image TM1, and the upper and lower ends of the numeral “4” protrude from the display screen 7a. The size and the display position of the next timer value image NT approach the portion (image area) of the timer image TM1 in which the counter value is displayed, while reducing while overlapping the timer image TM1. When the next timer value image NT substantially coincides in size and display position with the image area in which the counter value is represented in the timer image TM1, the decrement of the timer image TM1 is completed. Here, the next timer value image NT representing “4” is reduced so that the size and the display position match the “5” part of the timer image TM1, and “4” of the next timer value image NT and the timer image are displayed. Immediately after the size and position of TM5 “5” match, the timer image TM1 is replaced with “4”.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (D) and FIG. 71 (E), an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). At this time, each of the four transmissive members may be in contact with each other or may have a slight gap. As shown in FIG. 71 (D), when the first movable role object 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed.

  In the second mode in which the first movable role 14 has completed moving to the advanced position, the first movable role 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the first movable role 14. State. The timer image TM1 is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, the character image MJ is continuously displayed on the first movable accessory 14, and the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a random position. Is performed. At this time, the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a continues to count down, and the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. Two or three of the character image MJ, the timer image TM1, and the smile image SL are sometimes overlapped and can be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F) and FIG. 71 (G), random display of the character image MJ of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, an effect is provided in which the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are repeatedly switched between a state in which they can be visually recognized at random and a state in which they are difficult to visually recognize. At this time, the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at a random position. The timer image TM1 on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized through the first movable accessory 14 and the light guide plate 17, and two or three of the character image MJ, the display screen 7a, and the smile image SL are displayed. The two sometimes overlap and become visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H) to FIG. 71 (J), a retreat movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, each of the four transmissive members is switched between a state in which the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are randomly visible and a state in which the character images MJ are difficult to visually recognize. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role 14. (Second aspect). In the timer image TM1, when a timer zero display effect in which the timer value becomes 0 (zero) is performed, an expectation degree suggestion image EI1 indicating the expectation degree of the jackpot in the fluctuation is displayed at the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. Is done. Thereafter, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

[Transparent image display effect D]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for describing the image transparent display effect D. As shown in FIG. 72A, a light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. In the image transmission display effect C, a decorative design change effect (change display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is provided in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the stopped and displayed decorative pattern explodes and disappears. That is, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 appear at random on the stop-displayed decorative symbols, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative symbols were destroyed by the smile images SL. After the decorative symbol has exploded and disappeared as shown in FIG. 72 (E), the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 72 (F).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), an advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 and a random display of the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are performed. These effects are the same as the image transmission display effect C. That is, in the advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable auditorium move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). At this time, each of the four transmissive members may be in contact with each other or may have a slight gap. When the first movable auditorium 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed. In the second mode in which the first movable role 14 has completed moving to the advanced position, the first movable role 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the first movable role 14. State. On the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, on the first movable object 14, the character image MJ is continuously displayed, and on the light guide plate 17, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at a random position. Is displayed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. The character image MJ, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the smile image SL can be visually recognized because two or three of them sometimes overlap. After that, a retreat movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. Thereby, almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without the intervention of the first movable role object 14 (second mode).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (I), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is provided in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative pattern. As a result of the superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 72 (J), the decorative pattern stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 appear at random on the stop-displayed decorative symbols, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative symbols were destroyed by the smile images SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started. In the above description, the display is performed for a plurality of variable displays, but may be performed for one change. That is, it may be performed at the time of the pseudo continuous production. In this case, FIG. 72 (B) and FIG. 72 (H) may be a temporary stop display.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the image transmission display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the light guide plate 17 that can switch between the state in which the smile image SL is visible and the state in which the smile image SL is difficult to view, and the state in which the character image MJ is visible and difficult to see A first movable role, which can be switched to a normal state, the light guide plate 17 having transparency, and a character image MJ displayed on the first movable role 14 via the light guide plate 17. It is possible to execute an image transmissive display effect in which the image can be visually recognized. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmissive display effect, the character image MJ represented on the first movable role 14 is visible via the light guide plate 17, An effect in which the smile image SL can be visually recognized on the light guide plate 17 is included. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmissive display effect, the smile image SL represented on the light guide plate 17 and the character image MJ represented on the first movable role object 14 are displayed. Includes effects that overlap and become visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, in the image transmissive display effect, a state in which the smile image SL is visible and a state in which the smile image SL is difficult to view are alternately provided at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. Includes repetitive effects. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable role object 14 is configured to be movable. An effect in which the movable character 14 moves is included. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the first movable role 14 has transparency, and the gaming machine 1 further recognizes the image IZ as being visible. A display screen 7a that can be switched to a difficult state is provided, and in the image transmission display effect, the image IZ displayed on the display screen 7a is visually recognized through the light guide plate 17 and the first movable role 14. Includes productions that are possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, the light guide plate 17 capable of switching between the state in which the smile image SL is visible and the state in which the smile image SL is difficult to view, and the state in which the timer image TM1 is visible and difficult to view. And a display screen 7a that can be switched to a normal state. The light guide plate 17 has transparency, and the timer image TM1 displayed on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized via the light guide plate 17. A transparent display effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the image transmission display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 69, it is assumed that the image IZ is displayed on the display screen 7a. However, on the display screen 7a, an image having a content different from that of the image IZ may be displayed similarly to the image IZ. For example, it may be a specific character image or a specific character, figure, symbol, or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the image transparent display effects of FIGS. 69 to 72 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the image transmissive display effect A of FIG. 69, a variable display of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 72 or an explosion effect after the display of the smile image SL may be combined. Also, the timer image TM1 of FIGS. 70 and 71 may be displayed in the image transmission display effect D of FIG. 72.
[Modification 3]
70 and 71, the timer value of the timer image TM1 is finally set to zero. However, the timer value of the timer image TM1 may end at a value other than zero. For example, after the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes a number other than zero (for example, 2), the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may be displayed. In the image transmissive display effects of FIGS. 70 and 71, the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 may not be displayed.
[Modification 4]
In the image transmissive display effects of FIGS. 69 to 72, the smile image SL and the timer image TM1 are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable role 14. However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A5-1]
A first image display area that can be switched between a state in which the first image is viewable and a state in which the first image is difficult to view,
A gaming machine comprising: a second image display area that can be switched between a state in which a second image can be viewed and a state in which the second image is difficult to view,
The first image display area has transparency, and can execute a specific effect that allows the second image displayed in the second image display area to be visible through the first image display area. A gaming machine characterized by that:
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1,
In the specific effect, the first image is visually recognized in the first image display area while the second image displayed in the second image display area is visible through the first image display area. A gaming machine characterized by including possible effects.
◇ [Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-2,
The specific effect includes an effect in which the first image displayed in the first image display area and the second image displayed in the second image display area overlap and become visible. A gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A5-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific effect includes an effect in which a state in which the first image is visible and a state in which the first image is difficult to view are alternately repeated at a plurality of different positions in the first image area.
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
The second image display area is configured to be movable,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific effect includes an effect in which the second image display area moves while the second image is visible.
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-5,
The second image display area has transparency,
The gaming machine further comprises:
A third image display area that can be switched between a state in which the third image is viewable and a state in which the third image is difficult to view,
The specific effect includes an effect in which the third image displayed in the third image display area can be visually recognized through the first image display area and the second image display area. Gaming machine to do.
◇ [Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A5-1 to A5-4,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image is a timer image.

  The image combination effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. This image combination effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the image combination effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the display screen 7a. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen.

[Image combination effect A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for describing image combination effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image. As shown in FIG. 73 (A), in the image combination effect A, on the display screen 7a, a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed by the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. . This variable display becomes visible through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transmissive members may be in contact with each other or may have a slight gap. By this movable combination merging effect, the four character partial images BN approach each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, when the four members of the first movable role 14 gather at the advanced position, an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target can be formed as a whole of the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented on the four members of the first movable auditorium 14 and the display screen 7a behind the smile face character image have the smile face. An image related to the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed in accordance with the outline of the smile face character image. Here, the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and has an effect such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this manner, a character image representing one object (here, a smile face) is formed by the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined can be performed. Thereby, a player can be entertained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E) and FIG. 73 (F), a retreat movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN can be viewed on each of the four transparent members. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role 14. (First aspect).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), the advance movement effect of the first movable auditors 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable auditorium 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). As shown in FIG. 73 (G), when the first movable auditorium 14 is moving, the character image MJ is still displayed on each of the four transparent members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H) to FIG. 73 (J), the retreat movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, each of the four transmissive members is switched between a state in which the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are randomly visible and a state in which the character images MJ are difficult to visually recognize. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (J), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role 14. (First aspect). Also, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Image combination effect B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for describing image combination effect B. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image. As shown in FIG. 74 (A), in the image combination effect B, on the display screen 7a, a decorative design change effect (change display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. . Further, the effect image EF is displayed on the display screen 7a. The fluctuation display and the effect image EF are visible through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors goods 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transmissive members may be in contact with each other or may have a slight gap. By this movable combination merging effect, the four character partial images BN approach each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, when the four members of the first movable role 14 gather at the advanced position, an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target can be formed as a whole of the four character partial images BN.

  On the display screen 7a, the effect image EF is continuously displayed, and a smile face character image formed by the entire character partial images BN represented on the four members of the first movable auditorium 14, and an effect image An image combination effect is executed by the EF. Specifically, the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and has an effect such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. Therefore, it can be said that the effect image EF is an image related to the smile face character image. In this manner, a character image representing one object (here, a smile face) is formed by the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined can be performed. Thereby, a player can be entertained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D) and FIG. 74 (E), a retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN can be viewed on each of the four transparent members. The effect image EF and the fluctuation display are continuously displayed, and can be visually recognized without the intervention of the first movable role object 14. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the effect image EF disappears.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G) and FIG. 74 (H), the advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable auditorium 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a follow-up image TJ that follows (cooperates with) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The follow-up image TJ is an image displayed in an area on the back surface of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a, and includes the shapes of the four transmissive members. They have almost the same shape. That is, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the region on the back of the four transmissive members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the following image TJ also has the same rectangular shape. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the following image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members. When each of the four transmissive members moves to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four following images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, each of the following images TJ includes a face image of the character, and the selection button 63 performs a selection effect in which the player selects one character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the following image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a which is the back surface of the four transmissive members is reduced, so that the display area of the follow-up image TJ is also reduced. According to such an effect, as seen from the player, the following image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role 14. (First aspect). Also, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Image combination effect C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for describing image combination effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image. As shown in FIG. 75 (A), in the image combination effect C, a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed on the display screen 7a by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. . This variable display becomes visible through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed in a state where the smile image DS is displayed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). ). By this movable combination merging effect, the four character partial images BN approach each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, when the four members of the first movable role 14 gather at the advanced position, an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target can be formed as a whole of the four character partial images BN. The smile face character image formed by the four character partial images BN has the same size and the same contents as the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a, and the two images overlap. From this, it can be said that the smile image DS displayed on the display screen 7a is an image related to the smile face character image. As described above, a character image representing one object (here, a smile face) is formed by the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable auditory character 14, and the character image is further displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the character images DS, a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined can be performed. Thereby, a player can be entertained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), an evacuation movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN can be viewed on each of the four transparent members. The smile image DS is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a and can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role object 14.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), the smile image DS disappears, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is provided in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the decorative pattern stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 appear at random on the stop-displayed decorative symbols, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative symbols were destroyed by the smile images SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 75 (H).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), an advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 and a random display of the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are performed. In the advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14, the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). When the first movable auditorium 14 is moving, the character image MJ remains displayed on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the smile image SL is continuously displayed on the light guide plate 17 at random, the character image MJ of the first movable auditorium 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. Direction is performed. In the second mode in which the first movable role 14 has completed moving to the advanced position, the first movable role 14 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, and the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the first movable role 14. State. On the display screen 7a, the decorative symbol variation display is continuously displayed, on the first movable object 14, the character image MJ is continuously displayed, and on the light guide plate 17, the smile image SL is continuously displayed at a random position. Is displayed. At this time, the display position of the smile image SL displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes. The character image MJ, the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the smile image SL can be visually recognized because two or three of them sometimes overlap. After that, a retreat movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. Thereby, almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without the intervention of the first movable role object 14 (second mode). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. In the above description, the display is performed for a plurality of variable displays, but may be performed for one change. That is, it may be performed at the time of the pseudo continuous production. In this case, FIG. 75 (E) and FIG. 75 (J) may be a temporary stop display.

[Image combination effect D]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for describing the image combination effect D. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image. As shown in FIG. 76 (A), in the image combination effect D, a decorative design change effect (change display) is executed on the display screen 7a by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. . This variable display becomes visible through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors goods 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transmissive members may be in contact with each other or may have a slight gap. By this movable combination merging effect, the four character partial images BN approach each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, when the four members of the first movable role 14 gather at the advanced position, an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target can be formed as a whole of the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented on the four members of the first movable auditorium 14 and the display screen 7a behind the smile face character image have the smile face. An image related to the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed in accordance with the outline of the smile face character image. Here, the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the contour of the smile face character image, and has an effect such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this manner, a character image representing one object (here, a smile face) is formed by the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined can be performed. Thereby, a player can be entertained.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), a light guide plate display change effect is executed. Specifically, the image displayed on light guide plate 17 changes from character partial image BN to character image MJ. That is, the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “R” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the respective character images MJ of the four transmissive members and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly displayed, the character image MJ of the first movable role 14 and the light guide plate 17 are displayed. A superimposition effect is provided in which the smile image SL is sometimes overlapped and can be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character image MJ to the character partial image BN. That is, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. Thereby, a smile face character image is formed as a whole by the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the image displayed on the light guide plate 17 changes from the character partial image BN to the character image MJ. That is, the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “R” are visible on each of the four transmissive members. At this time, since the respective character images MJ of the four transmissive members and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 are randomly displayed, the character image MJ of the first movable role 14 and the light guide plate 17 are displayed. A superimposition effect is provided in which the smile image SL is sometimes overlapped and can be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H) and FIG. 75 (I), a retreat movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character images MJ of “S”, “M”, “I”, and “L” are randomly visible on each of the four transmissive members. In addition, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 are displayed at random, a superimposition effect is provided in which the character image MJ of the first movable role object 14 and the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 sometimes overlap and become visible. . Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (J), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role 14. (First aspect). Also, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effects of the image combination effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the first movable role 14 having four transparent and movable image display areas (movable light guide plates) has four image display areas. It is possible to transition between a first state relatively close to each other and a second state relatively separated from each other, and to switch between a state in which the character partial image BN can be viewed and a state in which the character partial image BN is difficult to view. In the first state, executing the first effect of forming one smile face character image by combining the four character partial images BN by making the character partial images BN visible respectively. Can be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, a display screen 7a that can be switched between a state in which an image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image is provided. The image shown on the display screen 7a can be visually recognized through the (movable light guide plate), and in the first effect, an effect image EF related to the smile face character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable role object 14 are respectively displayed on the display screen 7a in the second state. They are arranged at positions corresponding to the four corners, and move toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a when transitioning from the second state to the first state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, after the first effect, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable role object 14 transition to the second state. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the four first image display areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable auditorium 14 each include a character image MJ different from the character partial image BN. A second state that can be switched between a visible state and a hardly visible state and repeats a state in which the character image MJ is visible and a state in which the character image MJ is hardly visible while transitioning from the first state to the second state. An effect can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73, the light guide plate 17 that can switch between a state in which an image can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view is provided. Thus, the smile face character image formed by the four character partial images BN becomes visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the image combination effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 73, the smile face character image is formed as a whole by the four character partial images BN displayed on the four members (movable light guide plates) of the first movable role object 14. However, the target of the whole image represented by the whole of the partial images displayed on the four members (movable light guide plates) is not limited to the character image. For example, the whole image may be a specific character, figure, symbol, or the like.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the image combination effects of FIGS. 73 to 76 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the image combination effect A of FIG. 73, the variation display of the decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 75 or the explosion effect after the smile image SL is displayed may be combined. Further, a following image TJ as shown in FIG. 74 may be displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the image combination effects of FIGS. 73 to 76, the smile images SL and the character images MJ are randomly displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable role 14. However, these images may be displayed with a certain regularity.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of transparent first image display areas that are movable,
The plurality of first image display areas,
A transition can be made between a first state in which the elements are relatively close to each other and a second state in which the elements are relatively separated from each other;
Each can be switched between a state in which a predetermined image can be viewed and a state in which it is difficult to view,
In the first state, each of the plurality of predetermined images can execute a first effect of forming an image representing one specific target by making the predetermined images visible. A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1 further includes:
A second image display area that can be switched between a state in which the image can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view,
An image represented in the second image display area can be visually recognized through the one image display area,
In the first effect, an image related to the image representing the specific object is displayed in the second image display area.
◇ [Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A6-2,
The plurality of first image display areas are arranged at positions corresponding to four corners of the second image display area when in the second state, and the plurality of first image display areas are changed from the second state to the first state. A game machine, wherein, when making a transition, each moves toward the vicinity of the center of the second image display area.
◇ [Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
The gaming machine, wherein after the first effect, the plurality of first image display areas transition to the second state.
◇ [Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Aspects A6-1 to A6-4,
The plurality of first image display areas,
Each can be switched between a state in which an image different from the predetermined image can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image,
While transitioning from the first state to the second state, it is possible to execute a second effect that repeats a state in which an image different from the specific image is visible and a state in which the image is difficult to view. Gaming machine to do.
◇ [Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-5,
A third image display area that can be switched between a state in which the image can be viewed and a state in which the image is difficult to view,
In the first effect, an image representing the specific object can be visually recognized through the third image display area.

  The linked effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. This interlocking effect can be executed, for example, during the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the linked effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. This is an effect to display an image.

[Linked production A]
FIG. 77 is a view for explaining the linked effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. The first movable role 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image. Each of the four transmissive members is configured to be movable in front of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), in the linked effect A, on the display screen 7a, a decorative design varying effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. This variable display becomes visible through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each of the four transparent members. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), a movable role united effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transmissive members may be in contact with each other or may have a slight gap. By this movable combination merging effect, the four character partial images BN approach each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, when the four members of the first movable role 14 gather at the advanced position, an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target can be formed as a whole of the four character partial images BN.

  At this time, a related image display effect may be executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, on the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial images BN represented on the four members of the first movable auditorium 14, and on the display screen 7a behind the smile face character image, the smile face is displayed. An image related to the face character image may be displayed. For example, the effect image EF may be displayed according to the outline of the smile face character image. If the effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image that matches the outline of the smile face character image, the effect is such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this manner, a character image representing one object (here, a smile face) is formed by the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined can be performed. Thereby, the player can be further enjoyed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D) and FIG. 77 (E), a retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the character partial image BN can be viewed on each of the four transparent members. After that, each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role object 14 (first mode).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), FIG. 77 (G), and FIG. 74 (H), the advance moving effect of the first movable auditors 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable auditorium 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a (transition from the first mode to the second mode). At this time, a follow-up image TJ that follows (cooperates with) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The follow-up image TJ is an image displayed in an area on the back surface of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a, and includes the shapes of the four transmissive members. They have almost the same shape. That is, the follow-up image TJ has the same shape as the region on the back of the four transmissive members of the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the following image TJ also has the same rectangular shape. In other words, the four following images TJ have shapes along the outer shapes of the four transmissive members. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the following image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members. In this linked effect, when four (transmissive members) transmissive areas transit from the first mode to the second mode, the four following images TJ move in conjunction with the respective movements of the four transmissive areas, Each of the moving following images TJ can be visually recognized through each of the four moving transmission areas. When each of the four transmissive members moves to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four following images TJ are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, each of the following images TJ includes a face image of the character, and the selection button 63 performs a selection effect in which the player selects one character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the following image TJ moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a which is the back surface of the four transmissive members is reduced, so that the display area of the follow-up image TJ is also reduced. According to such an effect, as seen from the player, the following image TJ appears to be displayed on four transparent members. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in an area visible on the display screen 7a without the intervention of the first movable accessory 14. Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (J), a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of different positions on the light guide plate 17. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is provided in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative pattern. With this superimposed effect, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 appear at random on the stop-displayed decorative symbols, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative symbols were destroyed by the smile images SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Linked Direction B]
FIG. 78 is a view for explaining the linked effect B. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (A), in the linked effect B, a face image KG that follows (links) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. At least a part of the face image KG is displayed in a region of the display screen 7a which is a back surface of the four transparent members that form the first movable accessory 14. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the face image KG is partly visible through four transparent members. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a decoration design variation effect (variation display) is executed by the left decoration design 8L, the middle decoration design 8C, and the right decoration design 8R. The face image KG and the variable display become visible through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. At this time, each of the four face images KG on the display screen 7a follows (cooperates with) the movement of the four transparent members of the first movable auditors 14, and moves. Thereby, the four face images KG can be continuously viewed through the four transparent members while the four transparent members are moving, and the other part can be viewed through the four transparent members. Is visible without the intervention of a member having

  During the movement of the four transparent members, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each member. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), a movable role combined effect in which almost the entire display screen 7a is covered is performed (second mode). ). At this time, each of the four transmissive members may be in contact with each other or may have a slight gap. By this movable combination merging effect, the four character partial images BN approach each other and a smile face character image is formed as a whole. That is, when the four members of the first movable role 14 gather at the advanced position, an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target can be formed as a whole of the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), a related image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Specifically, the smile face character image formed by the entire character partial image BN represented on the four members of the first movable auditorium 14 and the display screen 7a behind the smile face character image have the smile face. An image related to the face character image is displayed. Here, the effect image EF is displayed in accordance with the outline of the smile face character image. The effect image EF is a ring-shaped light image conforming to the outline of the smile face character image, and has an effect such that light is emitted from the smile face character image. In this manner, a character image representing one object (here, a smile face) is formed by the entirety of the plurality of character partial images BN of the first movable role object 14, and the character image is displayed on the display screen 7a. By combining the effect images EF, a display effect in which many elements are intricately intertwined can be performed. Thereby, the player can be further enjoyed. The four face images KG are continuously displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D) and FIG. 78 (E), a retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, each of the four face images KG on the display screen 7a follows (cooperates with) the movement of the four transparent members of the first movable auditors 14, and moves. Thereby, the four face images KG can be continuously viewed through the four transparent members while the four transparent members are moving, and the other part can be viewed through the four transparent members. Is visible without the intervention of a member having

  During the movement of the four transparent members, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each member. After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), each of the four transmissive members moves to the retracted position, and almost the entire display screen 7a can be visually recognized without passing through the first movable role 14. (First aspect).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), FIG. 78 (G), and FIG. 78 (H), the advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable auditorium 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a frame image WG that follows (cooperates with) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The frame image WG is an image displayed in a region on the back surface of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a, and includes the outlines of the four transmissive members. They have almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the region that is the back surface of the four transmissive members in the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG is also the same rectangular frame image. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members. When each of the four transmissive members moves to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, a combination effect is executed inside the frame image WG so that the character images MJ represented by the four transparent members can be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transmissive members is reduced, so that only a part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. Parts shrink. With such an effect, the player sees the frame image WG as being displayed on four transparent members. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in an area visible on the display screen 7a without the intervention of the first movable accessory 14. Then, at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is provided in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 78 (J), the decorative pattern stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 appear at random on the stop-displayed decorative symbols, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative symbols were destroyed by the smile images SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Linked production C]
FIG. 79 is a view for explaining the linked effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (A), FIG. 79 (B), and FIG. 79 (C), in the linked effect C, an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. On the display screen 7a, four timer images TM that follow (cooperate with) the movement of the four transparent members are displayed. The timer image TM is an image displayed on an area of the display screen 7a which is a back surface of the four transparent members constituting the first movable accessory 14, and has two digits indicating a timer value (count value). (Digital display image) is included. The timer image TM has a frame image having substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the four transparent members. The frame image has a shape along the outer shape of the region that is the back surface of the four transmissive members in the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image also has the same rectangular shape. When viewed from the player, the timer image TM appears to be displayed on four transparent members. When each of the four transmissive members moves to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four timer images TM are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, the countdown is started immediately after the four timer images TM are displayed. However, the countdown may be started after a while (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display. Here, different timer values “10”, “14”, “15”, and “12” are set for the four timer images TM, and the respective timer values are decremented. The decrement speed of the timer value may be faster or slower than seconds. Here, the decrement speed is the same as the second.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (D) and 79 (E), when the timer value of one of the timer images TM (here, upper left) becomes 0 (zero), the timer images TM and A retreat movement effect of a member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, from the state in which one of the four transmissive members (here, upper left) constituting the first movable accessory 14 covers the display screen 7a, the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a Move towards. The other three permeable members do not move. The timer image TM in the upper left where the timer value becomes 0 (zero) moves (cooperates) with the movement of the upper left transparent member. As a result, when viewed from the player, the timer image TM is displayed on a transparent member, and appears to be moving as it is. Then, in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared, a part of the variable display becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (F) and 79 (G), when the timer value of the next one (here, lower right) of the timer images TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image A retreat movement effect of the TM and the member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14, one of the remaining three members covering the display screen 7a covers the display screen 7a. It moves toward the retreat position at the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining two permeable members do not move. The timer image TM at the lower right where the timer value has become 0 (zero) moves (cooperates) with the movement of the lower right transmissive member. As a result, when viewed from the player, the timer image TM is displayed on a transparent member, and appears to be moving as it is. Then, in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared, a part of the variable display becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), when the next one (here, upper right) timer value of the timer image TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM and the first movable An evacuation movement effect of the member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM of the accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14, one of the remaining two members covering the display screen 7a covers the display screen 7a. The user moves toward the retreat positions at the four corners of the screen 7a. The remaining one permeable member does not move. The upper right timer image TM whose timer value has become 0 (zero) follows (cooperates with) the movement of the upper right transparent member and moves. As a result, when viewed from the player, the timer image TM is displayed on a transparent member, and appears to be moving as it is. Then, in the portion of the display screen 7a where the timer image TM has disappeared, a part of the variable display becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (I) and 79 (J), when the last one (here, the lower left) of the timer images TM becomes 0 (zero), the timer image TM becomes , And a retreat movement effect of a member having transparency corresponding to the timer image TM of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Then, after the entire variable display becomes visible, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (J).

[Linked production D]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for describing the linked effect D. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image.

  In the linked effect D, as shown in FIGS. 80 (A), 80 (B), and 80 (C), an advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable auditorium 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a frame image WG that follows (cooperates with) the movement of the four transparent members is displayed on the display screen 7a. The frame image WG is an image displayed in a region on the back surface of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable accessory 14 on the display screen 7a, and includes the outlines of the four transmissive members. They have almost the same shape. That is, the frame image WG has a shape along the outer shape of the region that is the back surface of the four transmissive members in the display screen 7a. Here, each of the four transmissive members has a rectangular shape, and the frame image WG is also the same rectangular frame image. Therefore, when viewed from the player, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members. When each of the four transmissive members moves to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. In addition, on the display screen 7a, a decoration design change effect (change display) is performed by the left decoration design 8L, the middle decoration design 8C, and the right decoration design 8R, and can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17. It has become.

  During the movement of the four transparent members, a character partial image BN representing a part (1/4 part) of the smile face character image is visible on each member. Here, a combination effect is executed in which the character partial image BN can be visually recognized inside the frame image WG. By moving each of the four transmissive members to the advanced position, the four character partial images BN approach each other to form a smile face character image as a whole. That is, when the four members of the first movable role 14 gather at the advanced position, an image (smile face character image) representing one specific target can be formed as a whole of the four character partial images BN.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (D) and FIG. 80 (E), a retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other. At this time, the four frame images WG on the display screen 7a move toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transmissive members is reduced, so that only a part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. Parts shrink. With such an effect, the player sees the frame image WG as being displayed on four transparent members.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in an area visible on the display screen 7a without the intervention of the first movable accessory 14. Is done. Then, at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is provided in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), the decorative pattern stopped and displayed explodes and disappears. That is, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 appear at random on the stop-displayed decorative symbols, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative symbols were destroyed by the smile images SL. After the decorative symbol explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), FIG. 80 (G), and FIG. 80 (H), the advance movement effect of the first movable auditors character 14 is executed again. That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable auditorium 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a frame image WG that follows (cooperates with) the movement of the four transparent members is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. With the same configuration as described above, the frame image WG appears to be displayed on four transparent members from the player. When each of the four transmissive members moves to the advanced position, almost the entire display screen 7a is covered (second mode). Further, four frame images WG are displayed on the entire display screen 7a. Here, a combination effect is executed inside the frame image WG so that the character images MJ represented by the four transparent members can be visually recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (I), the retreat movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed again. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. At this time, the frame image WG moves toward the four corners of the display screen 7a following the movement of the four transparent members. That is, when the four transmissive members are retracted, the area of the display screen 7a that is the back surface of the four transmissive members is reduced, so that only a part of the frame image WG is displayed and displayed. Parts shrink. With such an effect, the player sees the frame image WG as being displayed on four transparent members. Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed in an area visible on the display screen 7a without the intervention of the first movable accessory 14. Then, at a plurality of different positions of the light guide plate 17, a plurality of smile images SL are randomly displayed. In other words, an effect is executed in which the plurality of smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random. Since the smile image SL can be visually recognized at a random position on the light guide plate 17, a superimposition effect is provided in which the smile image SL of the light guide plate 17 can be visually recognized at random, overlapping the stopped and displayed decorative pattern. As a result of this superimposed effect, as shown in FIG. 80 (J), the stopped and displayed decorative pattern explodes and disappears. That is, since the smile images SL of the light guide plate 17 appear at random on the stop-displayed decorative symbols, it is possible to perform an effect as if the decorative symbols were destroyed by the smile images SL. After the decorative pattern explodes and disappears, the next variable display is started.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effects of the linked production.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, a movable first movable object 14 having transparency and a display screen 7a capable of displaying an image are provided. 14 is movable in front of the display screen 7a, and the first movable auditorium 14 that is moving is moved by the interlocking movement of the first movable auditorium 14 and the following image TJ displayed on the display screen 7a. It is possible to execute an interlocking effect through which the following image TJ that is moving can be visually recognized through. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, each of the first movable auditors 14 includes four transmissive areas (movable light guide plates) having transparency and being movable. The transmissive areas can transition to a first aspect that is relatively close to each other and a second aspect that is relatively separated, and in an interlocking effect, four transmissive areas transition from the first aspect to the second aspect. At this time, the four following images TJ move in conjunction with the movement of each of the four transparent areas, and each of the following images TJ that are moving is visible via each of the four transparent areas that are moving. Become. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the four transmissive regions (movable light guide plates) of the first movable role object respectively correspond to the four corners of the display screen 7a in the second mode. And moves toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a when transitioning from the second mode to the first mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the follow-up image TJ has a shape along the outer shape of each of the four transmission regions (movable light guide plates) of the first movable role object 14. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the four transmissive areas (movable light guide plates) of the first movable auditorium 14 can each display the character partial image BN, and the transmissive areas are displayed. It is possible to execute a combined effect using the character partial image BN to be performed and the effect image EF displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77, the light guide plate 17 having transparency and provided on the front surface of the first movable role 14 and the display screen 7a is provided. , A smile image SL can be displayed, and a combination effect by the smile image SL displayed by the light guide plate 17 and the decorative design displayed by the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the linked effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
The following image TJ in FIG. 77 is not limited to the above configuration. The follow-up image TJ may be, for example, an image having a shape substantially along the outer shapes of the four members (movable light guide plates) of the first movable auditors 14, or a part of the outer shape of the four members (movable light guide plates). May be an image having a shape along the line. The substantially conforming shape means a shape that allows the player to recognize that the outer shapes of the four members (movable light guide plates) correspond to the shapes of the following image TJ image.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the linked effects shown in FIGS. 77 to 80 may be appropriately combined. For example, in the linked effect A of FIG. 77, a timer image TM as shown in FIG. 79, an advance movement effect of the first movable role object 14, and a retreat movement effect may be combined.
[Modification 3]
In each of the linked effects shown in FIGS. 77 to 80, the smile image SL and the character image MJ displayed on the light guide plate 17 and the first movable auditorium 14 may be randomly displayed or have a certain regularity. May be displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A movable movable object having transparency,
An image display area capable of displaying an image,
The movable character is movable in front of the image display area,
By moving the movable role and the specific image displayed in the image display area in conjunction with each other, an interlocking effect is provided in which the moving specific image can be visually recognized through the moving movable role. A gaming machine characterized by being executable.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
Each of the movable characters includes a plurality of transmissive areas that are transmissive and movable,
The plurality of transmissive regions can transition to a first state in which they are relatively close to each other and a second state in which they are relatively separated from each other,
In the linked effect, when the plurality of transmissive areas transition from the first state to the second state, the plurality of specific images move in conjunction with the movement of each of the plurality of transmissive areas. A gaming machine, wherein each of the moving specific images is visually recognizable through each of the plurality of transparent regions in the gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-2,
The plurality of transmissive areas are arranged at positions corresponding to four corners of the image display area in the second state, respectively, and when the state transits from the second state to the first state. Each of the gaming machines moves toward the vicinity of the center of the image display area.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect A7-2 or Aspect A7-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific image has a shape along each outer shape of the plurality of transmission areas.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-2 to A7-4,
Each of the plurality of transmission areas is capable of displaying an image,
A gaming machine capable of executing a combination effect by an image displayed by the transmission area and an image displayed by the image display area.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-5, further comprises:
It has transparency, and has a front area arranged in front of the movable auditorium and the image display area,
The front area is capable of displaying an image,
A game machine capable of executing a combination effect by an image displayed by the front area and an image displayed by the image display area.

  The hold icon image matching effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This holding icon image matching effect can be executed during a change of the special symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending icon image matching effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This pending icon image matching effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one change effect). The holding icon image matching effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (a plurality of fluctuation effects).

[Pending icon image matching effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for describing the holding icon image matching effect A.
In the reserved icon image matching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. This specific image XB1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the rhombus image XB11 is arranged in the rectangular image XB12. The diamond-shaped image XB11 has a brick-like pattern, and the letter “S” is shown in the middle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), a specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking effect, the character CRA stores the specific image XB1 in the character CRA so as to suck it. Therefore, the specific image XB1 once disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), a holding icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the character CRA sucks out the rhombus image XB11 of the specific image XB1 in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A becomes The same shape as that of the rhombus image XB11 is changed to a pending change (one of the prefetch effects). Note that the size of the hold icon 9A changed to the same shape as the rhombus image XB11 is smaller than that of the rhombus image XB11.
That is, in the holding icon image matching effect A, one of the holding icons changes to the same shape as the reduced shape of a part (diamond image XB11) of the specific image XB1.

[Hold icon image matching effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for describing the hold icon image matching effect B.
In the reserved icon image matching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. This specific image XB2 is displayed substantially near the center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 is diamond-shaped, has a brick-like pattern, and has a letter “S” in the middle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), a specific image sucking effect is executed. In this specific image sucking effect, the character CRA stores the specific image XB2 in the character CRA so as to suck it. Therefore, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), a holding icon change effect is executed. In this holding icon change effect, the specific image XB2 sucked by the character CRA is drawn in the direction of the holding icon display area where the holding icon is displayed, so that one of the holding icons 9A has the same shape as the specific image XB2. Is changed to one (one of the look-ahead effects). Note that the size of the hold icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than the specific image XB2.
That is, in the holding icon image matching effect B, one of the holding icons changes to the same shape as the reduced shape of the specific image XB2 itself.

[Pending icon image matching effect C]
FIG. 83 is a view for explaining the hold icon image matching effect C.
In the holding icon image matching effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. This specific image XB2 is displayed substantially near the center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 is diamond-shaped, has a brick-like pattern, and has a letter “S” in the middle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), a third movable role effect is executed. In the third movable role presentation, the third movable role 18 is moved such that the specific image XB2 is located inside the third movable role 18. In other words, the third movable role 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged such that the outer peripheral portion of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral portion of the third movable role 18. Here, an integrally formed product (mark, design object) formed by the third movable role object 18 and the specific image XB2 is also referred to as a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), a specific image sucking effect is executed. In the specific image sucking effect, the character CRA is accommodated in the character CRA so as to suck the specific mark (or the specific image XB2). At this time, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third movable auditorium 18 returns to the home position.
Note that, at the timing of the specific image sucking effect, instead of the specific image sucking effect, the third movable auditors 18 may be returned to the home position, and the effect of continuously displaying the specific image XB2 may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), a holding icon change effect is executed. In this hold icon change effect, the specific mark (or the specific image XB2) sucked by the character CRA is drawn out in the direction of the hold icon display area where the hold icon is displayed, whereby one of the hold icons 9A is identified. It is changed to the same shape as the image XB2 (one of the pre-reading effects). Note that the size of the hold icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific image XB2 is smaller than the specific image XB2.
That is, in the holding icon image matching effect C, one of the holding icons changes to the same shape as the reduced shape of the specific image XB2.

[Pending icon image matching effect D]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for describing the hold icon image matching effect D.
In the holding icon image matching effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), a specific image display effect is executed. In this specific image display effect, the specific image XB1 and the character CRA are displayed. This specific image XB2 is displayed substantially near the center of the display screen 7a. The specific image XB2 has a brick-like pattern, and a letter “S” is shown in the middle.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), a third movable role effect is executed. In the third movable role presentation, the third movable role 18 is moved such that the specific image XB2 is located inside the third movable role 18. In other words, the third movable role 18 and the specific image XB2 are arranged such that the outer peripheral portion of the specific image XB2 is adjacent to the inner peripheral portion of the third movable role 18. Here, an integrally formed product (mark, design object) formed by the third movable role object 18 and the specific image XB2 is also referred to as a specific mark.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), a specific image sucking effect is executed. In the specific image sucking effect, the character CRA is accommodated in the character CRA so as to suck the specific mark. At this time, the specific image XB2 temporarily disappears from the display screen 7a, and the third movable auditorium 18 returns to the home position.
Note that, at the timing of the specific image sucking effect, instead of the specific image sucking effect, the third movable auditors 18 may be returned to the home position, and the effect of continuously displaying the specific image XB2 may be performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), a holding icon change effect is executed. In this holding icon change effect, the specific mark sucked by the character CRA is pushed out in the direction of the holding icon display area where the holding icon is displayed, so that one of the holding icons 9A is held in the same shape as the specific mark. Change (one of the look-ahead productions). Note that the size of the hold icon 9A changed to the same shape as the specific mark is smaller than the specific mark.
That is, in the holding icon image matching effect D, one of the holding icons changes to the same shape as the reduced shape of the specific mark.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned holding icon image matching effects A to D, another effect (such as another holding icon image matching effect) may be incorporated into one effect.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the pending icon image matching effect.
[Effect 1]
In the holding icon image matching effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a specific image is displayed in the specific image display effect, and a holding icon partially identical to the specific image is displayed in the holding icon change effect. Is done. According to this configuration, since the part of the specific image and one of the hold icons have the same mode, the display of the specific image can increase the player's expectation of the change in hold, and Interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the holding icon image matching effects B and C, the specific image XB2 is displayed in the specific image display effect, and the holding icon in the same mode (shape) as the specific image XB2 is displayed in the holding icon change effect. According to this configuration, since the specific image XB2 and one of the hold icons have the same mode (shape), the display of the specific image XB2 can further enhance the player's expectation of the change in hold. , The interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the holding icon image matching effects A to D, after the specific image display effect, a holding icon change effect is performed. According to this configuration, the hold icon change effect is performed after the specific image is displayed, so that when the specific image is displayed, the player can be more expected to hold the change, It can improve the interest of people.

[Effect 4]
In the holding icon image matching effects A to D, a normal holding icon is displayed before the specific image is displayed, and after the specific image is displayed, the holding icon having at least a part of the specific image from the normal holding icon is displayed. Change effect is performed. According to this configuration, the display of the hold icon having at least a part of the specific image can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above-described holding icon image matching effects C to D, a third role movable effect that moves the third movable role 18 is executed when the specific image XB2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the display of the specific image XB2 can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the above-mentioned holding icon image matching effects C to D, when the specific image XB2 is displayed, the third character movable effect for moving the third movable character 18 is executed, and the specific image XB2 and the third movable character are executed. 18 form one mark (specific mark). According to this configuration, since the specific mark can be formed by the specific image XB2 and the third movable accessory 18, the display of the specific image XB2 can be emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the pending icon image matching effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the holding icon image matching effect of the gaming machine of the above embodiment, the specific image and the holding icon partially have the same shape (or the same shape), but the specific image and the holding icon partially have the same shape (or the same shape). ), For example, the specific image and the hold icon may have some or the same outline shape, or may have some or the same pattern or color.

[Modification 2]
In the above-described holding icon image matching effects C and D, the color of the holding icon that has been changed in the holding icon change effect may be different from or the same as the color of the specific mark.

[Modification 3]
In the above-described holding icon image matching effects C and D, the holding icon may be hidden by moving the third movable role 18 so as to temporarily hide the holding icon, and then the holding icon may be changed. In this case, the third movable accessory 18 may cover all or a part of the hold icon.

[Modification 4]
In the holding icon image matching effects C and D, the holding change in the holding icon change effect may be performed after the third movable auditors 18 return from the deployed position to the home position.

[Modification 5]
In the above-mentioned holding icon image matching effects C and D, when the third movable accessory 18 moves to the end of the display screen 7a, an image moving from the end to the holding icon is displayed, and the image is displayed. The hold change may be performed when the hold icon is reached. In this case, when the image reaches the hold icon, a suggestion image indicating that the icon has been reached is displayed. This end may be at a position opposite to the position where the hold icon is displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
The first display effect is an effect that displays the hold icon of the first mode,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined image larger than the hold icon of the first aspect,
A combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and the hold icon of the first aspect of the first display effect and the predetermined image of the second display effect are , Some of which are in the same embodiment,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XB-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
The hold icon of the first mode of the first display effect and the predetermined image of the second display effect are the same mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect XB-1 or Aspect XB-2,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XB-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a hold icon of a second mode different from the shape of the hold icon of the first mode,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed before the second display effect, and in the first display effect, the hold icon of the second aspect displayed in the third display effect Instead of the above, the hold icon of the first aspect is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XB-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of moving a movable character in front of the display means,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XB-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-5,
In the combination effect, the predetermined image of the second display effect and the movable character of the fourth display effect form one mark.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the movable role impact effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This movable character impact effect can be executed while the special symbols are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the movable role impact effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103. This is an effect of reading and displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This movable character impact effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one change effect). In addition, you may make it perform a movable role impact effect during a plurality of fluctuations (a plurality of fluctuation effects) of the special symbol.

[Movable character impact effect A]
FIG. 85 is a view for explaining the movable role impact effect A.
In the movable role impact effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), a movable part effect is performed. In this movable item effect, the peripheral portion of the second movable item 15 moves to the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable role 15 is a position that does not cover the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. Therefore, it appears to the player that the peripheral edge of the second movable auditorium 15 and the upper edge of the display screen 7a are adjacent to each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), a hold change effect is executed. In this holding change effect, one of the holding icons 9A changes holding in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is located at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 85 (C), the hold icon 9A that has changed to the hold state is indicated by cross hatching. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

[Movable character impact effect B]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for describing the movable role impact effect B.
In the movable role impact effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), a movable character effect is executed. In this movable item effect, the second movable item 15 moves to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, when viewed from the player, the second movable role 15 is a position where a part thereof covers the display screen 7a. That is, to the player, it looks as if a part of the second movable role 15 covers a part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), a hold change effect is executed. In this holding change effect, one of the holding icons 9A changes holding in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is located at the upper edge of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 86 (C), the hold icon 9A that has changed to the hold state is indicated by cross-hatching. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

[Movable character impact effect C]
FIG. 87 is a view for explaining the movable role impact effect C.
In the movable role impact effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), a movable character effect is executed. In this movable item effect, the second movable item 15 moves to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, when viewed from the player, the second movable role 15 is a position where a part thereof covers the display screen 7a. That is, to the player, it looks as if a part of the second movable role 15 covers a part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), a screen shaking effect is executed. In this screen swing effect, the second movable object 15 is moved to the display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is shaken by the impact thereof. A state where the character CRA (character display area) and the holding icons 9A and 9C (holding area) are shaken (vibrated) is shown. Further, in the screen shake effect, a predetermined sound effect (such as a beep) is notified from the speaker 67.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), a hold change effect is executed. In this holding change effect, one of the holding icons 9A changes by holding due to the screen shaking effect. In FIG. 87 (D), the hold icon 9A that has changed to the hold state is indicated by cross-hatching. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.
The screen shake effect and the hold change effect may be performed simultaneously.

[Movable character impact effect D]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for describing the movable role impact effect D.
In the movable role impact effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), a movable part effect is executed. In this movable item effect, the second movable item 15 moves to the upper part of the display screen 7a. In this case, when viewed from the player, the second movable role 15 is a position where a part thereof covers the display screen 7a. That is, to the player, it looks as if a part of the second movable role 15 covers a part of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), an inazuma effect is executed. In this lightning effect, the lightning image XC1 is displayed by the second movable role 15 moving to the display screen 7a. The lightning image XC1 is an image showing a state in which the lightning extends from the second movable accessory 15 toward the holding icon 9A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), an inazuma arrival suggestion effect is executed. In this inazuma arrival suggestion effect, an inazuma arrival suggestion image XC2 is displayed by performing the inazuma arrival effect. The inazuma arrival suggestion image XC2 is displayed around the hold icon 9A where the inazama image XC1 has arrived from the second movable role 15 in the inazuma effect, and indicates that the inazuma has reached the hold icon 9A. It is a suggested image.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), a hold change effect is executed. In this hold change effect, the hold icon 9A displaying the arrival suggestion image XC2 changes hold. The pending change effect is one of the look-ahead effects.

In addition, in the movable role impact effects A to D, another effect (such as another movable role impact effect) may be incorporated into one effect.
In the movable role impact effects A to D, the hold icons 9a, 9b, 9c are displayed on the display screen 7a in a hold area arranged adjacent to a lower end portion facing the upper end portion.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the movable role impact effect.
[Effect 1]
In the movable role impact effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the second movable type is displayed when the hold icon of the first mode (the same mode as the decorative pattern change production mode; the normal mode) is displayed. A role movable effect in which the role 15 is movable is performed, and when the role movable effect is performed, one of the holding icons is changed to a holding icon in the second mode. According to this configuration, the movable movable effect is performed at the time of the hold change, so that the player can have a sense of expectation to the big hit simply by moving the movable movable object (the second movable auditory substance 15). It can improve the interest of people.

[Effect 2]
In the movable role impact effects A to D, a holding change effect is performed by moving the second movable role 15 from the home position to the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the holding change effect is performed by moving the second movable role 15 from the home position to the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a, so that the movable role (the second movable role 15) Merely moves to the end of the display screen 7a, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-described movable role impact effects B to D, a holding change effect is performed by moving the second movable role 15 from the home position to the front of the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the holding change effect is performed by moving the second movable role 15 from the home position to the front of the end (upper end) of the display screen 7a. 15) can move the player just forward of the end of the display screen 7a to give the player an expectation of a big hit, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the movable role impact effects A to D, the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a in a hold area arranged adjacent to the lower end corresponding to the upper end. According to this configuration, when the second movable role 15 moves to the upper end of the display screen 7a, the hold icon located at the lower end opposite to the upper end changes to a hold state, so that a lively feeling can be obtained as a whole effect. Can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the movable role impact effect C, a screen swing effect is performed by performing the role movable effect, and a hold change effect is performed. According to this configuration, when the second movable role 15 moves, the screen shake effect is performed by the impact, and the hold change effect is performed. Therefore, the hold change effect can be emphasized by the screen shake effect, The interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the movable role impact effect C, a predetermined sound effect (such as a beep) is reported from the speaker 67 in the screen shake effect. According to this configuration, when the screen shaking effect is performed and the hold change effect is performed, the hold change effect can be emphasized with a predetermined sound effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the movable role impact effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the movable role impact effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second movable role 15 comes to the upper end portion of the display screen 7a, the hold icon changes to a hold status, but this is not a limitation. Instead, the hold icon may be changed to hold only when the second movable role 15 moves. Further, when the second movable role 15 comes to the lower end, the left end, the right end, the center, or the like, instead of the upper end of the display screen 7a, the hold icon may be changed to the hold state.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect that displays the hold icon of the first mode,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a character movable effect of moving a movable character,
The third display effect is an effect of changing the hold icon of the first mode to a hold icon of the second mode,
There is a case where a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect is performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed. , The third display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XC-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
In the movable accessory, a position different from the front of the display means is a home position,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the third display effect is performed by performing a character movable effect of moving the movable character from the home position to the first end of the display means. Is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XC-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the movable object is moved from the home position to the front of the first end of the display means. Display effects are performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect XC-2 or Aspect XC-3,
The hold icon is displayed in the display unit in a hold area arranged adjacent to a second end facing the first end,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XC-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed, whereby a predetermined display area including the holding area in the display means is shaken, and the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XC-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-5,
In the combination effect, when the swing effect is performed on the display means, a predetermined sound effect is notified,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The hold display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This hold display effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with a change in the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”), and more specifically, the hold display of the first special symbol. This is an effect of integrally displaying the hold display of the second special symbol and the second special symbol and displaying the display at a plurality of locations.

[Pending display effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for describing the hold display effect A.
In the hold display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 89 (A) shows that the gaming state is the normal state (low-precision low-base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, a reserved number display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved number display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the retained number by numbers are displayed in the region in the vicinity of right and left. For example, the reserved number display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to be conspicuous. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of holdings by numbers are displayed vertically close to each other. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, like H2. That is, in the hold display effect A, the number of holds related to the first start-up opening 20 and the second start-up opening 21 is integrally displayed at two places on the upper left and lower right sides of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of suspensions relating to the first start-up port 20 and the second start-up port 21 is displayed integrally at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. H1 and H2 and K1 and K2 indicating the numbers of these suspensions are always displayed on the display screen 7a and are never deleted. In FIG. 89 (A), H1 and K1 indicate “3”, H2 and K2 indicate “0”, the reserved number of the first special symbol is “3”, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “3”. 0 ". This is because it is difficult to win the second starting port 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. In addition, in the hold display effect A, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (holding digestion image) 9C (FIG. 1) can also be displayed. The description and illustration in the above are omitted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), a loss determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89 (A) has been lost. In the present example, “758” is shown as the lost symbol arrangement. Also, in the loss confirmation effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate “3”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate “0”. ) Is the same as the decorative design change production shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (C), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol change effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H1 related to the first special symbol, K1 decreases from "3" to "2". Note that the numbers of hold H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol remain "0".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89 (C) has a jackpot. Here, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol arrangement. The numbers H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the numbers H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which is the decoration shown in FIG. 89 (C). It is the same as the symbol fluctuation effect. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In the present example, the jackpot symbol arrangement “777” is “16RV passing planned jackpot” (probably variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy-high base state) until the game state hits the next jackpot. ) Is a jackpot.

  Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game is started. When the time-saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), a decorative symbol time-saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, there is no prize in the second opening 21. Therefore, the decorative symbol time-saving variation effect (the first decorative symbol variation effect since the time-saving game was started) is the first special This is executed based on the number of holds related to the symbols. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the numbers of hold H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, it is assumed that three prizes were made to the second starting opening 21 during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number of reserves H2, K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3". And When the time-saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR for urging the player to right-hand is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time reduction game. The player, when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, wins the game ball in the second starting port 21 (electrically-powered support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened to facilitate winning. Can be done. During this time, winning in the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), a loss determination time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 89 (E) has been lost. In this example, “857” is shown as the lost symbol arrangement. Also, in the loss confirmation time reduction effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate “1”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate “3”. This is the same as the decorative pattern time reduction production effect shown in E).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), a decorative symbol time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time saving fluctuation effect is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 relating to the second special symbol is changed. , K2 decrease from "3" to "2". It should be noted that the numbers of hold H1 and K1 relating to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reservation related to the second special symbol is executed in preference to the digestion of the reservation related to the first special symbol.

[Hold display effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating the hold display effect B.
In the suspended display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 90 (A), the gaming state is a normal state (low-precision low-base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
In addition, a reserved number display area HR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved number display area HR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the retained number by numbers are displayed in the region in the vicinity of right and left. For example, the reserved number display area HR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to be conspicuous. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of holdings by numbers are displayed vertically close to each other. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, like H2. That is, in the hold display effect B, the number of holds related to the first start-up opening 20 and the second start-up opening 21 is integrally displayed at two places on the upper left and lower right sides of the display screen 7a. In other words, the number of suspensions relating to the first start-up port 20 and the second start-up port 21 is displayed integrally at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. H1 and H2 and K1 and K2 indicating the numbers of these suspensions are always displayed on the display screen 7a and are never deleted. In FIG. 90 (A), H1 and K1 indicate “2”, H2 and K2 indicate “0”, the reserved number of the first special symbol is “2”, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “2”. 0 ". This is because it is difficult to win the second starting port 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. In addition, in the hold display effect B, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (holding digest image) 9C (FIG. 1) can also be displayed. The description and illustration in the above are omitted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 90 (A). In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), the first movable effect of the accessory is executed on the display screen 7a. In the first movable effect of the accessory, during the reach effect shown in FIG. 90 (B), the accessory YA descends from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. 90 (C), and the upper part of the display screen 7a is displayed. The display screen 7a is stopped for a predetermined time in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover the display screen 7a. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, the reserved number display area HR is covered with the accessory YA, and thus relates to H1 and the second special symbol indicating the reserved number relating to the first special symbol. H2 indicating the number of reservations is invisible. On the other hand, in the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of reserves related to the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of reserves related to the second special symbol are not covered by the accessory YA. The player can visually recognize K1 and K2 (K1 is “2” and K2 is “0”), so that the player can view the number of reserves related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of suspensions can be grasped. It should be noted that the accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is disposed movably up and down on the upper back side of the above-mentioned movable board 15 (see FIG. 1), and is located inside the gaming machine frame 50 at the home position. It is provided to be invisible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), a second movable effect of the accessory is executed on the display screen 7a. In the second movable effect of the accessory, after the accessory YA stops at the first position shown in FIG. 90 (C) for a predetermined time, it further descends to the second position shown in FIG. The display screen 7a is stopped for a predetermined time in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and K2 indicating the number of reservations related to the second special symbol are covered by the accessory YA, , K1 and K2 are invisible. On the other hand, in the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, the reserved number display area HR is visible without being covered by the accessory YA. Therefore, the player can use H1, H2 (H1 By visually recognizing "2" and H2 "0"), the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol and the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol can be grasped. Then, when the accessory YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, it rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
As described above, even when the accessory LYA as a movable body is movable, the number of reserves related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 that are integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen 7a is: The number of reserves related to the first start-up port 20 and the second start-up port 21 displayed at any place can be visually recognized. In other words, the number of reservations related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 that are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a are all set even when the accessory LYA as a movable body is moved. Does not become invisible, and the number of reserves related to the first start-up port 20 and the second start-up port 21 displayed in at least one place can be viewed. For this reason, the player can always grasp the information of the number of suspensions related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21, and can start the game with peace of mind.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. Here, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol arrangement. Also, the numbers of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the numbers of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which are shown in FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (D). Is the same as that shown in FIG. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In the present example, the jackpot symbol arrangement “777” is “16RV passing planned jackpot” (probably variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy-high base state) until the game state hits the next jackpot. ) Is a jackpot.

  Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game is started. When the time-saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), a decorative symbol time-saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, there is no prize in the second opening 21. Therefore, the decorative symbol time-saving variation effect (the first decorative symbol variation effect since the time-saving game was started) is the first special This is executed based on the number of holds related to the symbols. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the numbers of hold H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, it is assumed that three prizes were made to the second starting opening 21 during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number of reserves H2, K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3". And When the time-saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR for urging the player to right-hand is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time reduction game. The player, when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, wins the game ball in the second starting port 21 (electrically-powered support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened to facilitate winning. Can be done. During this time, winning in the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), a loss confirmation time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 90 (F) is lost. In this example, “857” is shown as the lost symbol arrangement. Further, in the loss confirmation time reduction effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate “1”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate “3”. This is the same as the decorative pattern time reduction production effect shown in F).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), a decorative symbol time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time saving fluctuation effect is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 relating to the second special symbol is changed. , K2 decrease from "3" to "2". It should be noted that the numbers of hold H1 and K1 relating to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reservation related to the second special symbol is executed in preference to the digestion of the reservation related to the first special symbol.

[Hold display effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for describing the hold display effect C.
In the hold display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 91 (A), the gaming state is the normal state (low-precision low-base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
A game information display area YR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of holdings are displayed in the lower part of the area in the vicinity of the left and right sides. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In the upper part of the game information display area YR, right above H1 and H2, the variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol to indicate the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol. F1 and F2 as four symbols are displayed close to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed in a figure of “○”. For example, F1 is displayed in a different color scheme such as red (indicated by hatching), and F2 is displayed in a blue (indicated by a polka dot). F1 and F2 blink to indicate that the special symbol is changing, and indicate that the special symbol is stopped (during symbol display) by turning on or off to stop. For example, when both F1 and F2 stop in a lighting state, it indicates that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and a state where both F1 and F2 are not lit (either F1 or F2 is turned off, Stopping in a state in which both F1 and F2 are turned off) indicates that the special symbol lottery result is a loss.
Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of holdings by numbers and DY as a fourth symbol are displayed in close proximity in a column. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, like H2. DY is composed of numbers from 0 to 9, and the number of 0 to 9 fluctuates to indicate that the special symbol is fluctuating. Indicates that it is stopped (during symbol display). For example, when DY stops at a number of 7, it indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and when DY stops at a number other than 7, it indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. .
That is, in the hold display effect C, the number of holds and the fourth symbol relating to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are integrally displayed at two places on the upper left and lower right sides of the display screen 7a. . In other words, the number of holdings and the fourth symbol relating to the first opening 20 and the second opening 21 are displayed integrally at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. H1, H2, and K1, K2 indicating the number of these reservations, and F1, F2, and DY as the fourth symbol are always displayed continuously on the display screen 7a, and are displays that are never deleted. is there.
In FIG. 91 (A), H1 and K1 indicate “3”, H2 and K2 indicate “0”, the number of reserved special first symbols is “3”, and the number of reserved special second symbols is “3”. 0 ". This is because it is difficult to win the second starting port 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. Further, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, and DY is in a changing state (illustrated by ↓), which indicates that special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable mode. In the hold display effect C, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (holding digest image) 9C (FIG. 1) can also be displayed. The description and illustration in the above are omitted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), a loss determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91 (A) is lost. In the present example, “758” is shown as the lost symbol arrangement. Also, in the loss confirmation effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate “3”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate “0”. ) Is the same as the decorative design change production shown in FIG. In addition, both F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are turned off (the off state of F1 is indicated by “●”, and the off state of F2 is indicated by “「 ”), and DY stops at 6 (a number other than 7). Indicates that the special symbol lottery result is lost.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol change effect here is executed based on the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, and when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H1 related to the first special symbol, K1 decreases from "3" to "2". Note that the numbers of hold H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol remain "0". Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), and it indicates that a special symbol (decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) is in a variable display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91 (C) has a jackpot. Here, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol arrangement. Also, the numbers of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the numbers of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which is the decoration shown in FIG. 91 (C). It is the same as the symbol fluctuation effect. Also, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are lit (the lit status of F1 is red (indicated by hatching), the lit status of F2 is blue (indicated by a polka dot pattern), and DY is stopped at 7, thereby giving a special symbol. It is suggested that the lottery result is a jackpot. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "big hit!" Are displayed. In this example, the jackpot symbol array “777” is “16RV passing planned jackpot” (probably variable jackpot), and is high after the jackpot game ends until the game state reaches the next jackpot. This is a big hit that will bring you to the accurate time saving state (high accuracy and high base state).

  Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game is started. When the time-saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), a decorative symbol time-saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, there is no prize in the second opening 21. Therefore, the decorative symbol time-saving variation effect (the first decorative symbol variation effect since the time-saving game was started) is the first special This is executed based on the number of holds related to the symbols. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the numbers of hold H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, it is assumed that three prizes were made to the second starting opening 21 during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number of reserves H2, K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3". And Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), and it indicates that a special symbol (decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) is in a variable display. When the time-saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR for urging the player to right-hand is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time reduction game. The player, when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, wins the game ball in the second starting port 21 (electrically-powered support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened to facilitate winning. Can be done. During this time, winning in the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), a loss confirmation time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss confirmation time reduction effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 91 (E) is lost. In this example, “857” is shown as the lost symbol arrangement. In addition, in the loss confirmation time reduction effect, the numbers of reservations H1 and K1 relating to the first special symbol indicate “1”, and the numbers of reservations H2 and K2 relating to the second special symbol indicate “3”. This is the same as the decorative pattern time reduction production effect shown in E). Also, both F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are turned off (the off state of F1 is indicated by "●" and the off state of F2 is indicated by "O"), and DY stops at 9 (a number other than 7). Indicates that the special symbol lottery result is lost.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), a decorative symbol time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol time saving fluctuation effect is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 relating to the second special symbol is changed. , K2 decrease from "3" to "2". It should be noted that the numbers of hold H1 and K1 relating to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reservation related to the second special symbol is executed in preference to the digestion of the reservation related to the first special symbol. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), and it indicates that a special symbol (decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) is in a variable display.

[Hold display effect D]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for describing the hold display effect D.
In the hold display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In FIG. 92 (A), the gaming state is the normal state (low-precision low-base state), and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).
A game information display area YR is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. The game information display area YR is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and H1 and H2 indicating the number of holdings are displayed in the lower part of the area in the vicinity of the left and right sides. For example, the game information display area YR is displayed in black, and H1 and H2 are displayed in white so as to stand out. H1 indicates the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, and H2 indicates the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. In the upper part of the game information display area YR, right above H1 and H2, the variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol to indicate the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol. F1 and F2 as four symbols are displayed close to H1 and H2. F1 and F2 are displayed in a figure of “○”. For example, F1 is displayed in a different color scheme such as red (indicated by hatching), and F2 is displayed in a blue (indicated by a polka dot). F1 and F2 blink to indicate that the special symbol is changing, and indicate that the special symbol is stopped (during symbol display) by turning on or off to stop. For example, when both F1 and F2 stop in a lighting state, it indicates that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and a state where both F1 and F2 are not lit (either F1 or F2 is turned off, Stopping in a state in which both F1 and F2 are turned off) indicates that the special symbol lottery result is a loss.
Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, K1 and K2 indicating the number of holdings by numbers and DY as a fourth symbol are displayed in close proximity in a column. K1 indicates the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, like H1, and K2 indicates the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, like H2. DY is composed of numbers from 0 to 9, and the number of 0 to 9 fluctuates to indicate that the special symbol is fluctuating. Indicates that it is stopped (during symbol display). For example, when DY stops at a number of 7, it indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and when DY stops at a number other than 7, it indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. .
That is, in the hold display effect C, the number of holds and the fourth symbol relating to the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 are integrally displayed at two places on the upper left and lower right sides of the display screen 7a. . In other words, the number of holdings and the fourth symbol relating to the first opening 20 and the second opening 21 are displayed integrally at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a. H1, H2, and K1, K2 indicating the number of these reservations, and F1, F2, and DY as the fourth symbol are always displayed continuously on the display screen 7a, and are displays that are never deleted. is there.
In FIG. 92 (A), H1 and K1 indicate “2”, H2 and K2 indicate “0”, the reserved number of the first special symbol is “2”, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is “2”. 0 ". This is because it is difficult to win the second starting port 21 when the gaming state is the normal state. Further, F1 and F2 are in a blinking state, and DY is in a changing state (illustrated by ↓), which indicates that special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable mode. In the hold display effect C, the hold icon 9A related to the first special symbol, the hold icon 9B related to the second special symbol, and the hold icon (holding digest image) 9C (FIG. 1) can also be displayed. The description and illustration in the above are omitted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 92 (A). In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed. In this reach effect, FIG. 92 (A) shows the numbers of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol, the numbers of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol, and F1, F2 and DY as the fourth symbol. This is the same as the decorative pattern change production shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), the first movable effect of the accessory is executed on the display screen 7a. In the first movable effect of the accessory, during the reach effect shown in FIG. 92 (B), the accessory YA descends from the home position to the first position shown in FIG. 92 (C), and the upper part of the display screen 7a is displayed. The display screen 7a is stopped for a predetermined time in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover the display screen 7a. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, the game information display area YR is covered with the accessory YA, and therefore, H1 indicating the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol and H2 relating to the second special symbol. H2 indicating the number of reservations and F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are invisible. On the other hand, in the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the first position, K1 indicating the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol are: , Without being covered by the accessory YA. Therefore, by visually recognizing K1 and K2 (K1 is “2” and K2 is “0”), the player can grasp the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol and the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol. By viewing DY (DY is “↓”) as the fourth symbol, it is possible to grasp that the special symbol (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) is being displayed in a variable manner. It should be noted that the accessory LYA as a movable body shown in this figure is disposed movably up and down on the upper back side of the above-mentioned movable board 15 (see FIG. 1), and is located inside the gaming machine frame 50 at the home position. It is provided to be invisible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), a second movable effect of the accessory is executed on the display screen 7a. In the second movable effect of the accessory, after the accessory YA stops at the first position shown in FIG. 92 (C) for a predetermined time, it further descends to the second position shown in FIG. The display screen 7a is stopped for a predetermined time in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover a lower portion of the display screen 7a. In the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, K1 indicating the number of reserves related to the first special symbol, K2 indicating the number of reserves related to the second special symbol, and DY as the fourth symbol are It is covered by the object YA, so that K1, K2 and DY are not visible. On the other hand, in the state where the accessory YA is stopped at the second position, the game information display area YR is visible without being covered by the accessory YA, and therefore, the player can select H1, H2 (H1 is By visually recognizing "2" and H2 "0"), the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol and the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol can be grasped, and F1, F2 (F1) as the fourth symbol can be grasped. , F2 are blinking), it is possible to grasp that the special symbols (decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the accessory YA stops at the second position for a predetermined time, it rises from the second position and returns to the home position.
As described above, even when the accessory LYA as a movable body is movable, the number of reserves related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 which are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a and In the fourth symbol, the number of reserves and the fourth symbol related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 which are displayed in any place can be visually recognized. In other words, the number of holdings and the fourth symbol related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 that are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen 7a are obtained when the character LYA as the movable body is moved. Even if there is, all of them are not invisible, and the number of hold and the fourth symbol related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 displayed in at least one place can be viewed. I have. For this reason, the player can always grasp the information on the number of reservations and the fourth symbol related to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21, and can play the game with confidence.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. Here, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol arrangement. Also, the numbers of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate "2", and the numbers of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate "0", which are shown in FIGS. 90 (A) to 90 (D). Is the same as that shown in FIG. On the other hand, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol both stop in the lighting state (F1 is red (indicated by hatching), F2 is in blue (indicated by polka dots)), and DY as the fourth symbol is 7 Stopped, indicating that the special symbol lottery result was a big hit. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot. In the present example, the jackpot symbol arrangement “777” is “16RV passing planned jackpot” (probably variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy-high base state) until the game state hits the next jackpot. ) Is a jackpot.

  Next, a jackpot game is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, a time-saving game is started. When the time-saving game is started, next, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), a decorative symbol time-saving variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Immediately after the end of the jackpot game, there is no prize in the second opening 21. Therefore, the decorative symbol time-saving variation effect (the first decorative symbol variation effect since the time-saving game was started) is the first special This is executed based on the number of holds related to the symbols. That is, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the numbers of hold H1, K1 related to the first special symbol decrease from "2" to "1". After that, it is assumed that three prizes were made to the second starting opening 21 during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number of reserves H2, K2 related to the second special symbol increased from "0" to "3". And Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), and it indicates that a special symbol (decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) is in a variable display. When the time-saving game is started, a right-handed arrow YAR for urging the player to right-hand is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. This right-handed arrow YAR is continuously displayed during the time reduction game. The player, when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, wins the game ball in the second starting port 21 (electrically-powered support) where the electric chew 22 is frequently opened to facilitate winning. Can be done. During this time, winning in the first starting port 20 hardly occurs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), a loss confirmation time reduction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss determination time reduction effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 92 (F) is lost. In this example, “857” is shown as the lost symbol arrangement. In addition, in the loss confirmation time reduction effect, the number of reservations H1 and K1 related to the first special symbol indicate “1”, and the number of reservations H2 and K2 related to the second special symbol indicate “3”. This is the same as the decorative pattern time reduction production effect shown in F). Also, both F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are turned off (the off state of F1 is indicated by "●" and the off state of F2 is indicated by "O"), and DY stops at 9 (a number other than 7). Indicates that the special symbol lottery result is lost.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (H), on the display screen 7a, a decorative symbol time-saving variation effect is executed. The decorative symbol time saving fluctuation effect is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second special symbol. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, the number of reservations H2 relating to the second special symbol is changed. , K2 decrease from "3" to "2". It should be noted that the numbers of hold H1 and K1 relating to the first special symbol remain "1". This is because, as described above, the digestion of the reservation related to the second special symbol is executed in preference to the digestion of the reservation related to the first special symbol. Further, F1 and F2 as the fourth symbol are in a blinking state, DY is in a varying state (illustrated by ↓), and it indicates that a special symbol (decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) is in a variable display.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 92, separately from the holding icons related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of holdings related to the first starting port and the second starting port is set. , And the numbers are displayed continuously and continuously on the display screen. According to this configuration, the number of holds related to the first start-up port and the second start-up port is constantly displayed on the display screen, as compared to the hold icon that may be deleted in a predetermined effect or the like. The player can check the current number of reserves for the first start-up port and the second start-up port at any time. In addition, since the numbers of holdings relating to the first starting port and the second starting port are collectively displayed by numbers, the player can display the holding display relating to the first starting port and the holding display relating to the second starting port. It is possible to confirm the number of reservations at a glance and grasp the contents without having to search for them. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, separately from the decorative symbol, by performing the variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not the variable display is a big hit. The fourth symbol indicating the result is displayed continuously on the display screen continuously and integrally with the number of holds related to the first starting port and the second starting port. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol is always displayed on the display screen continuously compared to the decorative symbol that may be deleted in a predetermined effect or the like, so that the player can always display the current special symbol. The display state, that is, whether the special symbol is changing or stopping, and whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a loss can be confirmed. In addition, since the fourth symbol is displayed integrally with the number of holds related to the first start-up port and the second start-up port, the player can display the hold display related to the first start-up port and the second start-up port. Without having to search for the hold display and the display of the fourth symbol, the number of the hold and the fourth symbol can be confirmed at a glance and the contents thereof can be grasped. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of holds related to the first starting port, and the number of holds related to the second starting port are integrally displayed on a display screen. It is configured to be displayed and displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the number of holdings related to the second starting port are displayed in a plurality of places on the display screen. Therefore, the player can very easily find the hold display relating to the first starting port, the hold display relating to the second starting port, and the display of the fourth symbol. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, the fourth symbol integrally displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen, the number of reserves related to the first startup port, and the second design related to the second startup port. Even when the movable body is moved, the number of reservations is the fourth symbol displayed at any place on the display screen, the number of reservations relating to the first starting port, and the number of reservations relating to the second starting port. Is configured to be visible. In other words, the number of reserves and the fourth symbol related to the first start-up port and the second start-up port, which are integrally displayed at a plurality of places on the display screen, are all invisible even when the movable body moves. It is not possible, and the number of reserves and the fourth symbol related to the first start-up port and the second start-up port displayed in at least one place are visible. According to this configuration, the player can always grasp the number of reserves and the display of the fourth symbol relating to the first starting port and the second starting port, and can play the game with confidence. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of holds related to the first start-up port, and the number of holds related to the second start-up port are displayed diagonally on the display screen. It is configured to display. According to this configuration, the movable range of the movable body is designed so that the display of the fourth symbol in any one of the locations, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the number of holdings related to the second starting port is always visible. Becomes easier. That is, restrictions on the movable range of the movable body are relaxed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol, the number of holds related to the first starting port, and the number of holds related to the second starting port are at the same position on the display screen. It is configured to display without moving. According to this configuration, the fourth symbol, the number of holdings related to the first starting port, and the number of holdings related to the second starting port are always displayed in the same place on the display screen. You can easily find these displays. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the hold display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed at the upper left and lower right of the display screen. Although each is displayed in a diagonal line, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are the upper right and lower left, the upper middle and lower middle, the upper left and middle right, the upper left and upper right, the lower left and lower left of the display screen. It may be displayed at the lower right or the like. That is, when the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol, which are integrally displayed, are displayed at a plurality of locations on the display screen, at least the left end and the right end of the display screen, Alternatively, it may be displayed including the upper end and the lower end.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 92, the number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the number of the fourth symbol are displayed at the lower right of the display screen. The number of holds related to the first special symbol, the number of holds related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol displayed at the upper left of the display screen may be displayed in a predetermined display area. Further, the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol, and the arrangement of the fourth symbol are arbitrary, and any display form is possible as long as they are displayed collectively. Is also good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 92, the reserved number display area for displaying the reserved number relating to the first special symbol, the reserved number relating to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol in the region. The game information display area is displayed with a predetermined color, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the colors of the reserved number display area and the game information display area may be changed depending on the game state. For example, the color indicates the current gaming state, such as white when the gaming state is the normal state, blue when the low-probability state is low, green when the high-probability state is low, and red when the latent state is the latent state. You may do so.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fourth symbol displayed in the game information display area is displayed as a plurality of graphics (“O”) having different colors, and the graphics are displayed. Blinking or stopping indicates that the special symbol is changing or stopping (during symbol display, lottery result display), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fourth symbol displayed in the game information display area has a symbol (numerals and characters) added thereto, and the symbol is displayed in a predetermined manner together with the graphic so as to indicate that the special symbol is changing or stopping. Is also good. For example, when the fourth symbol is displayed by a figure and a number, this number is synchronized with another fourth symbol (DY) displayed by a number at the lower right of the display screen, and the same display mode is used. May be displayed. This makes it easier for the player to understand the relationship between the fourth symbol and the special symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, a plurality of the number of reservations related to the first special symbol, the number of reservations related to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed on the same display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display screens are provided in the game area, and the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed one by one (one set) on those display screens. You may make it. Alternatively, separately from the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), a 7-segment display is provided in the game area, and the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol, and the fourth symbol are displayed. You may make it display on a screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal) and a 7-segment display. Alternatively, separately from the display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal), an LED or a lamp indicator is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the number of reservations relating to the first special symbol, the number of reservations relating to the second special symbol, The design may be displayed on a display screen (display screen 7a, liquid crystal) and an LED or lamp display.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
A first starting port and a second starting port;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays on a predetermined display screen;
A gaming machine with
One of the plurality of indications is a first indication;
The first display is a display of the number of holds related to the first start port and the second start port,
The display means integrally displays the number of reserves related to the first start port and the second start port;
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect C3-2]
A special symbol display means for displaying a lottery result of winning or non-winning by variably displaying a special symbol based on a winning in the first starting port or the second starting port,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display of a fourth symbol that indicates the lottery result by performing a variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol,
The display means displays the fourth symbol integrally with the number of reserves related to the first opening and the second opening,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
[Aspect C3-3]
The display means displays the first display and the second display at a plurality of locations on the display screen,
At least one of the plurality of places displays the first display and the second display in a predetermined display area,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-2, wherein:
[Aspect C3-4]
The display screen is formed in a substantially rectangular shape,
The plurality of places on the display screen where the first display and the second display are displayed include at least a left end and a right end, or an upper end and a lower end of the display screen,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3, wherein:
[Aspect C3-5]
A movable movable body,
Control means for controlling the movable body to move in a predetermined manner;
With
The first display and the second display displayed at the plurality of locations are the first display displayed at any location even when the movable body is moved by the control means. And the second display is visible,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3 or aspect C3-4.

  The zone effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This zone effect can be executed during the change of the special symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out and displays the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the zone effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a. This zone effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one change effect). It should be noted that the zone effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (a plurality of fluctuation effects).

[Zone Direction A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for describing zone effect A.
In the zone effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the first zone entry suggestion effect, a first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and suggesting that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), a first zone effect is executed. In the first zone effect, a first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image suggesting that the image is the first zone, and specifically, is an image in which a character image indicating the first zone is indicated on the belt-like image. . The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged so as to extend laterally at the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestion image XD2, the character “first zone” moves from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestion image XD2, the character “first zone” moves from left to right. I do. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “first zone” may move in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, a second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and suggests that the user has entered the second zone. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), a second zone effect is executed. In the second zone effect, a second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image suggesting that the image is the second zone, and specifically, is an image in which a character “second zone” suggesting the second zone is displayed on a belt-like image. . The second zone suggestion image XD4 is disposed so as to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as not to intersect with the first zone suggestion image XD2. In the left second zone suggestion image XD4, the characters “second zone” move from top to bottom, and in the right second zone suggestion image XD4, the characters “second zone” move from bottom to top. Go to The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may move in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestion images XD4.
When the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. In this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

[Zone Direction B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for describing zone effect B.
In the zone effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the first zone entry suggestion effect, a first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and suggesting that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), a first zone effect is executed. In the first zone effect, a first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image suggesting that the image is the first zone, and specifically, is an image in which a character image indicating the first zone is indicated on the belt-like image. . The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged so as to extend laterally at the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestion image XD2, the character “first zone” moves from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestion image XD2, the character “first zone” moves from left to right. I do. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “first zone” may move in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, a second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and suggests that the user has entered the second zone. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), a second zone effect is executed. In the second zone effect, a second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image suggesting that the image is the second zone, and specifically, is an image in which a character “second zone” suggesting the second zone is displayed on a belt-like image. . The second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged to extend vertically to the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect with the first zone suggestion image XD2 as viewed from the player. At the intersection with the first zone suggestion image XD2, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestion image XD2. In the left second zone suggestion image XD4, the characters “second zone” move from top to bottom, and in the right second zone suggestion image XD4, the characters “second zone” move from bottom to top. Go to The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may move in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestion images XD4.
When the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. In this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

[Zone Direction C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for describing the zone effect C.
In the zone effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the first zone entry suggestion effect, a first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and suggesting that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), a first zone effect is executed. In the first zone effect, a first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image suggesting that the image is the first zone, and specifically, is an image in which a character image indicating the first zone is indicated on the belt-like image. . The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged so as to extend laterally at the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestion image XD2, the character “first zone” moves from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestion image XD2, the character “first zone” moves from left to right. I do. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “first zone” may move in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, a second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed. The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and suggests that the user has entered the second zone. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.
Also, in the second zone entry suggestion effect, a role movable effect in which the third movable role 18 moves to the deployed position is performed. In this case, the third movable auditorium 18 is arranged on the second zone intrusion suggestion image XD3, and viewed from the player, within the frame of the third movable auditorium 18, the second zone intrusion suggestion image XD3 and the decorative pattern 8L. , 8C and 8R are visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), a second zone effect is executed. In the second zone effect, the second zone suggestion image XD4 and the character CRA are displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image suggesting that the image is the second zone, and specifically, is an image in which a character “second zone” suggesting the second zone is displayed on a belt-like image. . The second zone suggestion image XD4 is disposed so as to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect with the first zone suggestion image XD2 as viewed from the player. At the intersection with the first zone suggestion image XD2, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestion image XD2. In the left second zone suggestion image XD4, the characters “second zone” move from top to bottom, and in the right second zone suggestion image XD4, the characters “second zone” move from bottom to top. Go to The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may move in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestion images XD4.

Further, in the second zone effect, the third movable auditorium 18 is continuously arranged in the deployed position. The character CRA is displayed in the frame of the third movable accessory 18. Therefore, as seen from the player, the fluctuation effects of the character CRA and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R can be visually recognized within the frame of the third movable accessory 18.
When the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. In this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

[Zone Direction D]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for describing the zone effect D.
In the zone effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), a first zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the first zone entry suggestion effect, a first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed. The first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is an image displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and suggesting that the first zone has been entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), a first zone effect is executed. In the first zone effect, a first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed. The first zone suggestion image XD2 is an image suggesting that the image is the first zone, and specifically, is an image in which a character image indicating the first zone is indicated on the belt-like image. . The first zone suggestion image XD2 is arranged so as to extend laterally at the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper first zone suggestion image XD2, the character “first zone” moves from right to left, and in the lower first zone suggestion image XD2, the character “first zone” moves from left to right. I do. The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “first zone” may move in the same direction in both the upper and lower first zone suggestion images XD2.
When the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, it is in the state of the first zone.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer display XD5 is displayed. The timer display XD5 is located between the upper first zone suggestion image XD2 and the lower first zone suggestion image XD2, and is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the timer value changes by countdown. Indicates the timer to perform. In the example of FIG. 96 (D), the initial value of the timer display XD5 is 15 seconds.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), a second zone entry suggestion effect is executed. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed when the timer value of the timer display XD5 has reached a predetermined value (for example, zero). The second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is an image that is displayed on the variation area of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and suggests that the user has entered the second zone. In the second zone entry suggestion effect, the display of the first zone suggestion image XD2 is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), a second zone effect is executed. In the second zone effect, a second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. The second zone suggestion image XD4 is an image suggesting that the image is the second zone, and specifically, is an image in which a character “second zone” suggesting the second zone is displayed on a belt-like image. . The second zone suggestion image XD4 is disposed so as to extend vertically on the left and right portions of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged so as to intersect with the first zone suggestion image XD2 as viewed from the player. At the intersection with the first zone suggestion image XD2, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is arranged on the back side of the first zone suggestion image XD2. In the left second zone suggestion image XD4, the characters “second zone” move from top to bottom, and in the right second zone suggestion image XD4, the characters “second zone” move from bottom to top. Go to The present invention is not limited to this, and the characters “second zone” may move in the same direction in both the left and right second zone suggestion images XD4.
When the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed, it is in the state of the second zone. In this case, since the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed, it is also in the first state.

In the zone effects A to D, another effect (such as another zone effect) may be incorporated into one effect.
In the zone effects A to D, the first zone suggestion image XD2 is also displayed during the second zone entry suggestion effect and during the second zone effect. Accordingly, during the second zone entry suggestion effect and during the second zone effect, the first zone effect is also underway.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of zone effect effects.
[Effect 1]
In the second zone effects of zone effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a first zone effect is also performed. That is, when the first zone effect is being performed, the second zone effect is also performed. According to this configuration, since two zone effects are displayed at the same time, the player can have a great sense of expectation for future development, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the zone effects A to D, in the second zone effect, when the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the two zone suggestion images are displayed at the same time, the player can have a great sense of expectation for future development, and can enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the zone effects A to D, after the first zone entry suggestion effect in which the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed, a first zone effect and a second zone effect are performed. According to this configuration, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are performed after the first zone entry suggestion image XD1 is displayed, so that the player displays the first zone entry suggestion image XD1. At this point, it is possible to have an expectation of developing into the second zone effect, and as a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation of the jackpot and to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the zone effects A to D, after the second zone entry suggestion effect in which the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, a second zone effect is performed. According to this configuration, after the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, the second zone effect is performed. Therefore, when the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, the second zone entry image is displayed together with the first zone entry image. Since it is decided to develop into the second zone effect, as a result, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 can increase the expectation of the jackpot and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone suggestion image XD2 of the first zone effect is displayed, a second zone entry suggestion effect in which the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed is performed. According to this configuration, when the first zone suggestion image XD2 is being displayed GW, the second zone entry suggestion image XD3 is displayed, so that the player overlaps the first zone effect and the second zone effect. It can be recognized that it will be executed in the future. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the zone effects A to D, when the first zone effect is performed, a timer display effect for displaying the timer display XD5 is performed. In the timer display effect, the timer value of the timer display XD5 is set to a predetermined value (for example, , Zero), a second zone effect (second zone entry suggestion effect) is performed. According to this configuration, in a state where the first zone suggestion image XD2 is displayed, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value, it is possible to enter the second zone effect in which the second zone suggestion image XD4 is displayed. When the timer display XD5 is displayed, the player greatly expects the entry into the second zone effect in addition to the first zone effect, and can have a great sense of expectation for future development. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modification of the zone effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the zone effects A to D of the gaming machine of the embodiment, the first zone effect and the second zone effect are effects with the same fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it straddle the fluctuation | variation (the several fluctuation | variation of a special symbol). For example, in the zone effect D, the first zone entry suggestion effect, the first zone effect, and the timer display effect are performed with a predetermined change, and the second zone entry suggestion effect and the second zone effect are performed with the next change. You may.

[Modification 2]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the timer display effect, a second zone entry suggestion effect and a second zone effect are performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A timer display effect may be performed before the suggestion effect, and when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value, a first zone entry suggestion effect and a first zone effect may be performed.

[Modification 3]
In the zone effect D, when the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the timer display effect, a second zone entry suggestion effect starts, and thereafter, the second zone effect is performed. When the timer value of the timer display XD5 reaches a predetermined value in the display effect, the second zone effect may be performed without performing the second zone entry suggestion effect.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
The first display effect is an effect for performing a first zone effect,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second zone effect different from the first zone effect,
A combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XD-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the combination effect, a first zone display representing the first zone effect is performed in the first display effect, and a second zone representing the second zone effect in the second display effect. Display is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect XD-1 or Aspect XD-2,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a first zone entry suggestion display to indicate that the first zone effect is entered,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, after the third display effect is performed, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XD-1 to XD-3,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a second zone entry suggestion display to indicate that the second zone effect is entered,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, after the fourth display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XD-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XD-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XD-1 to XD-5,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of performing a timer display,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the fifth display effect is performed, and when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value in the fifth display effect. , The second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The cut-in effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This cut-in effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the cut-in effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103. This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a. This cut-in effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one change effect). It should be noted that the cut-in effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (a plurality of fluctuation effects).

[Cut-in effect A]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for describing the cut-in effect A.
In the cut-in effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the symbol of the same number, and the reach symbol is formed by changing the decorative symbol 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is performing a predetermined action.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), a first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, a first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 has a band shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the left side. In FIG. 97 (C), the first cut-in display XE1 is indicated by hatching. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), a second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, a second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a band shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed upward. In FIG. 97D, the second cut-in display XE2 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Also, the second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), a third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, a third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band shape and a rectangular shape, appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is displayed toward the lower left side. In FIG. 97 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. In the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. Further, the third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super-reach effect) is performed.

[Cut-in production B]
FIG. 98 is a view for explaining the cut-in effect B.
In the cut-in effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the symbol of the same number, and the reach symbol is formed by changing the decorative symbol 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is performing a predetermined action.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), a first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, a first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 is in the shape of a strip and is of an equal-pedestal shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is diverged toward the left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed in the buttocks toward the left side. In FIG. 98C, the first cut-in display XE1 is indicated by hatching. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), a second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, a second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a band-like shape and a shape of an equilateral trapezoid, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is divergently displayed upward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and be displayed in the bottom of the butt toward the upper side. In FIG. 98 (D), the second cut-in display XE2 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed. Also, the second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), a third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, a third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band shape and a shape of an equilateral trapezoid, appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is divergently displayed toward the lower left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may appear from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed at the bottom of the display screen toward the lower left side. In FIG. 98 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. In the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are not displayed. Further, the third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super-reach effect) is performed.

[Cut-in effect C]
FIG. 99 is a view for explaining the cut-in effect C.
In the cut-in effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the symbol of the same number, and the reach symbol is formed by changing the decorative symbol 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is performing a predetermined action.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), a first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, a first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 is in the shape of a strip and is of an equal-pedestal shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is diverged toward the left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed in the buttocks toward the left side. In FIG. 99 (C), the first cut-in display XE1 is indicated by hatching. The first cut-in display XE1 hides the character CRA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), a second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, a second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a band-like shape and a shape of an equilateral trapezoid, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is divergently displayed upward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and be displayed in the bottom of the butt toward the upper side. In FIG. 99 (D), the second cut-in display XE2 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and at a portion that intersects with the second cut-in display XE2, the first cut-in display XE2 is disposed on the back side of the second cut-in display XE2. You. Also, the second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), a third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, a third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band shape and a shape of an equilateral trapezoid, appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is divergently displayed toward the lower left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may appear from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed at the bottom of the display screen toward the lower left side. In FIG. 99 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are each continuously displayed, and at the portion that intersects with the third cut-in display XE3, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. It is arranged behind the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the near side to the far side. Further, the third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the C character CRA and the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super-reach effect) is performed.

[Cut-in production D]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for describing the cut-in effect D.
In the cut-in effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative design variation effect, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variation manner near the center of the display screen 7a. In this timer display number suggestion effect, a hold icon 9A and a hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), a reach effect is executed. In the reach effect, the reach state is formed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stop at the symbol of the same number, and the reach symbol is formed by changing the decorative symbol 8C. In the reach effect, the character CRA is performing a predetermined action.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), a first cut-in effect is executed. In the first cut-in effect, a first cut-in display XE1 is displayed. The first cut-in display XE1 is in the shape of a strip and is of an equal-pedestal shape, appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and is diverged toward the left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed in the buttocks toward the left side. In FIG. 100 (C), the first cut-in display XE1 is indicated by hatching. Character CRA is displayed on first cut-in display XE1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), a second cut-in effect is executed. In the second cut-in effect, a second cut-in display XE2 is displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 has a band-like shape and a shape of an equilateral trapezoid, appears from the lower side of the display screen 7a, and is divergently displayed upward. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may appear from the lower side of the display screen 7a and be displayed in the bottom of the butt toward the upper side. In FIG. 100 (D), the second cut-in display XE2 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1. Further, in the second cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is continuously displayed, and at a portion that intersects with the second cut-in display XE2, the first cut-in display XE2 is disposed on the back side of the second cut-in display XE2. You. In the second cut-in display XE2, a character CRB is displayed. The character CRA displayed in the first cut-in display XE1 is not displayed, but is not limited thereto, and may be displayed. The second cut-in display XE2 hides a part of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (E), a third cut-in effect is executed. In the third cut-in effect, a third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 has a band shape and a shape of an equilateral trapezoid, appears from the upper right side of the display screen 7a, and is divergently displayed toward the lower left side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may appear from the upper right side of the display screen 7a and be displayed at the bottom of the display screen toward the lower left side. In FIG. 100 (E), the third cut-in display XE3 is indicated by hatching different from the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2. Further, in the third cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 and the second cut-in display XE2 are each continuously displayed, and at the portion that intersects with the third cut-in display XE3, the third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. It is arranged behind the display XE3. That is, in the third cut-in effect, the third cut-in display XE3, the second cut-in display XE2, and the first cut-in display XE1 are displayed in this order from the near side to the far side. In the third cut-in display XE3, a character CRC is displayed. The characters CRA and CRB displayed in the second cut-in display XE2 and the third cut-in display XE3 are not displayed, but are not limited thereto and may be displayed. The third cut-in display XE3 hides a part of the hold icon.
After the third cut-in effect, a predetermined effect (super-reach effect) is performed.

In the cut-in effects A to D, another effect (such as another cut-in effect) may be incorporated into one effect.
In addition, after the cut-in effects A to D, a predetermined effect such as a super reach effect is performed. However, the cut-in effects A to D are performed at the time of the final effect such as the super reach effect. Is also good.
The first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 in the cut-in effects A to D function as a chance-up effect. It suggests.
In the cut-in effects A to D, the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 have the same size. However, the size of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be different from each other. For example, the sizes of the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 may be set as the first cut-in display XE1> the second cut-in display XE2> the third cut-in display XE3. The first cut-in display XE1 <the second cut-in display XE2 <the third cut-in display XE3.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the cut-in effect.
[Effect 1]
In the cut-in effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed in the first cut-in effect, and the second cut-in display XE2 is thereafter displayed in the second cut-in effect. Is done. According to this configuration, the two cut-in effects are performed in order, so that the player can enjoy the continuous cut-in effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left to the right, and then, in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in from the lower side to the upper side. The display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can perform the continuous cut-in effect toward different positions, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left to the right, and then, in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in from the lower side to the upper side. The display XE2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can perform the continuous cut-in effect from different positions, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed, and then, in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in display XE2 is displayed, and thereafter, the third cut-in effect XE2 is displayed. In the in effect, a third cut-in display XE3 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the three cut-in effects are performed in order, the player can enjoy three continuous cut-in effects, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left to the right, and then, in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in from the lower side to the upper side. Display XE2 is displayed, and thereafter, in the third cut-in effect, third cut-in display XE3 is displayed from the upper right to the lower left. According to this configuration, since the player performs the continuous cut-in effect toward three different positions, the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the cut-in effects A to D, in the first cut-in effect, the first cut-in display XE1 is displayed from the left to the right, and then, in the second cut-in effect, the second cut-in from the lower side to the upper side. Display XE2 is displayed, and thereafter, in the third cut-in effect, third cut-in display XE3 is displayed from the upper right to the lower left. According to this configuration, since a continuous cut-in effect is executed from three different positions, the player can enjoy the movement of the cut-in effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the cut-in effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the cut-in effects A to D of the gaming machine of the embodiment, the first cut-in display XE1, the second cut-in display XE2, and the third cut-in display XE3 are respectively a start position and an end of the cut-in display. The positions are different, but not limited to this. The start position of the cut-in display may be the same and the end position may be different, or the start position of the cut-in display may be different and the end position may be the same. Alternatively, the start position and the end position of the cut-in display may be the same.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
The first display effect is an effect for performing a first cut-in display,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second cut-in display,
A combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XE-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward a first position, and in the second display effect, a second cut-in display different from the first position is performed. The second cut-in display is performed toward a position,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XE-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first cut-in display is performed from a third position toward the first position, and in the second display effect, the third position is displayed. The second cut-in display is performed from a fourth position different from the second position toward the second position,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XE-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing a third cut-in display,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, thereafter, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XE-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the first cut-in display is performed toward a fifth position different from the first position and the second position.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XE-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-5,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the third cut-in display is performed from a sixth position different from the third position and the fourth position toward the fifth position. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The decorative design change display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This decorative design variation display effect is related to the variation display of a decorative design having a positive variation design and a non-probability variation design synchronized with the variation of the first special design or the second special design (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special design”). Can be performed. More specifically, the decorative design change display effect is an effect that is executed in connection with the change display of the decorative symbol integrally displayed with the character or the non-character.

[Decoration pattern display effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation display effect A.
In the decorative symbol change display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 101 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), a decorative symbol change stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative design change stop effect indicates that the decorative display of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 101 (A) has stopped, and here, the decorative designs 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a lost symbol arrangement ( "689"). In this example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of numbers 1 to 9, and odd numbers are probable symbols and even numbers are normal symbols. In other words, the jackpot symbol arrays “111”, “333”, “555”, “777”, and “999” are probable jackpots (“777” is “16RV passing scheduled jackpot”, and “333” is “16R (actually 15R) V). "Passing jackpot", "111", "555", "999" is "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot"), and the jackpot symbol arrays "222", "444", "666", and "888" are normal Jackpot ("16R (substantially 13R) V planned non-passing jackpot").
In the decorative design change stop effect, as shown in the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C, the normal design is a blue (white) numeral SB as a symbol and a non-character portion imitating a flame. NC is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number portion SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. As shown in the right decorative pattern 8R, the probable change symbol is displayed as a symbol in which a red (indicated by hatching) numeral portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed. Are displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The numeral SB of the normal symbol and the numeral SR of the probable symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 101 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging up and down a few frames). It does not show the result of the fluctuation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), a decorative design confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol confirmation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporarily stopped state in the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 101 (B) are completely stopped to become a determined symbol, and the result of the change is determined by the player. It is a production to notify. In the decorative design confirmation effect, the appearance of the display pattern of the right decorative design 8R stopped at the positively changing design among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R stopped in the decorative design change stop effect shown in FIG. 101 (B) is changed. It is shown. In other words, when the decorative design confirmation effect is performed, the display mode of the positively-variable symbol in which the numeral SR and the non-character NC are integrally displayed is changed to a symbol in which the numeral SR and the character CA9 are integrally displayed. I do. At this time, the number part SR is reduced in size, and is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size that is approximately half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. The character portion CA9 is a special character corresponding to the probable variable design “9”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), a decorative symbol change start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol change start effect is an effect performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol finalized effect shown in FIG. 101 (C) start to change. In this decorative symbol change start effect, the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as the positively changing symbol changes among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalized effect shown in FIG. 101 (C). This is shown. In other words, when the decorative symbol change start effect is performed, the display pattern of the positive variation symbol in which the numeric portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed is changed to a symbol in which the numeric portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed. Change. At this time, the number part SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC with substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol change start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the display mode of the decorative symbol fixed effect illustrated in FIG. 101 (C) to the decorative symbol change stop illustrated in FIG. 101 (B). It returns to the display mode of the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative design change effect, the same effect as the decorative design change effect shown in FIG. 101A is performed. In other words, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, when the symbol arrangement including the probable-variable design is fixedly displayed, the probable-variable design is displayed integrally with the numeric portion SR and the non-character portion NC. After the pattern is changed to a different pattern, and after the numeral SR is enlarged and changed to substantially the same size as the numeral SB, the fluctuation is started. That is, immediately before the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the positively-variable symbol changes to the display mode in the temporary stop state.

[Decoration pattern fluctuation display effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol change display effect B.
In the decorative symbol change display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 102 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 102 (A). In this example, “9 ↓ 9” is shown in the reach symbol array. As described above, “9” is a probable variable symbol, that is, in this reach effect, a reach symbol array that becomes a probable variable jackpot when a jackpot is achieved is shown. In the reach effect, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R forming the reach symbol array are each composed of a red (indicated by hatching) numeral SR as a symbol and a non-character part NC simulating a flame. Are displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number portion SR is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. It is shown that the decorative symbol 8C is changing (scrolling downward). In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), a reach symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach symbol change effect, a state in which the display mode of the positively-variable symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, right decorative symbol 8R) stopped in the reach symbol array ("9 ↓ 9") is changed is shown. That is, when a certainty variable symbol in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed is reached, the display mode is changed to a symbol in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed. At this time, the number part SR is reduced in size, and is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size that is approximately half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. It is shown that the decorative symbol 8C is changing (scrolling downward). Further, the character portion CA9 is a special character corresponding to the probable variable design “9”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), a decorative symbol change stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol change stop effect is achieved by stopping the middle decorative symbol 8C in the final stop symbol while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 102 (B) are stopped in the reach symbol array. , The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has stopped. This example shows that the middle decorative symbol 8C stops at the probable variable symbol “7” and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop at the lost symbol array (“979”, reach-losing symbol array). Here, the middle decorative pattern 8C stops at the pattern in which the numeral part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed, while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R stopped at the reach pattern arrangement are the middle decorative pattern 8R. When the decorative symbol 8C stops, the display mode changes from a symbol in which the numeric portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed to a symbol in which the numeric portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed, and The section SR is enlarged in size and returns to the size at the time of the reach effect shown in FIG. 102 (B). That is, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), in the state where all the decorative symbols have stopped changing, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are symbols in which the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed. The numeral part SR has a display mode in which it is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC with substantially the same size as the numeral part SB of the normal symbol. In the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 102 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging up and down by two or three frames). It does not show the result of the fluctuation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), a decorative design confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative design confirmation effect, the decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporarily stopped state in the decorative design change stop effect shown in FIG. 102 (D) is completely stopped and becomes a fixed design, and the result of the change is provided to the player. This is a production to notify. In this decorative symbol confirmation effect, the appearance of the display pattern of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped in the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 102 (D) is changed. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped in the decorative symbol change stop effect are all positive change symbols, this decorative symbol confirmation effect shows a state in which the display mode of all the decorative symbols has changed. That is, when the decorative pattern confirmation effect is performed, the display pattern of the probable variable pattern in which the numeric part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed is such that the decorative pattern 8L and 8R are the numeric part SR and the character part CA9. The decorative pattern 8C changes to a pattern in which the numeral part SR and the character part CA7 are integrally displayed. At this time, the number part SR is reduced in size, and is displayed in the display area of the character parts CA7 and CA9 with a size that is approximately half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. Note that the character portion CA7 is a special character corresponding to the probable variable design "7".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), a decorative symbol change start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol change start effect is an effect that is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol finalized effect shown in FIG. 102 (E) start to change. In this decorative symbol change start effect, a state in which the display mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the decorative symbol confirmation effect shown in FIG. 102 (E) is changed is shown. Since the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have been confirmed and stopped in the decorative symbol finalizing effect, are all positively changing symbols, this decorative symbol change starting effect shows a state in which the display mode of all the decorative symbols has changed. In other words, the probable design in which the number portion SR and the character portions CA7 and CA9 are integrally displayed has a display mode in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed when a decorative symbol change start effect is performed. It changes to a design. At this time, the number part SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC with substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal symbol. That is, when the decorative symbol change start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the display mode of the decorative symbol fixed effect illustrated in FIG. 102 (E) to the decorative symbol change stop illustrated in FIG. 102 (D). It returns to the display mode of the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display. In this decorative design change effect, the same effect as the above-described decorative design change effect shown in FIG. 102 (A) is performed. In other words, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, when the symbol arrangement including the probable-variable design is fixedly displayed, the probable-variable design is displayed integrally with the numeric portion SR and the non-character portion NC. After the pattern is changed to a different pattern, and after the numeral SR is enlarged and changed to substantially the same size as the numeral SB, the fluctuation is started. That is, immediately before the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the positively-variable symbol changes to the display mode in the temporary stop state.

[Decoration pattern display effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol change display effect C.
In the decorative symbol change display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 103 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), a decorative symbol change stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol change stop effect indicates that the decorative display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 103 (A) has been stopped, and here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a lost symbol array ( "689"). As described above, “6” and “8” are normal symbols, and “9” is a probable symbol.
In the decorative design change stop effect, as shown in the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C, the normal design is a blue (white) numeral SB as a symbol and a non-character portion imitating a flame. NC is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number portion SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. As shown in the right decorative pattern 8R, the probable change symbol is displayed as a symbol in which a red (indicated by hatching) numeral portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed. Are displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The numeral SB of the normal symbol and the numeral SR of the probable symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging up and down a few frames) and are considered as fixed symbols. It does not show the result of the fluctuation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), a decorative design confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative design confirmation effect, the decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporarily stopped state in the decorative design change stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B) is completely stopped and becomes a fixed design, and the result of the change is determined by the player. It is a production to notify. In this decorative design confirmation effect, the state in which the display mode of the right decorative design 8R stopped in the positively changing design among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R stopped in the decorative design change stop effect shown in FIG. It is shown. In other words, when the decorative design confirmation effect is performed, the display mode of the positively-variable symbol in which the numeral SR and the non-character NC are integrally displayed is changed to a symbol in which the numeral SR and the character CA9 are integrally displayed. I do. At this time, the number part SR is reduced in size, and is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size that is approximately half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. The character portion CA9 is a special character corresponding to the probable variable design “9”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), a decorative symbol change start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol change start effect is an effect that is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been completely stopped in the decorative symbol finalized effect shown in FIG. 103 (C) start to change. In this decorative symbol change start effect, the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as the positive variable symbol among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the decorative symbol finalized effect shown in FIG. 103 (C) changes. This is shown. In other words, when the decorative symbol change start effect is performed, the display pattern of the positive variation symbol in which the numeric portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed is changed to a symbol in which the numeric portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed. Change. At this time, the number part SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC with substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal symbol. In other words, when the decorative symbol change start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the display mode of the decorative symbol fixed effect illustrated in FIG. 103 (C) to the decorative symbol change stop illustrated in FIG. 103 (B). It returns to the display mode of the effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative design change effect, the same effect as the above-described decorative design change effect shown in FIG. 103 (A) is performed. In other words, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate, when the symbol arrangement including the probable-variable design is fixedly displayed, the probable-variable design is displayed integrally with the numeric portion SR and the non-character portion NC. After the pattern is changed to a different pattern, and after the numeral SR is enlarged and changed to substantially the same size as the numeral SB, the fluctuation is started. That is, immediately before the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the display mode of the positively-variable symbol changes to the display mode in the temporary stop state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), a decorative symbol enlargement stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol expansion stop effect indicates that the decorative display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 103 (E) has stopped, and here, the decorative symbol 8L, This shows that 8C and 8R stopped at the lost symbol arrangement (“678”). This decoration design expansion stop effect is the same as the decoration design fluctuation stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (B), except that the normal design stops at the left decoration design 8L and the right decoration design 8R, The surely changing design is stopped at the decorative design 8C. Here, when the probable variable symbol stops at the middle decorative symbol 8C, the number portion SR of the probable variable symbol is the normal symbol as compared to the case where the probable variable symbol stops at the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 103 (B). It is designed to be displayed larger than the number part SB. In other words, when the final stop symbol (the middle decorative symbol 8C) stops at the positive variable symbol, the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) and the second stop symbol (right decorative symbol 8R) stop at the positive variable symbol. , And the numeral part SR is displayed in a large size. Note that, in this case, the numeric part SR is displayed partially outside the display area of the non-character part NC.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), a decorative design confirmation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this decorative symbol confirmation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the temporarily stopped state are completely stopped to become a determined symbol in the decorative symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. 103 (F), and the result of the change is determined by the player. It is a production to notify. In this decorative design confirmation effect, the state in which the display mode of the middle decorative design 8C stopped in the positively changing design among the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R stopped in the decorative design expansion stop effect shown in FIG. It is shown. That is, when the decorative design confirmation effect is performed, the display mode of the positively variable design in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed changes to a design in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA7 are integrally displayed. I do. At this time, the number part SR is reduced in size and is displayed in the display area of the character part CA7 with a size that is approximately half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. Note that the character portion CA7 is a special character corresponding to the probable variable design "7".
[Decoration design fluctuation display effect D]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol change display effect D.
In the decorative symbol change display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 104A, a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 104 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), a decorative symbol change stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This decorative symbol change stop effect indicates that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) have stopped changing display, and here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a lost symbol array ( "689"). As described above, “6” and “8” are normal symbols, and “9” is a probable symbol.
In the decorative design change stop effect, as shown in the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C, the normal design is a blue (white) numeral SB as a symbol and a non-character portion imitating a flame. NC is displayed as a symbol integrally displayed, and the number portion SB is displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. As shown in the right decorative pattern 8R, the probable change symbol is displayed as a symbol in which a red (indicated by hatching) numeral portion SR as a symbol and a non-character portion NC imitating a flame are integrally displayed. Are displayed in the display area of the non-character portion NC. The numeral SB of the normal symbol and the numeral SR of the probable symbol are displayed in substantially the same size. In the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state in which the decorative symbols swing up and down a few frames), and are set as fixed symbols. It does not show the result of the fluctuation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), a stop symbol change effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this stop symbol change effect, the appearance of the display pattern of the right decorative symbol 8R stopped at the certain change symbol among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped in the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) is changed. It is shown. That is, when the stop symbol change effect is performed, the positively-changed symbol in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed changes its display mode to a symbol in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA9 are integrally displayed. I do. At this time, the number part SR is reduced in size, and is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size that is approximately half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. In the stop symbol change effect shown in FIG. 104 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, in a state of swinging up and down by two or three frames). It does not show the results of Further, the character portion CA9 is a special character corresponding to the probable variable design “9”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), a pseudo consecutive start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This pseudo-sequence start effect is an effect that is performed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped in the stop symbol change effect illustrated in FIG. 104C start the pseudo-sequence.
Here, the pseudo continuous effect is an effect that makes the display of the decorative symbol fluctuate in a pseudo manner as if it were repeated a predetermined number of times, and is an effect that can be executed at the start of the fluctuation, during the reach effect, at the time of the fluctuation stop, and the like. For example, the pseudo continuous production is a production in which the decoration design is started to fluctuate, then the production of repeating the production of temporarily stopping all the decoration designs, the production of repeating the production of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined design arrangement of the decoration design, An effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping a determined logo (for example, NEXT), or an effect that executes a fluctuating effect of a decorative pattern together with a display reminiscent of pseudo-runs such as “× 2”, “× 3”, and “pseudo”. including. Note that the number of repeated effects is also referred to as the number of pseudo-runs, and if it is two times, “pseudo 2”, “× 2”, and if it is three times, notations such as “pseudo 3”, “× 3” can be given.
In this pseudo consecutive start effect, the display mode of the right decorative symbol 8R displayed as the positively changing symbol has changed among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the stop symbol changing effect shown in FIG. 104 (C). The situation is shown. That is, when the pseudo continuous start effect is performed, the display pattern of the positive change symbol in which the number part SR and the character part CA9 are integrally displayed is changed to a symbol in which the number part SR and the non-character part NC are integrally displayed. I do. At this time, the number part SR is enlarged in size and is displayed in the display area of the non-character part NC with substantially the same size as the number part SB of the normal symbol. In other words, when the pseudo continuous start effect is performed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the display pattern of the stop symbol change effect illustrated in FIG. 104 (C) to the decorative symbol change stop effect illustrated in FIG. 104 (B). Is returned to the display mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), a pseudo continuous fluctuation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this pseudo continuous fluctuation effect, the same effect as the decorative symbol fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A) is performed. That is, when the symbol arrangement including the probable symbol pattern is stopped and displayed when the pseudo symbol fluctuating is started in the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R, the probable symbol pattern is integrated with the numeral portion SR and the non-character portion NC. After changing to the displayed symbol, and after enlarging the number part SR to change it to almost the same size as the number part SB, the re-change is started. That is, immediately before the re-change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the display mode of the positively-changed symbol is changed to the display mode for the decorative symbol change stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (B). As described above, the display mode when the pseudo continuous effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to (E) in the decorative symbol variation display effect D is shown in FIG. 101 (A) in the decorative symbol variation display effect A described above. (E) has a display mode similar to that of the decorative symbol fluctuating effect that is repeatedly performed when the pseudo continuous effect is not performed. Thereby, even in the case where the pseudo continuous production is performed, a clever and delicate pseudo continuous production that makes it appear to the player that the variable display of the decorative design (special design) is actually performed a plurality of times is performed. Can be performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. That is, in the present example, the reach effect is executed after the number of pseudo runs is performed twice. This reach effect shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the pseudo-random variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (E). In this example, “9 ↓ 9” is shown in the reach symbol array. As described above, “9” is a probable change symbol, that is, in this reach effect, a reach design array that becomes a probable change big hit when a big hit is shown. It is shown that the decorative symbol 8C is changing (scrolling downward). In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), a jackpot symbol enlargement stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot symbol expansion stop effect is achieved by stopping the middle decorative symbol 8C in the final stop symbol while the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R shown in FIG. 104 (F) are stopped in the reach symbol array. , The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has stopped. This example shows that the middle decorative symbol 8C stops at the probable variable symbol “9” and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop at the probable variable jackpot symbol array “999”. Here, in this jackpot symbol enlargement stop effect, when the middle decorative symbol 8C of the final stop symbol stops at the positive variable symbol and the positive variable jackpot symbol array is displayed, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the positive variable symbols. The numeral SR is enlarged and displayed larger than the numeral SB of the normal symbol. In other words, the numeric portion SR of the probable design is enlarged and displayed larger than the numeric portion SR of the probable design shown in FIGS. 104 (B), (D) and (F). Further, in this case, the numeric part SR is displayed partially outside the display area of the non-character part NC. In the jackpot symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a temporary stop state (for example, a state of swinging up and down three frames), and the fluctuation is determined as a fixed symbol. It does not show the results of

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot determination effect, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the temporary stop state are completely stopped in the jackpot symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. This is an effect of notifying the player that the game has become complete. In this jackpot determination effect, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R as the surely changing symbols stopped in the jackpot symbol expansion stop effect shown in FIG. In other words, the probability change design in which the number portion SR and the non-character portion NC are integrally displayed is changed to a design in which the number portion SR and the character portion CA7 are integrally displayed when the jackpot determination effect is performed. . At this time, the number part SR is reduced in size, and is displayed in the display area of the character part CA9 in a size that is approximately half the size of the number part SB of the normal symbol. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "big hit!" Are displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design change display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the decorative symbols include a first symbol group and a second symbol group. The benefit to be given to the player is set more advantageously than when a big hit is achieved with the decorative symbol of the second symbol group, and the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a first symbol in which the first symbol and the character are integrally displayed. The decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a second symbol in which the second symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed. As one of a plurality of display effects, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is In some cases, the decorative symbol is displayed in a third mode in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed. According to this configuration, the decoration symbol of the first symbol group in which the privilege given to the player is advantageously set is displayed in the third mode symbol at a predetermined timing instead of the first mode symbol, so that the player is displayed. It is also possible to give the player an impression of the jackpot as well as to give a change to the variable display of the decorative pattern. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the decoration symbols of the first symbol group are changed from the first mode symbol to the third mode symbol in relation to the start of the change, and are involved in the stop of the change. Thus, the design is changed from the third aspect design to the first aspect design. Furthermore, the first symbol in the first aspect symbol is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol, and the first symbol in the third aspect symbol is displayed as the same as or larger than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol. Configuration. According to this configuration, the decorative pattern of the first symbol group has the same display pattern as the decorative symbol of the second symbol group, in which symbols and non-characters are integrally displayed during a fast-moving change, and One symbol is displayed the same as or larger than the second symbol. This makes it easy for the player to easily recognize the trend of the first symbol of the most interest directly related to the award of the bonus even if the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changing. On the other hand, during the fluctuation stop without motion, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is different from the decorative symbol of the second symbol group in a display mode in which a symbol and a character are integrally displayed. It will be displayed smaller than two symbols. As a result, while the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped changing, the first symbol is displayed in a small size and the character is brought up, and the player is directly connected to the privilege and the first symbol of the first symbol group of highest interest is provided. It is possible to carefully visually recognize and pay attention to the character associated with. That is, the player can grasp the first symbol only by looking at the character. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101 to FIG. 104, when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is included when the decorative symbol stops fluctuating in a predetermined symbol array, When the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third mode symbol, and then the decorative symbol is determined by the symbol array in which the decorative symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed. It is configured to change from the third aspect symbol to the first aspect symbol. Thereafter, when the decorative symbols in the determined symbol array start to change, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are changed from the first symbol to the third symbol. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is included when the decorative symbol stops changing in the predetermined symbol array, the first symbol group in the predetermined symbol array that has stopped changing. Can be easily confirmed, and a character associated with the first symbol in the determined predetermined symbol arrangement can be easily confirmed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, when the decorative symbols of the first symbol group are stopped in the reach symbol array, the decorative symbols of the first symbol group stopped in the reach symbol array are changed to the second symbol. The first design symbol is changed from the first design to the third design, and then the final stop design stops and fluctuates in a predetermined design arrangement (temporary stop), and the decorative design of the first design group is changed from the third design to the first design. It changes to a mode design. Next, when the decorative symbol is determined by the stopped (temporarily stopped) symbol array, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the third aspect symbol to the first aspect symbol, and thereafter, the determined symbol array is determined. When the decoration symbol is started to change, the decoration symbol of the first symbol group is changed from the first symbol to the third symbol. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped in the reach symbol array, the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is displayed in the third mode symbol instead of the first mode symbol, thereby playing a game. It is possible to improve the jackpot expectation of the reach of the person. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, when the final stop symbol stops at the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, or the jackpot symbol array (probable change) with the decorative symbol of the first symbol group. When the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed, the decoration symbols of the first symbol group change (enlarge) the size of the first symbol and are displayed integrally with the non-character (partly from the non-character display area. It is configured to be displayed in the fourth aspect symbol (displayed protruding). According to this configuration, the size of the first symbol changes (enlarges) when the final stop symbol and the jackpot symbol array (probably variable jackpot symbol array) of the most interest directly related to the grant of the privilege are the decorative symbols of the first symbol group. ) Is displayed, thereby making it possible to give a change to the variable display of the decorative symbol, thereby improving the player's sense of expectation. Further, the player can easily confirm the decorative symbols of the first symbol group and grasp the variation result. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when the symbol pattern including the decorative symbol of the first symbol group is stopped and displayed at the time of starting the pseudo-running variation, as shown in FIG. After changing the decorative symbol of one symbol group to the third aspect symbol and enlarging the first symbol, re-change is started. According to this configuration, the display mode when the pseudo continuous production is performed is the same as the display mode that is repeatedly performed when the pseudo continuous production is not performed. Thereby, even in the case where the pseudo continuous production is performed, a clever and delicate pseudo continuous production that gives the player the impression that the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) has been performed multiple times in a realistic manner. Can be performed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the decorative symbol change display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, the first stop symbol (left decorative symbol), the second stop symbol (right decorative symbol), and the last stop symbol (middle decorative symbol) in the decorative symbols. In any of the above, when the symbol stopped and fluctuated is a positively-variable symbol, the symbol and the non-character are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) as a symbol integrally displayed, and then the symbol and the character are integrally displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the final stop symbol (medium decoration symbol) may be changed to a symbol in which a number and a character are integrally displayed. The final stop symbol (interior decoration symbol) is a symbol that is of the highest interest to the player, for example, in the reach state, and therefore, by changing the display mode in this way, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, odd numbers are probable symbols, even numbers are normal symbols, probable symbols are red, and normal symbols are blue, and numerals are displayed as symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol may be a character other than a number, a mark, or an image (icon) of a specific-shaped object or article. Further, in the probable variable design, the character displayed integrally with the number is displayed in the same size, but the probabilistic design (eg, “3”, “7”) in which the privilege given to the player when a big hit is obtained is advantageous. ) May make the character display larger than other probable symbols.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, when the final stop symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) stops at the positive variable symbol, the positive variable symbol is changed (enlarged) by the size of the numeral and becomes a non-character. (A part of the non-character is displayed outside the display area), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the bonus given to the player at the time of the big hit is stopped at an advantageous probable design (for example, “3” or “7”), the size of the number of the probable design is changed (enlarged). Good. In this case, the probable symbol may be only the last stop symbol (medium decoration symbol), or the probable symbol is the first stop symbol (left decoration symbol) or the second stop symbol (right decoration symbol). It may be. Alternatively, when the final stop symbol (middle decorative symbol) stops at a certain variable symbol, the variable symbol is the first stopped symbol (left decorative symbol) and the second stop symbol that are stopped without changing the size of the number. The number of the symbol (the right decorative symbol) may be reduced.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when a jackpot symbol array (probably variable jackpot symbol array) is displayed with the probability variable symbol, the size of the number of the probability variable symbol is changed (enlarged). Although it was designed to be displayed integrally with the non-character (partly protruding from the display area of the non-character), in this case, in the reach state before the jackpot symbol array (probably variable jackpot symbol array) was displayed, You may make it enlarge and display the figure of the surely changed symbol which becomes a big hit among the last stopped symbols which are changing. Alternatively, the numbers of all probable symbols in the changing final stop symbols may be enlarged or displayed, or the numbers of all final stop symbols may be enlarged and displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when the symbol that fluctuated and stopped is a positively-variable symbol, the symbol and the non-character are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) as a symbol that is integrally displayed. Later, the number and the character are changed to a design in which the character and the character are integrally displayed. In this case, when the number and the character change to a design in which the character and the character are integrally displayed, and when the character is in a predetermined display mode, For example, the character may change to red, the character's face changes to a smile, and a subsequent change (including a re-change such as a pseudo-run) may be a reach or a jackpot. In other words, the character may be changed to a predetermined display mode to suggest a reach or a jackpot.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, in the pseudo continuous production, the number and the non-character are integrally displayed, and the temporarily changed probable design is temporarily displayed with the number and the character portion once. The symbol is changed to a symbol, and thereafter, the symbol and the non-character are returned to the symbol in which the symbol is integrally displayed, and the symbol is changed again (hereinafter, also referred to as a first pseudo consecutive production). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, in the pseudo continuous production, a probable change pattern in which a number and a non-character are displayed integrally and temporarily stopped does not change to a pattern in which a number and a character portion are displayed integrally, and changes again as it is (hereinafter, the following). 2 pseudo continuous production). Then, in this case, when the first pseudo continuous production is performed, a reach or a jackpot is obtained in the subsequent re-fluctuation, and when the second pseudo continuous production is performed, the reach or non-reach is obtained in the subsequent re-fluctuation. It may be. In other words, the first pseudo continuous production may be performed to suggest a reach or a jackpot.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D3-1]
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
A gaming machine with
The decorative design includes a first design group and a second design group,
When a big hit is achieved with the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, a privilege to be given to the player is set more advantageously than when a big hit is achieved with the decorative symbol of the second symbol group,
The decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a first mode symbol in which a first symbol and a character are integrally displayed,
The decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a second mode symbol in which a second symbol and a non-character are integrally displayed,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined first decorative design effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first decorative symbol effect may display a decorative symbol of the first symbol group in a third mode symbol in which the first symbol and the non-character are integrally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect D3-2]
The first decorative symbol effect is to change the decorative symbols of the first symbol group from the first mode symbol to the third mode symbol in relation to the start of the change, and to change the decorative pattern of the first mode group from the third mode symbol in the change stop. Change to the first aspect design,
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1.
[Aspect D3-3]
The first symbol in the first aspect symbol is displayed smaller than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol, and the first symbol in the third aspect symbol is the same as or larger than the second symbol in the second aspect symbol. Is displayed,
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2.
[Aspect D3-4]
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
A decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means,
A gaming machine with
The decorative design includes a first design group and a second design group,
When a big hit is achieved with the decorative symbol of the first symbol group, a privilege to be given to the player is set more advantageously than when a big hit is achieved with the decorative symbol of the second symbol group,
The decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a first mode symbol in which a first symbol and a character are integrally displayed,
The decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a second mode symbol in which a second symbol and a non-character are integrally displayed,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second decorative symbol effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The second decorative symbol effect may display a decorative symbol of the first symbol group in a fourth mode symbol in which the size of the first symbol changes and is integrally displayed with the non-character.
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect D3-5]
The decorative symbol of the first symbol group is a positive variable symbol, the decorative symbol of the second symbol group is a non-variable symbol, the first symbol and the second symbol are numbers, and the number of the first symbol is The number of the second symbol is different in color,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-4, wherein

  Hereinafter, the game state suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This game state suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the end of the time saving game performed after the jackpot game, and more specifically, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the time saving game is completed, the game state is inaccurate. This is an effect that suggests whether the state is normal (normal state) or high-accuracy (state of latent change).

[Game state suggestion effect A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for describing the gaming state suggestion effect A.
In the gaming state suggestion effect A, although not shown, a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed, and is scrolled downward while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. Note that the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a jackpot. In the present example, the jackpot symbol arrangement “777” is “16RV passing planned jackpot” (probably variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy-high base state) until the game state hits the next jackpot. ) Is a jackpot. The jackpot symbol array “333” is “16R (substantially 15R) V passing planned jackpot” (probably variable jackpot), and after the jackpot game ends, the high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy-high-base state) until the gaming state hits the next jackpot. It is a jackpot. The jackpot symbol arrangement other than “777” and “333” is a jackpot that becomes “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot” (probable jackpot) or “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” (normal jackpot) It is. The “16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot” (latent jackpot) means that after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state becomes a highly accurate time-saving state (highly accurate high base state) until the number of times the special symbol is changed 100 times. After that, it becomes a high-probability low-base state (latency-probability change state). “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled planned jackpot” (normal jackpot) means that after the jackpot game is over, the gaming state will be in the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state) until the number of times the special symbol changes 100 times. After that, the state becomes the low-probability low-base state (normal state).
In the jackpot confirmation effect shown in FIG. 105 (A), the jackpot symbol array indicates “555”. Here, as described above, the jackpot symbol arrangement is “555”, which means “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot” or “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot” (normal jackpot). ), And the big hit symbol array “555” is “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned big hit” (latent big hit).

  Next, after the jackpot determination effect is executed, the jackpot game is started, and an effect relating to the jackpot game is executed on the display screen 7a, although not shown in the drawing. When the big hit game ends, a time-saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 105 (B). In this time-saving start effect, a decorative symbol variation effect in the high-accuracy high base state is performed, but it is difficult for the player to recognize the high-accuracy state, even though the player can recognize the time-saving state. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current gaming state is the low-probability high-base state or the high-precision high base state. In addition, at the upper right of the display screen 7a, a time saving number display ZT indicating the remaining time saving number is displayed, and here, the time saving number display ZT starts to change the first special symbol after shifting to the time saving state. Since this is the case (when the number of times saved has never been digested), “100” is shown as a default value.

  Next, after the time-saving start effect is executed, the time-saving game is started, and if the special symbol is changed 100 times in this time-saving game, that is, if the jackpot has not been won during the time-saving game, As shown in FIG. 105 (C), a time reduction end effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased on the display screen 7a, and instead, the character “time saving end” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and “0” is displayed on the time saving number display ZT. Is displayed. The character display of "time saving end" and the display of "0" in the number of times saving time display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time saving state has ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), on the display screen 7a, a fluctuation effect at the end of time reduction is executed. In this variation effect at the end of the working hours, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the same variation time as the normal state, that is, the variation display is started with a longer variation time than during the time saving game. Further, on the display screen 7a, a specific image KSG1 with a “mountain” motif is displayed below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. The specific image KSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

  Next, after the time-saving game is over (after the time-varying-time fluctuation effect is performed), a special symbol fluctuation display is performed once, and as shown in FIG. 105 (E), a countdown effect is displayed on the display screen 7a. Is executed. Here, in the game state suggestion effect A, if the special symbol is fluctuated 10 times after the end of the time-saving game, the current game state is determined to be low (normal state) or highly accurate (specific state) using the specific image KSG1. (Latency probable change state). In the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105 (E), since the special symbol change display is performed once after the time saving game is completed, the remaining 9 special change display until the latent probability change suggestion effect is performed. The number “9” shown is displayed. That is, this countdown effect is switched to the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (losing symbols) every time the special symbol is fluctuated once after the time saving game is over, and until the latent probability change suggesting effect. The number indicating the countdown is displayed large in the center of the screen. In this countdown effect, only the number indicating the countdown until the latent probability change suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific image KSG1 is temporarily deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), a countdown variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the fluctuation effect at the time of countdown, the display is switched to a number indicating the countdown until the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 105 (E), and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started again on the display screen 7a. At this time, the specific image KSG1 once deleted in the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105 (E) is displayed again.

  Thereafter, the countdown effect and the fluctuation effect at the time of the countdown are alternately repeated, and after the time reduction game is completed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed ten times. Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the display screen is displayed. In 7a, a countdown effect in which a number “0” indicating that there is no remaining variation display of the special symbol until the latent probability change suggestion effect is displayed is executed. That is, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 105 (G) indicates that the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect has been completed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), a latent probability change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this latent probability change suggestion effect, when the current game state is high accuracy (latency probability change state), the color of the specific image KSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, from white to red), and low accuracy (normal state). In this case, an effect indicating whether the current game state is low (normal state) or high (latency change state) is performed by not changing the color of the specific image KSG1. In this example, as described with reference to FIG. 105 (A), the jackpot symbol array “555” is internally a latent probability jackpot. Therefore, in the rendering effect indicating latent probability change shown in FIG. ) And (F) are changed from the white specific image KSG1 to the red specific image KSG2, which suggests that the current gaming state is high-precision (latency-probable state). If the jackpot symbol array “555” is a normal jackpot internally, the latent specific change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) indicates the specific white image shown in FIGS. 105 (D) and (F). KSG1 is maintained as it is, which indicates that the current gaming state is inaccurate (normal state).

[Game state suggestion effect B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for describing the gaming state suggestion effect B.
In the game state suggestion effect B, although not shown, a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed, and is scrolled downward while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. Note that the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 106 (A), the jackpot symbol array indicates “555”. Here, as described above, the jackpot symbol arrangement is “555”, which means “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot” or “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot” (normal jackpot). ), And the big hit symbol array “555” is “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned big hit” (latent big hit).

  Next, after the jackpot determination effect is executed, the jackpot game is started, and an effect relating to the jackpot game is executed on the display screen 7a, although not shown in the drawing. Then, when the big hit game ends, a time-saving start effect is executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 106 (B). In this time-saving start effect, a decorative symbol variation effect in the high-accuracy high base state is performed, but it is difficult for the player to recognize the high-accuracy state, even though the player can recognize the time-saving state. That is, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the current gaming state is the low-probability high-base state or the high-precision high base state. In addition, at the upper right of the display screen 7a, a time saving number display ZT indicating the remaining time saving number is displayed, and here, the time saving number display ZT starts to change the first special symbol after shifting to the time saving state. Since this is the case (when the number of times saved has never been digested), “100” is shown as a default value. In addition, the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates that the effect mode performed from this time-saving start effect is mode A. The mode A is an effect with a motif of “mountain”. In this time-saving start effect, the specific image imitating the “mountain” below the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. KSG1 is displayed.

  Next, after the time-saving start effect is executed, the time-saving game is started. When the special symbol is changed 50 times in this time-saving game, the effect mode is changed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 106 (C). An effect is performed. This effect mode change effect is an effect in which the effect mode is changed from mode A to mode B. In mode A, the effect with the motif of “mountain” is changed to the effect with mode “the tree” as the motif. . That is, the mode B is an effect with a “tree” motif performed when a special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times) after the time saving game is started. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific image RSG1 imitating a “tree” is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R instead of the specific image KSG1. The specific image RSG1 is displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white).

  Next, when the special symbol is changed 100 times in the time-saving game (the special symbol is changed 50 times from the effect of changing the effect mode), that is, if the jackpot does not become a big hit during the time-saving game, As shown in FIG. 106 (D), a time reduction end effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this time saving end effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are erased on the display screen 7a, and instead, the character “time saving end” is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and “0” is displayed on the time saving number display ZT. Is displayed. The character display of "time saving end" and the display of "0" in the number of times saving time display ZT clearly indicate to the player that the time saving state has ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), on the display screen 7a, a fluctuation effect at the end of time reduction is executed. In this variation effect at the end of the working hours, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in the same variation time as the normal state, that is, the variation display is started with a longer variation time than during the time saving game. In the effect mode, the mode B is maintained, and a specific image RSG1 imitating a “tree” is displayed below the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, as in the time reduction game.

  Next, after the time-saving game is over (after the time-varying-time fluctuation effect is performed), if the special symbol is fluctuated once, a countdown effect is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 106 (F). Is executed. Here, in the game state suggestion effect B, if the special symbol variation display is performed ten times after the time-saving game is completed, the current game state is low (normal state) or highly accurate (normal state) using the specific image RSG1. (Latency probable change state). In the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106 (F), since the special symbol change display is performed once after the time-saving game is finished, the remaining special symbol change display is nine times until the latent probability change suggestion effect. The number “9” shown is displayed. That is, this countdown effect is switched to the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (losing symbols) every time the special symbol is fluctuated once after the time saving game is over, and until the latent probability change suggesting effect. The number indicating the countdown is displayed large in the center of the screen. In this countdown effect, only the number indicating the countdown until the latent probability change suggestion effect is displayed, and the specific image RSG1 is temporarily deleted.

  Next, although illustration is omitted here, a countdown variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 105 (F). In the fluctuation effect at the time of countdown, the display is switched to a number indicating the countdown until the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. At this time, the specific image RSG1 once deleted in the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106 (F) is displayed again.

  Thereafter, the countdown effect and the fluctuation effect at the time of the countdown are alternately repeated, and after the time reduction game is completed, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed ten times. Next, as shown in FIG. In 7a, a countdown effect in which a number “0” indicating that there is no remaining variation display of the special symbol until the latent probability change suggestion effect is displayed is executed. In other words, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 106 (G) indicates that the countdown to the latent probability change suggestion effect has been completed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), a latent probability change suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this latent probability change suggestion effect, when the current game state is high accuracy (latency probability change state), the color of the specific image RSG1 is changed to a predetermined color (for example, from white to red) and low accuracy (normal state). In this case, by rendering the color of the specific image RSG1 unchanged, an effect that indicates whether the current game state is low (normal state) or high (latency change state) is performed. In this example, as described with reference to FIG. 106 (A), the jackpot symbol array “555” is internally set to a latent large hit, and therefore the latent probability change suggestion effect shown in FIG. ) And (E) are changed from the white specific image RSG1 to the red specific image RSG2, which suggests that the current game state is high-precision (latency-probable change state). Assuming that the jackpot symbol array “555” is internally a normal jackpot, the latent specific change suggestion effect shown in FIG. 106 (H) indicates the white specific image shown in FIGS. 106 (C) and (E). RSG1 is maintained as it is, which suggests that the current gaming state is inaccurate (normal state).

[Playing state suggestion C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for describing the gaming state suggestion effect C.
In the gaming state suggestion effect C, a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol, although not shown. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed, and is scrolled downward while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. Note that the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 107 (A), the jackpot symbol array indicates “555”. Here, as described above, the jackpot symbol arrangement is “555”, which means “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot” or “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot” (normal jackpot). ), And the big hit symbol array “555” is “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned big hit” (latent big hit).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), a jackpot game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot game effect, the character "Start jackpot game!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7, and the jackpot symbol array OZH ("555") that has become the jackpot this time is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. In the jackpot game production, productions such as opening production, round production, and ending production are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), a selected image display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This selection image display effect is an effect performed as one of the jackpot game effects, which is performed during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, performed during the round effect), and includes a plurality of selection images SG1 on the display screen 7a. SG2, SG3, and SG4 are displayed. The selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are images including the characters "CHANCE" in the display area. The selected image SG1 is red, the selected image SG2 is green, the selected image SG1 is yellow, and the selected image SG1 is blue. Is displayed in. Here, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are images that suggest the gaming state after the jackpot game, and more specifically, the degree of expectation that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be in a probable (highly accurate) state. This is a suggested image. The magnitude of the degree of expectation is in the order of the selected image SG1 (red)> the selected image SG2 (green)> the selected image SG3 (yellow)> the selected image SG4 (blue) (for example, the game state after the jackpot game is The probabilities of the probability change (high probability) state are: selected image SG1: 80%, selected image SG2: 60%, selected image SG3: 40%> selected image SG4: 20%.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this button effect, an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 shown in FIG. 107 (C) are once deleted, and the button image BOG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a, and the “button PUSH!” Is displayed above the button image BOG. Is displayed. It should be noted that a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the flange below the button image BOG. The meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from when the button operation instruction effect is displayed. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (E), a game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This gaming state suggestion effect is an effect in which any one of the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 is displayed as a result of the player pressing down the effect button 63 during the effective operation period of the effect button 63. Here, it is shown that the selected image SG1 (red) is selected and displayed based on the fact that the potential hit has been internally made (the internal probability has changed to the probability hit or the latent hit has occurred internally). When there is, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of the selected image SG1 (red)> the selected image SG2 (green)> the selected image SG3 (yellow)> the selected image SG4 (blue), and is internally normal (low accuracy) When the jackpot is won, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of the selected image SG4 (blue)> the selected image SG3 (yellow)> the selected image SG2 (green)> the selected image SG1 (red).

  Thereafter, the jackpot game ends, and although not shown, the time reduction start effect, the time reduction end effect, the time reduction end fluctuation effect, the countdown effect, and the countdown are displayed on the display screen 7a as in FIGS. 105 (B) to 105 (G). A time-varying effect and a countdown effect are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), on the display screen 7a, the same effect as that of FIG. 105 (H) is suggested. That is, the white specific image KSG1 is changed to the red specific image KSG2, which suggests that the current game state is highly accurate (latency changed state). That is, in the game state suggestion effect shown in FIG. 107 (E), when the selection image SG1 (red) having the highest degree of expectation that the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the certainty (high accuracy) state is selected. As in the effect of suggesting a change in latent probability shown in FIG. 107 (F), there is a high probability that an effect indicating that the current gaming state is highly accurate (variable state of change in latency) is executed.

  On the other hand, in the game state suggestion effect, it is assumed that the selection image SG4 (blue) is selected and displayed as shown in FIG. 107 (G) instead of FIG. 107 (E) (in this case, however, The jackpot symbol array “555” obtained is “16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot” (normal jackpot).

  Thereafter, the jackpot game ends, and although not shown, the time reduction start effect, the time reduction end effect, the time reduction end fluctuation effect, the countdown effect, and the countdown are displayed on the display screen 7a as in FIGS. 105 (B) to 105 (G). A time-varying effect and a countdown effect are executed. Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), on the display screen 7a, the latent specific change suggestion effect in which the specific image KSG1 is maintained as white without changing the white specific image KSG1 to the red specific image KSG2. Is executed. In other words, a latent probability change suggestion effect indicating that the current game state is low-probability (normal state) is executed. That is, in the game state suggestion effect shown in FIG. 107 (G), when the selection image SG4 (blue) having the lowest degree of expectation that the game state after the jackpot game is changed to a certain state (high accuracy) is selected. As in the effect of suggesting a latent probability change shown in FIG. 107 (H), there is a high probability that an effect indicating that the current game state is inaccurate (normal state) is executed.

[Game state suggestion effect D]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for describing the gaming state suggestion effect D.
In the gaming state suggestion effect D, a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the special symbol change display, although not shown. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed, and is scrolled downward while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing. Note that the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has a jackpot. In the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 108 (A), the jackpot symbol array indicates “555”. Here, as described above, the jackpot symbol arrangement is “555”, which means “16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot” or “16R (substantially 13R) V non-scheduled jackpot” (normal jackpot). ), And the big hit symbol array “555” is “16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned big hit” (latent big hit).

  Next, a jackpot game is started, and although not shown on the display screen 7a, a jackpot game effect is executed as in FIG. 107 (B). In this jackpot game effect, effects such as an opening effect, a round effect, and an ending effect are performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), a character selection effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character selection effect is an effect performed as one of the jackpot game effects performed during the execution of the jackpot game (for example, performed during the round effect), and displays a plurality of selected characters on the display screen 7a. . In this example, two selected characters CRA and CRB are displayed as selected characters. As shown in FIG. 108 (B), the selected characters CRA and CRB are displayed in the display area on the left half of the screen, and the selected character CRB is displayed in the display area on the right half of the screen. Characters suggesting an operation method of the effect button 63 are displayed above the selected characters CRA and CRB, and a character “strike” is displayed for the selected character CRA, and a character “strike” is displayed for the selected character CRB. ing. Further, characters indicating the names of the characters are displayed below the selected characters CRA and CRB, and the character “OARO” is displayed for the selected character CRA, and the character “JARO” is displayed for the selected character CRB. When the character selection effect is executed, the player operates the select button 68 to select one of the selected characters CRA and CRB.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), a character determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this character determination effect, it is assumed that the character selected by the player in the character selection effect is displayed, and here, the selected character CRA is selected and displayed. That is, in the character determination effect, among the multiple selected characters CRA and CRB displayed in the character selection effect, the unselected character CRB that is not selected is erased from the display screen 7a, and the selected character CRA selected is displayed on the display screen 7a. Displayed in the center. In addition, on the display screen 7a, the characters "hit" and "OARO" are displayed together with the selected character CRA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRA displayed in the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. In other words, this button effect causes the player to press down the effect button 63 once, due to a “strike” suggesting an operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRA. Specifically, a button image BOG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and characters “button PUSH!” Are displayed above the button image BOG. It should be noted that a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the flange below the button image BOG. The meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from when the button operation instruction effect is displayed. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (E), a game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this game state suggestion effect, as a result of the player pressing down the effect button 63 during the effective operation period of the effect button 63, an image indicating the game state after the big hit game is displayed. More specifically, the image suggests the degree of expectation that the gaming state after the jackpot game will be in a probable change (high accuracy) state. In the present example, the image indicating the gaming state after the jackpot game is the expectation degree suggestion image KSG1 displayed in red including the letters “CHANCE” in the display area. Here, the expected degree suggestion image is an expected degree suggested image KSG2 displayed in green having a different degree of expectedness from red, an expected degree suggested image KSG3 displayed in yellow, and an expected degree suggested image displayed in blue. Four types of KSG4 are prepared. The magnitude of the degree of expectation is in the order of the degree of expectation suggestion image KSG1 (red)> the degree of expectation suggestion image KSG2 (green)> the degree of expectation suggestion image KSG3 (yellow)> the degree of expectation suggestion image KSG4 (blue) (for example, The probability that the gaming state after the jackpot game is changed to the probable (high-probability) state is as follows: Expectation suggestion image KSG1: 80%, Expectation suggestion image KSG2: 60%, Expectation suggestion image KSG3: 40%> Expectation suggestion image KSG4: 20%). The reason why the expectation degree suggestion image KSG1 (red) is selected in this game state suggestion effect is based on the fact that the internal game has a potential internal hit (the internal probability change or the internal potential hit has occurred. When there is, the magnitude of the selection probability is in the order of the expected degree suggestion image KSG1 (red)> the expected degree suggested image KSG2 (green)> the expected degree suggested image KSG3 (yellow)> the expected degree suggested image KSG4 (blue), When a normal (low-probability) jackpot is internally generated, the magnitude of the selection probability is determined by the expected degree suggestion image KSG4 (blue)> the expected degree suggested image KSG3 (yellow)> the expected degree suggested image KSG2 (green)> Expectation degree suggestion image KSG1 (red).)

  On the other hand, in the character determination effect, it is assumed that the selected character CRB is selected and displayed as shown in FIG. 108 (F) instead of FIG. 108 (C) (however, in this case, the above described jackpot symbol arrangement “555” is “16R (substantially 13R) V planned non-passing jackpot” (normal jackpot).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (G), a button effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button effect is performed based on the selected character CRB displayed in the character determination effect, that is, selected by the player. In other words, this button effect causes the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 63 due to the “continuous hit” indicating the operation method of the effect button 63 related to the selected character CRB. Specifically, a plurality of button images BOG and the character “PUSH” are repeatedly displayed on the display screen 7 a while changing the display position over the button images BOG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (H), a game state suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This game state suggestion effect is the same as that shown in FIG. 108 (E), and as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the effect button 63, an image indicating the game state after the big hit game is displayed. In the present example, the image indicating the gaming state after the jackpot game is the expectation degree suggestion image KSG4 displayed in blue including the letters “CHANCE” in the display area. The reason why the expectation degree suggestion image KSG4 (blue) is selected in the game state suggestion effect is based on the fact that a normal jackpot is internally formed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the game state suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the time-saving game is such that the gaming state is a low-accuracy time-saving state (low-precision high-base state) and a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high-base state). When the time-saving game is over, the game state will be a low-probability low-base normal state with a low accuracy time reduction, and the game state will be apparently difficult to distinguish from the normal state apparently with a high accuracy time reduction. When the predetermined condition is satisfied after the high-probability low-based latent probability change state and the time-saving game ends, the game state suggestion effect that indicates whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability change state is performed. Has become. According to this configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the time-saving game is completed, the player can determine whether the current game state is low-probability (normal state) or high-probability (latency probable change state). it can. Thus, the player can start playing with great joy when there is a suggestion of high certainty (latency change state) in the game state suggesting effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105 and FIG. 106, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the time-saving game is completed. There is a configuration in which a countdown display is performed for each change in the special symbol from the end of the time reduction game until the change display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. According to this configuration, the player can easily understand how many times the special symbol change display is executed after the time-saving game is completed to perform the gaming state suggestion effect. In addition, the countdown display (particularly, the countdown display immediately before the game state suggestion effect is performed) can give the player a sense of excitement and a thrilling sense of whether or not there is a certain change. Oversight can be effectively suppressed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, a specific image that changes in accordance with the effect mode is displayed, and the game state suggestion effect is performed when the game state is the normal state and when the latent probability is changed. Thus, the display mode of the specific image is changed to indicate that the current game state is the normal state or the latent probability change state. According to this configuration, the player can very easily determine whether the current game state is the normal state or the latent change probability state only by recognizing that the display mode of the specific image has changed. In addition, since the specific image changes according to the effect mode, it is possible to perform a game state suggestion effect that matches (harmony) with the effect mode. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, during execution of the jackpot game, a plurality of selection images indicating the game state after the jackpot game are displayed, and a selection is made from the plurality of selection images. The selection image indicates the degree of expectation of the game state after the jackpot game. According to this configuration, the player can predict the gaming state after the jackpot game during the execution of the jackpot game. Also, when it is suggested that the gaming state after the jackpot game is accurate, the player can start the game with great joy. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
As shown in FIG. 108, the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment includes an effect button that can be operated by the player, and displays a plurality of characters that can be selected by the player during execution of the jackpot game. The effect of the operation of the effect button is different according to the character selected from the button effect, and after the end of the button effect, the game state after the big hit game is suggested. According to this configuration, the player can operate different effect buttons in accordance with the selected character. In addition, the player can select a character capable of operating the effect button that he / she is good at, and expect the game state after the jackpot game to be performed thereafter. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the game state suggestion effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 to 107, the specific image is displayed after the end of the working hours or after the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific image may be displayed continuously in all game states. In addition, the specific image automatically changes according to the effect mode. However, the effect mode may be selectable by a player, and the player may select a favorite specific image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the gaming state suggestion effect is such that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the special symbol variation display has reached the predetermined number of times since the end of the time-saving game. Although the present invention is performed at times, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined time elapses after the time-saving game ends, when a predetermined winning opening is won (a predetermined number of prizes) after the time-saving game ends, or when the time-saving game ends. After that, a predetermined effect (including reach) may be performed, or when a variable display of a symbol other than the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, after the time-saving game is completed, the countdown display is performed for each change of the special symbol until the change display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times. The game state suggestion effect is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the countdown display may be a countup display. Also, the countdown display may be displayed as a stereoscopic image (3D). In this case, the countdown display may be displayed so as to protrude from the display screen. By doing so, a powerful countdown display can be performed, and furthermore, appeal can be made to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105 to FIG. 107, the gaming state suggestion effect changes the color of the specific image to indicate whether or not the current gaming state is certain. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game state suggestion effect is to change the design of a specific image to a different design, or to change the specific image to a three-dimensional image (3D) so as to indicate whether or not the current game state is certain. You may. Alternatively, the color or size of the countdown display, that is, the display mode of the countdown display may indicate whether or not the current game state is certain. In the above-described embodiment, the specific image is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a. However, the display position of the specific image may be arbitrary. May move. Further, the high-accuracy suggestion based on the specific image may be continued until the next big hit, or may be continued until the number of times the special figure change reaches a predetermined number.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the effect mode is exemplified by a motif of “mountain” or “tree”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode may be one in which various characters are used as motifs. In this case, the specific image that changes according to the effect mode may be displayed as an image of the character.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, a plurality of selected images are displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the selected image selected from the plurality through the button effect is used to execute the game after the jackpot game. Although the state is suggested, in this case, a plurality of selected images may be sequentially lit and displayed, and the lit selected image may be selected at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63. Alternatively, a plurality of selected images may be rotated and displayed, and the selected image at the selected position may be selected at the timing when the player operates the effect button 63. This makes it possible for the player to select a desired image desired by the player through technical intervention. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, during the execution of the jackpot game, the expectation degree suggestion image displayed (selected) in the gaming state suggestion effect is the type of the internal jackpot (the jackpot is likely to change). Or not), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the expectation degree suggestion image is a button effect performed immediately before the gaming state suggestion effect, and indicates whether the player has operated the effect button 63 according to the operation instruction (the operation instruction of the operation button 63 operation of the player). Degree of achievement, hereinafter also referred to as “button operation achievement degree”). Alternatively, the expected degree suggestion image may be determined in consideration of the type of the internal jackpot and the degree of achievement of the button operation by the player in the button effect. In this way, the player can display the expected degree suggestion image with a higher degree of expectation by performing the technical intervention by himself / herself. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the player selects one of the selected characters CRA and CRB in the character selection effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character selection effect, a selection may be made from three or more characters. Further, when a character is selected in the character selection effect, a predetermined line may be displayed or uttered, and the jackpot expectation may be changed depending on the type of the displayed or uttered line.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the selected image display effect, the selected images SG1, SG2, SG3, and SG4 are displayed, but the number and display positions of the selected images are not particularly limited. It is not necessary and may be arbitrary. In addition, as shown in FIG. 108, in the button effect, five button images BOG are displayed, but the number of button images BOG is not particularly limited and may be arbitrary.

[Modification 10]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105 to FIG. 107, when the big hit game ends, a time-saving game is started. Is terminated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the number of time savings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 30 times, 50 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) of whether or not the number of time savings is increased by a predetermined number (for example, 20 times) may be performed. Good. Alternatively, when the number of time savings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) for determining whether or not to continue the number of time savings until the next big hit may be performed. Furthermore, when the number of time savings reaches a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), an effect (for example, a battle effect) may be performed as to whether or not the certainty change is suggested.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect E1-1]
Display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects,
Symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
A jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game when the symbol variably displayed by the symbol display means is a jackpot symbol;
A time-short game changing means for changing the game state after the jackpot game executed by the jackpot game executing means to a time-shorting game,
A gaming machine with
The time-saving game, the probability of the jackpot, there is a low probability time reduction of the normal first probability and a high probability time reduction of the second probability higher than the first probability,
When the time-saving game is completed, the gaming state becomes the low-probability low-base normal state in the low probability time-saving, and the game state in the high-precision time reduction hides a probable change that is apparently difficult to distinguish from the normal state. It becomes a high-probability low-based latent probability change state,
The display means can execute a first effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The first effect display, when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the end of the time saving game, performs a game state suggestion effect that indicates whether the current game state is a normal state or a latent probability change state,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect E1-2]
The satisfaction of the predetermined condition is when the symbol change display is performed a predetermined number of times by the symbol display means,
The display means can execute a second effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The second effect display performs a countdown display for each change in the symbol until the symbol change display reaches a predetermined number of times after the time reduction game ends,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1, wherein:
[Aspect E1-3]
The display means can execute a third effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The third effect display is an effect display for displaying a specific image that changes according to the effect mode,
The gaming state suggestion effect indicates whether the current gaming state is a normal state or a latent probability changing state by making the display mode of the specific image different depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability changing state. ,
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2.
[Aspect E1-4]
The display means can execute a fourth effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The fourth effect display is an effect display performed during the execution of the jackpot game by the jackpot game execution means, and displays a plurality of selected images indicating a game state after the jackpot game, and displays the plurality of selected images. The selected image selected from among suggests the expectation of the game state after the jackpot game,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect E1-5]
Equipped with a production button that can be operated by the player,
The display means can execute a fifth effect display as one effect display of the plurality of effect displays,
The fifth effect display is an effect display performed during execution of the jackpot game by the jackpot game execution means, and displays a plurality of characters that can be selected by the player, and selects a character selected from the plurality of characters. The operation of the effect button performs a different button effect according to, suggesting a game state after the jackpot game after the end of the button effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4, characterized in that:

  Hereinafter, the meter effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 112. This meter effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the meter effect is included, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. This is an effect to display an image.

[Meter Direction A]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect A. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Although the first movable role 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), illustration is omitted. The second movable role 15 is retracted at the retreat position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but in a case other than when it has advanced to the advanced position ahead of the display screen 7a (second mode). , Illustration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (A), in the meter effect A, on the display screen 7a, a decorative design varying effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. During this fluctuation effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are arranged vertically, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The meter image MT and the variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, where an event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative pattern displayed in the floating display becomes a jackpot pattern or a lost pattern It is a production that suggests. As an event in which the winning or losing is determined, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters duel as in the present embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses (the result of the event) in the duel can be notified of whether or not a big hit has occurred. Examples of the event for which the win or loss is determined include the success or failure of a specific mission (such as climbing a tree or stacking blocks), the success or failure of roulette, and the victory or defeat of playing cards or Janken. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only the effect representing the event itself, but also the first stage effect and the second stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA confront each other is displayed.

  In the battle effect, first, an enemy character determination effect for identifying an opponent of the ally character CRA is executed as a first stage effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), a still image TK of an enemy character as an opponent and a still image MK of an ally character are displayed side by side. The meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a continuation of the preceding stage effect. Here, a battle start suggestion image BKS indicating “Battle start !!!!” is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), as the continuation of the preceding stage effect, when the ally character CRA is displayed alone, a meter image moving effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA prepares to be in a posture before the duel, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). As described above, when the battle finally starts, that is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, so that the player feels a sense of tension. Can be given. Thereby, the interest can be improved. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at a different position between the time when the decorative pattern is changed and the time when the battle is performed. Moreover, it moves from a 1st position to a 2nd position at the time of a battle effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and surprising.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (F), a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the friendly character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB. Success or failure is indicated by the success or failure of the meter full filling. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 109 (G), a button image BTN indicating the shape of the effect button 63, an operation expiration image indicating the expiration date of the button operation, and A continuous hit suggestion image displayed as "hit repeatedly !!" is displayed. Thereafter, when the meter is fully charged, the meter image MT is switched to a full image MXG indicating “MAX !!!!!” as shown in FIG. 109 (H).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (I), a jackpot determination suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, the second movable role 15 moves downward (second mode) and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, the smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Meter Direction B]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the meter effect B. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image. The second movable role 15 is retracted at the retreat position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but in a case other than when it has advanced to the advanced position ahead of the display screen 7a (second mode). , Illustration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), in the meter effect B, a decorative design change effect (change display) is performed on the display screen 7a by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During this fluctuation effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are arranged vertically, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The meter image MT and the variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. Also at this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, where an event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative pattern displayed in the floating display becomes a jackpot pattern or a lost pattern It is a production that suggests. As an event in which the winning or losing is determined, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters duel as in the present embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses (the result of the event) in the duel can be notified of whether or not a big hit has occurred. Examples of the event for which the win or loss is determined include the success or failure of a specific mission (such as climbing a tree or stacking blocks), the success or failure of roulette, and the victory or defeat of playing cards or Janken. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only the effect representing the event itself, but also the first stage effect and the second stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA confront each other is displayed.

  In the battle effect, first, as a first stage effect, an advance movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed as shown in FIG. 110 (C). That is, each of the four transmissive members constituting the first movable auditorium 14 moves toward the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position, and the button image BTN and the operation suggestion image SSE indicating "press !!" are displayed. . At this time, an enemy character determination effect for specifying an opponent of the ally character CRA may also be executed. Specifically, four enemy character images may be displayed corresponding to four transparent members, respectively, and one enemy character image may be displayed on one transparent member. Thereby, when viewed from the player, each enemy character image appears to be displayed on four transparent members. The background colors of the four enemy characters may be sequentially changed by the roulette method, and the roulette may be stopped by the operation of the effect button 63 by the player, and one enemy character may be selected. After that, a retreat movement effect of the first movable role object 14 is executed. Specifically, the four movable members constituting the first movable role 14 move from the state in which they cover the display screen 7a to the retreat positions at the four corners of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in a direction away from each other.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a continuation of the preceding stage effect. Here, a battle start suggestion image BKS indicating “Battle start !!!!” is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), as a continuation of the preceding stage effect, when the ally character CRA is displayed alone, a meter image moving effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA prepares to be in a posture before the duel, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). As described above, when the battle finally starts, that is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, so that the player feels a sense of tension. Can be given. Thereby, the interest can be improved. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at a different position between the time when the decorative pattern is changed and the time when the battle is performed. Moreover, it moves from a 1st position to a 2nd position at the time of a battle effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and surprising.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the friendly character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB. Success or failure is indicated by the success or failure of the meter full filling. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 110 (G), a button image BTN indicating the shape of the effect button 63 and an operation expiration image TBI indicating the expiration date of the button operation are displayed. , A continuous hit suggestion image RND expressed as “repeated hit !!!!” is displayed. Thereafter, when the meter is fully charged, the meter image MT is switched to a full image MXG indicating “MAX !!!!!” as shown in FIG. 110 (H).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (I), a jackpot determination suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, an advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. Then, the second movable role 15 moves downward (second mode), and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, the smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform a complex effect using a plurality of smile images, and it is possible to improve the interest. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Meter Direction C]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing the meter effect C. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image. The second movable role 15 is retracted at the retreat position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but in a case other than when it has advanced to the advanced position ahead of the display screen 7a (second mode). , Illustration is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (A), in the meter effect C, a decorative design change effect (change display) is executed on the display screen 7a by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During this fluctuation effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are arranged vertically, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The meter image MT and the variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a and is displayed at the second position at the center of the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, where an event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative pattern displayed in the floating display becomes a jackpot pattern or a lost pattern It is a production that suggests. As an event in which the winning or losing is determined, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters duel as in the present embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, an ally character) wins or loses (the result of the event) in the duel can be notified of whether or not a big hit has occurred. Examples of the event for which the win or loss is determined include the success or failure of a specific mission (such as climbing a tree or stacking blocks), the success or failure of roulette, and the victory or defeat of playing cards or Janken. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only the effect representing the event itself, but also the first stage effect and the second stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as the battle effect, an effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA confront each other is displayed.

  In the battle effect, first, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), an advance appearance of the second movable role 15 is executed as a first stage effect. That is, the second movable role 15 moves downward and rotates in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the meter image MT. Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a continuation of the preceding stage effect. Here, a battle start suggestion image BKS indicating “Battle start !!!!” is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the second position at the center of the display screen 7a, and is partially overlapped with the start suggestion image BKS.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), when the ally character CRA is displayed alone as a continuation of the preceding stage effect, a meter image re-moving effect is performed. Specifically, when the ally character CRA prepares to be in a posture before the duel, the meter image MT moves leftward from the second position and stops at a predetermined position (third position). As described above, when the battle finally starts, that is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves leftward from the center of the display screen 7a, and the player is nervous. Can give a feeling. Thereby, the interest can be improved. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at a different position between the time when the decorative pattern is changed and the time when the battle is performed. Moreover, it moves from a 2nd position to a 3rd position at the time of a battle effect. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and surprising.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (F), a meter filling effect is executed in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Here, the meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors change), the friendly character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB. Success or failure is indicated by the success or failure of the meter full filling. During the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), a button image BTN indicating the shape of the effect button 63 and an operation expiration image TBI indicating the expiration date of the button operation are displayed. , A continuous hit suggestion image RND expressed as “repeated hit !!!!” is displayed. Thereafter, when the meter is full, the meter image MT is switched to a full image MXG indicating “MAX !!!!!” as shown in FIG. 111 (H).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (I), a jackpot determination suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, an advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. Then, the second movable role 15 moves downward (second mode), and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, the smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform a complex effect using a plurality of smile images, and it is possible to improve the interest. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Meter Direction D]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for describing the meter effect D. The meter effect D represents a subsequent effect when the battle is lost in the meter effects A to C in FIGS. 109 to 111. Similarly to the meter effects A to C in FIGS. 109 to 111, the light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but is not shown. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. The first movable role 14 is retracted at the retracted position, but is not shown. In the first movable role object 14, four transmissive members are respectively located at four corners of the display screen 7a. The second movable role 15 is retracted at the retract position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration is omitted.

  FIG. 112 (A) corresponds to FIGS. 109 (F), 110 (F), and 111 (F) in meter effects A to C in FIGS. 109 to 111. That is, a meter filling effect in which the meter is gradually filled during the battle between the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA is executed. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors are changed), the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB, so that the meter is full. Success or failure indicates success or failure. Here, the meter does not become full during the predetermined period, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), a defeat effect in which the ally character CRA loses to the enemy character CRB is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. At this time, the lost ally character CRA is also displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), the meter image MT is displayed again in a state where the decorative symbol is continuously displayed in a losing manner. At this time, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), the next variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the meter image MT is continuously displayed at the first position on the left side of the display screen 7a. When reach is formed in the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 112 (F), then, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), a decorative symbol disappearance effect in which the decorative symbol disappears from the display screen 7a is executed. At this time, a meter image movement effect is also performed. Specifically, when the decorative symbol disappears from the display screen 7a, the meter image MT moves rightward from the first position and stops at a predetermined position (second position). As described above, when the special reach effect is finally started, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, thereby giving a sense of tension to the player. Thereby, the interest can be improved. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at a different position between the time when the decorative symbol is varied and the time when the special reach is produced. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and surprising. The timing at which the meter image MT moves may be the same as the timing at which the decorative design disappears from the display screen 7a, or may be different. The meter image MT may move before the disappearance of the decorative symbol, or may move after the disappearance of the decorative symbol.

  As shown in the next FIG. 112 (H), a battle start suggestion effect is executed as a preceding stage effect of the battle effect. This battle start suggestion effect corresponds to FIGS. 109 (D), 110 (D), and FIG. 111 (D) in meter effects A to C in FIGS. However, the difference is that the meter image MT has already moved to the second position. Thereafter, the first stage effect of the battle effect shown in FIGS. 109 (E), 110 (E), and 111 (E), and the middle stage effect shown in FIGS. 109 (F), 110 (F), and 111 (F). Is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (I), the meter is full, and a victory effect in which the ally character CRA beats the enemy character CRB is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the meter effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 (A) and (B), after the first effect in which the meter image MT is displayed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative symbol, and after the first effect, FIG. As shown in 109 (D) to (G), a second effect in which a battle effect is executed can be executed in a state where the meter image is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 (D) to (G) and FIGS. 111 (A) to (B), the meter image MT is at least one of the first effect and the second effect. Are displayed at different positions from each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), in the first effect, the meter image MT is displayed at the first position on the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 109 (E). In the second effect, the meter image MT moves from the first position to the second position on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 (B) to (C), the meter image MT is continuously displayed during the transition from the first effect to the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, in the battle effect, an effect in which the meter image MT is switched to another image (for example, a full image MXG) is included. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the first movable role is provided, and at least a part of the meter image MT is displayed when shifting from the first effect to the second effect. The fourth effect covered by the transmissive portion of the first movable role 14 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the meter effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
The meter image MT shown in FIGS. 109 to 112 is an example, and the configuration of the meter image MT is not limited to the above. For example, the meter image MT may have a circular shape like a car meter, or may be an image in which numerals are digitally displayed. Further, a plurality of meter images MT may be displayed. For example, it may be configured to represent the remaining energy of each of the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA. Further, the meter image MT may be arranged at a position other than the above-described position, or may move in a direction other than the above-described direction.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the meter effects of FIGS. 109 to 112 may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the meter effect A of FIG. 109, at the time of the effect of FIGS. 109 (C) and 109 (I), an effect may be performed in which the first movable role 14 covers the display screen 7a as in FIG. 110 (C). .
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 109 to FIG. 112, it has been described that the battle effect includes not only the effect representing the event that determines a win or loss, but also the first stage effect and the second stage effect performed before and after the effect. However, the battle effect represents the event that determines a win or loss, and may be interpreted as not including the first stage effect and the second stage effect before and after the event.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a meter image used during a battle effect,
A first effect in which the meter image is displayed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative pattern,
And a second effect in which the battle effect is executed in a state where the meter image is displayed after the first effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E1-1,
The gaming machine, wherein the meter image is displayed at different positions in at least one of the first effect and the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
In the first effect, the meter image is displayed at a first position on the display means,
In the second effect, the meter image moves from the first position of the display means to a second position.
◇ [Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the meter image is continuously displayed during a transition from the first effect to the second effect.
◇ [Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-4,
In the battle effect, an effect in which the meter image is switched to another image is included.
◇ [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5, further comprises:
Equipped with movable characters,
A game machine capable of executing a fourth effect in which at least a part of the meter image is covered by the movable role when shifting from the first effect to the second effect.

  Hereinafter, the related image display effects A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 116. The related image display effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative design. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when an instruction to execute the related image display effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the display image. This is an effect of displaying an image on 7a.

[Related image display effect A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for describing the related image display effect A. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but is not shown. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Although the first movable role 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), illustration is omitted. The second movable role 15 is retracted at the retract position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration is omitted. Here, an effect in the game “OARO Rush” in a highly probable time-saving state started after the end of the jackpot game is described, assuming that the player is right-handed and is aiming for a special 2 prize.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (A), in the related image display effect A, after the big hit game is over, the display screen 7 a displays a high-accuracy time-saving game start suggestion image KJS indicating “OAROU rush start!” And a right-hand suggestion. The image MGU is displayed. Thereafter, a character selection screen shown in FIG. 113 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from among a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of a high-accuracy time-short game (OARO rush) starting from this. Here, a human face image is used as an example of a character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any target can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or fancy creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. Here, the plurality of character images each represent a different target (person). On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the currently selected character are displayed in an enlarged manner. The image includes an enlarged image KUD, a selection promotion image SES indicating "select a character !!", and a right-turn suggestion image MGU.

  In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) that are selectable character candidates are arranged in a horizontal line. Then, of the plurality of character images, the currently selected (selected) character image is displayed larger than the other character images. In addition, a character image farther from the character image being selected is displayed such that its size becomes smaller. In other words, the character images on both sides of the selected character image are displayed so as to be the second largest, and the character images adjacent to the character image outside the selected character image are the third largest. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 113 (B) to 113 (D) show a state where the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. .

  The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the currently selected (selected) character image is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIG. 113 (B) to FIG. 113 (D) show that the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the selected character. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered with the button image BTN. In other words, the button image BTN is displayed overlapping the selection promotion image SES.

  When one character is selected from among a plurality of characters (employment decision) by operating the effect button 63, an adoption decision screen shown in FIG. 113 (E) is displayed. The adoption decision screen displays a decision notification image KHG that informs that the selection of one character has been completed, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected character is enlarged and displayed, and a background image HKG in which the selected character is displayed. Is done. On the recruitment decision screen, a selection promotion image SES indicating "Please select a character!" And a right-turn suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The decision notification image KHG represents the character of "decision" and covers the selection promotion image SES in which "select a character!" This allows the player to easily and visually determine that the selection of the character has been completed. After the character is selected, the enlarged image KUD covers the selection promotion image SES in which "Select a character!" Is displayed, so that it can be visually and easily determined that the character has been selected. Further, since the selected character is displayed by being superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give a visually complicated impression, and to enhance the interest. Further, since the name of the selected character (here, “sunglasses man”) is displayed after selection, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement that the character has been selected.

  After the selection of the character, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), on the display screen 7a, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During the fluctuation effect, a background image HKG of the selected character and an icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern during the variable display is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates what the selected character is to the player. The meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are arranged vertically, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, where an event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative pattern displayed in the floating display becomes a jackpot pattern or a lost pattern It is a production that suggests. As an event in which the winning or losing is determined, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters confront each other as in the present embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses (the result of the event) in the confrontation can be notified of whether or not a big hit has occurred. Examples of the event for which the win or loss is determined include the success or failure of a specific mission (such as climbing a tree or stacking blocks), the success or failure of roulette, and the victory or defeat of playing cards or Janken. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only the effect representing the event itself, but also the first stage effect and the second stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, an effect in which the selected character confronts another character is displayed as a battle effect.

  In the battle effect, first, an opponent determination effect for specifying an opponent of the selected character is executed as a first stage effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), a still image MK of the selected character and a still image TK of the opponent character are displayed side by side. Thereafter, a battle start suggestion image BKS indicating “Battle start !!!!” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves rightward. That is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, thereby giving a sense of tension to the player. Thereby, the interest can be improved. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at a different position between the time when the decorative symbol is varied and the time when the special reach is produced. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and surprising. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors are changed), the selected character wins the opponent. Success or failure indicates success or failure.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (I), when the meter is full, an effect in which the selected character wins is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Related image display effect B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for describing the related image display effect B.
A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but is not shown. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Although the first movable role 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), illustration is omitted. The second movable role 15 is retracted at the retract position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration is omitted. Here, an effect in the game “Alphabet Rush” in a highly probable time-saving state that is started after the end of the jackpot game is described, assuming that the player has made a right-handed shot and is aiming for a special 2 prize.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (A), in the related image display effect B, a high-precision time-short game start suggestion image KJS indicating “Alphabet rush start!” The image MGU is displayed. Thereafter, a character selection screen shown in FIG. 114 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from among a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of a high-accuracy time-short game (alphabet rush) starting from this screen. Here, an uppercase alphabet is used as an example of the character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any target can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or fancy creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images (alphabet images) are arranged, a button image BTN representing an effect button 63, a select image SEL representing a select button 68, a currently selected and selected character An enlarged image KUD in which (alphabet) is displayed in an enlarged manner, a selection promotion image SES in which “Please select an alphabet!”, And a right-handed suggestion image MGU are included.

  In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four alphabet images) which are candidates for selectable characters (alphabets) are arranged in a horizontal line. Then, an arrow is displayed above the currently selected (selected) character image among the plurality of character images. The arrow moves according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player, and the character image to be selected is switched. In FIG. 114 (B) to FIG. 114 (D), when the “right” button of the select button 68 is pressed twice, the character image (alphabet) selected by the arrow is sequentially switched to the right image. It is shown.

  The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the currently selected (selected) character image (alphabet) is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The alphabet represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 114 (B) to 114 (D) show a state in which the alphabet represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the selected alphabet. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered with the button image BTN.

  When one character (alphabet) is selected (adopted) from a plurality of characters (alphabets) by operating the effect button 63, an adoption decision screen shown in FIG. 114 (E) is displayed. The adoption decision screen displays a decision notification image KHG notifying that one alphabet has been selected, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected alphabet is enlarged and a background image HKG in which the selected alphabet is displayed. You. On the recruitment decision screen, a selection promotion image SES indicating “Please select an alphabet!” And a right-handed suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The decision notification image KHG represents the character of "decision" and covers the selection promotion image SES in which "Please select an alphabet!" This allows the player to easily and visually determine that the selection of the character (alphabet) has been completed. Since the enlarged image KUD covers the selection promotion image SES in which “select the alphabet!” Is selected after the alphabet is selected, it can be visually and easily determined that the character (alphabet) has been selected. Further, since the selected character (alphabet) is superimposed and displayed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give a visually complicated impression, and to enhance the interest.

  After the selection of the character, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), on the display screen 7a, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During the fluctuation effect, a background image HKG of the selected character (alphabet) and an icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern during the variable display is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates what the selected character is to the player. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the variable display become visible through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time, the background image HKG and the icon image ICN are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, where an event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative pattern displayed in the floating display becomes a jackpot pattern or a lost pattern It is a production that suggests. As an event in which the win or loss is determined, a roulette effect in which one character is selected from a plurality of characters (alphabets) as in the present embodiment is raised. In this case, whether or not a particular alphabet (for example, the selected alphabet) is selected by roulette (the result of the event) can be notified of whether or not a jackpot has been achieved. Other examples of the event for which the win or loss is determined include the success or failure of a fight or a competition, the success or failure of a specific mission (such as climbing a tree or stacking blocks), or the success or failure of a playing card or Janken. Here, the battle effect includes not only the effect representing the event (roulette) itself, but also the first stage effect and the second stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), a roulette effect for selecting one from a plurality of selected alphabets is displayed as the battle effect.

  In the battle effect shown in FIG. 114 (H), first, as a first stage effect, a battle start suggestion image BKS indicating “roulette start!” Is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, and a roulette image RG is displayed. You. The roulette represented by the roulette image RG starts rotating after being displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (I), an effect is performed in which a roulette being opened is stuck with an arrow. Whether or not this arrow stabs the selected character (alphabet) indicates whether or not it is a big hit. When an arrow stabs the selected character (alphabet) as shown in FIG. 114 (H), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner as shown in FIG. 114 (J).

[Related image display effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for describing the related image display effect C. A light guide plate 17 is arranged in front of the display screen 7a, but is not shown. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Although the first movable role 14 is retracted at the retracted position (first mode), illustration is omitted. The second movable role 15 is retracted at the retract position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but illustration is omitted. Here, an effect in the game “OARO Rush” in a highly probable time-saving state started after the end of the jackpot game is described, assuming that the player is right-handed and is aiming for a special 2 prize.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (A), in the related image display effect A, a high-accuracy time-saving game start suggestion image KJS in which “OARRO rush starts!” The image MGU is displayed. Thereafter, a character selection screen shown in FIG. 115 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from among a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of a high-accuracy time-short game (OARO rush) starting from this. Here, a human face image is used as an example of a character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any target can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or fancy creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the currently selected character are displayed in an enlarged manner. The image includes an enlarged image KUD, a selection promotion image SES indicating "select a character !!", and a right-turn suggestion image MGU.

  In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) that are selectable character candidates are arranged in a horizontal line. Then, of the plurality of character images, the currently selected (selected) character image is displayed larger than the other character images. In addition, a character image farther from the character image being selected is displayed such that its size becomes smaller. In other words, the character images on both sides of the selected character image are displayed so as to be the second largest, and the character images adjacent to the character image outside the selected character image are the third largest. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 115 (B) to 115 (D) show that the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. .

  The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the currently selected (selected) character image is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 115B to 115D show that the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the selected character. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered with the button image BTN.

  By operating the effect button 63 and selecting (deciding to adopt) one character from among the plurality of characters, the adoption decision screen shown in FIG. The adoption determination screen includes a determination notification image KHG that notifies that one character has been selected, an enlarged image KUD in which the selected character is displayed in an enlarged manner, and a background image HKG in which an image related to the selected character is displayed. Is displayed. Here, a part (sunglasses) of the selected character is represented in the background image HKG. The background image HKG need not be a part or all of the selected character itself as long as it is related to the selected character. On the recruitment decision screen, a selection promotion image SES indicating "Please select a character!" And a right-turn suggestion image MGU are continuously displayed. The decision notification image KHG represents the character of "decision" and covers the selection promotion image SES in which "select a character!" This allows the player to easily and visually determine that the selection of the character has been completed. After the character is selected, the enlarged image KUD covers the selection promotion image SES in which "Select a character!" Is displayed, so that it can be visually and easily determined that the character has been selected. Further, since the selected character is displayed by being superimposed on the enlarged image KUD and the background image HKG, it is possible to give a visually complicated impression, and to enhance the interest. Further, since the name of the selected character (here, “sunglasses man”) is displayed after selection, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement that the character has been selected.

  After the selection of the character, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), on the display screen 7a, a decorative design variation effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. During the fluctuation effect, a background image HKG of the selected character and an icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the thing related to the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern during the variable display is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates what the selected character is to the player. Here, the name of the selected character is shown. The meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are arranged vertically, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, where an event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative pattern displayed in the floating display becomes a jackpot pattern or a lost pattern It is a production that suggests. As an event in which the winning or losing is determined, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters confront each other as in the present embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses (the result of the event) in the confrontation can be notified of whether or not a big hit has occurred. Examples of the event for which the win or loss is determined include the success or failure of a specific mission (such as climbing a tree or stacking blocks), the success or failure of roulette, and the victory or defeat of playing cards or Janken. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only the effect representing the event itself, but also the first stage effect and the second stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, an effect in which the selected character confronts another character is displayed as a battle effect.

  In the battle effect, first, an opponent determination effect for specifying an opponent of the selected character is executed as a first stage effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), a still image MK of the selected character and a still image TK of the opponent character are displayed side by side. Thereafter, a battle start suggestion image BKS indicating “Battle start!” Is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves rightward. That is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, thereby giving a sense of tension to the player. Thereby, the interest can be improved. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at a different position between the time when the decorative symbol is varied and the time when the special reach is produced. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and surprising. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors are changed), the selected character wins the opponent. Success or failure indicates success or failure.

  As shown in FIG. 115 (I), when the meter is not full, an effect of losing the selected character is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 115 (J), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

[Related image display effect D]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for describing the related image display effect D. Although the light guide plate 17 is disposed in front of the display screen 7a, the light guide plate 17 is not shown except when a state in which the smile image SL is displayed on the light guide plate 17 is described. The light guide plate 17 covers the entire display screen 7a, and the display screen 7a is visible through the light guide plate 17. Further, the first movable role object 14 is retracted at the retract position (first mode). That is, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role object 14 are respectively located at the four corners of the display screen 7a. The four transmissive members are movable light guide plates, each having an image display area that can be switched between a state in which an image described later can be visually recognized and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image. The second movable role 15 is retracted at the retreat position above the display screen 7a (first mode), but in a case other than when it has advanced to the advanced position ahead of the display screen 7a (second mode). , Illustration is omitted. Here, an effect in the game “OARO Rush” in a highly probable time-saving state started after the end of the jackpot game is described, assuming that the player is right-handed and is aiming for a special 2 prize.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (A), in the related image display effect D, a high-precision time-short game start suggestion image KJS indicating “OARO rush start! The image MGU is displayed. Thereafter, a character selection screen shown in FIG. 116 (B) is displayed. The character selection screen is a screen for the player to select one character from among a plurality of characters, and an effect related to the selected character is executed at the time of a high-accuracy time-short game (OARO rush) starting from this. Here, a human face image is used as an example of a character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any target can be adopted as the character. For example, a character can be a real or fancy creature or thing, as well as characters, figures, symbols, landscapes, and the like. On the character selection screen, a list image ICH in which a plurality of character images are arranged, a button image BTN representing the effect button 63, a select image SEL representing the select button 68, and the currently selected character are displayed in an enlarged manner. The image includes an enlarged image KUD, a selection promotion image SES indicating "select a character !!", and a right-turn suggestion image MGU.

  In the list image ICH, a plurality of character images (here, four character images) that are selectable character candidates are arranged in a horizontal line. Then, of the plurality of character images, the currently selected (selected) character image is displayed so as to be located above the other character images. The character image being selected is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 116 (B) and 116 (C) show a state where the character image being selected is sequentially switched to the right image by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. .

  The enlarged image KUD is an image in which the currently selected (selected) character image is enlarged and displayed in the list image ICH. The character represented by the enlarged image KUD is switched according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. FIGS. 116 (B) and 116 (C) show that the character represented by the enlarged image KUD is sequentially switched by pressing the “right” button of the select button 68 twice. In the select image SEL representing the select button 68, the color of the image corresponding to the operated button changes according to the operation of the select button 68 by the player. The color of the button image BTN changes according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The effect button 63 is operated when deciding to adopt the selected character. The selection promotion image SES is displayed below the display screen 7a, and a part thereof is covered with the button image BTN.

  When one character is selected (decided to be adopted) from a plurality of characters by operating the effect button 63, after the character is selected, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. The decorative symbol change effect (variable display) is executed by the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. During the fluctuation effect, a background image HKG of the selected character and an icon image ICN representing the selected character are displayed on the display screen 7a. The background image HKG is an animation image that changes as if the character is moving, and a part of the decorative pattern during the variable display is displayed overlapping the background image HKG. The icon image ICN representing the selected character is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and indicates what the selected character is to the player. The meter image MT is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The meter image MT has a configuration in which a plurality of scales (here, nine) are arranged vertically, and is used at the time of a battle effect described later. The background image HKG, the icon image ICN, the meter image MT, and the variable display can be visually recognized through the light guide plate 17.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), reach is formed in the decorative pattern. At this time, the background image HKG, the icon image ICN, and the meter image MT are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. After the reach is formed in the decorative symbol, the display of the decorative symbol disappears and the battle effect is started. Battle production is one of the special reach productions, where an event that determines the win or loss is carried out, and by notifying the result of that event, whether the decorative pattern displayed in the floating display becomes a jackpot pattern or a lost pattern It is a production that suggests. As an event in which the winning or losing is determined, there is an effect in which a plurality of characters confront each other as in the present embodiment. In this case, whether or not a specific character (for example, a selected character) wins or loses (the result of the event) in the confrontation can be notified of whether or not a big hit has occurred. Examples of the event for which the win or loss is determined include the success or failure of a specific mission (such as climbing a tree or stacking blocks), the success or failure of roulette, and the victory or defeat of playing cards or Janken. Here, it is assumed that the battle effect includes not only the effect representing the event itself, but also the first stage effect and the second stage effect performed before and after the effect. Here, an effect in which the selected character confronts another character is displayed as a battle effect.

  In the battle effect, first, an opponent determination effect for specifying an opponent of the selected character is executed as a first stage effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), a still image MK of the selected character and a still image TK of the opponent character are displayed side by side. Thereafter, a battle start suggestion image BKS indicating “Battle start!” Is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the meter image MT on the left side of the display screen 7a moves rightward. That is, when the meter image MT is finally needed, the meter image MT moves from the left side of the display screen 7a toward the center, thereby giving a sense of tension to the player. Thereby, the interest can be improved. As described above, the meter image MT is displayed at a different position between the time when the decorative symbol is varied and the time when the special reach is produced. Conventionally, since the position of the meter image does not change, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make the player feel unexpected and surprising. The meter image MT has a plurality of scales (here, nine), and when all are filled (when all nine colors are changed), the selected character wins the opponent. Success or failure indicates success or failure. During the battle between the selected character and the opponent, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), a button image BTN indicating the shape of the effect button 63, an operation expiration image TBI indicating the expiration date of the button operation, and “ A continuous hit suggestion image RND is displayed. Thereafter, when the meter is full, as shown in FIG. 116 (H), the meter image MT is switched to a full tank image MXG representing “MAX !!!!!”.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (I), a jackpot determination suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, first, an advance movement effect of the first movable accessory 14 is executed. Specifically, the four transmissive members that form the first movable role 14 move toward the center of the display screen 7a. That is, the four transmissive members move in directions approaching each other. Then, the second movable role 15 moves downward (second mode), and rotates at that position. On the light guide plate 17, the smile images SL are randomly displayed at a plurality of positions on the light guide plate 17. As a result, it is possible to perform a complex effect using a plurality of smile images, and it is possible to improve the interest. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (J), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the related image display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 (B) to (D), a first effect in which a plurality of character images representing different objects are displayed, and after the first effect, a plurality of characters are displayed. When one character image is selected from among the character images, the second effect in which a background image HKG and an icon image ICN related to the selected character image are displayed as shown in FIG. Can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), in the second effect, the background image HKG and the icon image ICN, which are respectively related to the selected character image and have different contents, are displayed. Is done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), one of the images related to the selected character image is the icon image ICN. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), one of the images related to the selected character image is a background image HKG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 (B) to (D), in the first effect, the selection effect image SES which prompts the user to select one character image from a plurality of character images is overlapped. Button image BTN is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 63 changes the selected character image among the plurality of character images to be larger than the others. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, when one character image is selected from a plurality of character images by operating the effect button 63, the selection is completed by overlapping the selection promotion image SES. The decision notification image KHG indicating that the information is displayed is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually enjoyed, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the related image display effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
A plurality of character images shown in FIGS. 113 to 116, each showing a different face and a different alphabet, are shown. As described above, the phrase “each of the plurality of character images represents a different target” is not limited to representing a different type such as a face, a car, and a character, but may be of the same type. The same kind of thing is, for example, the same kind of human face, but if it is another person's face, it will be a different target, and even if it is the same person's face, it will have different facial expressions and different If it is an angle, it corresponds to a different object.

[Modification 2]
The contents of the related image display effects in FIGS. 113 to 116 may be appropriately combined, or a part of the contents may not be provided.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a target image representing a predetermined target,
A first effect in which a plurality of target images each representing a different target are displayed,
After the first effect, if one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images, a second effect in which a related image related to the selected target image is displayed can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by:
◇ [Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E2-1,
In the second effect, a plurality of the related images each having a different content from each other and being related to the selected target image are displayed.
◇ [Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E2-2,
A gaming machine, wherein one of the plurality of related images is an icon image related to the selected target image.
◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E2-2 or Aspect E2-3,
A gaming machine, wherein one of the plurality of related images is a background image related to the selected target image.
◇ [Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4, further comprises:
It has operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit,
In the first effect, the operation means image is displayed so as to overlap a selection promotion image that prompts the user to select one target image from the plurality of predetermined images,
A gaming machine wherein a selected target image among the plurality of target images is changed by an operation of the operation means.
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to Aspect E2-5,
When one target image is selected from the plurality of predetermined images by the operation of the operation unit,
A gaming machine, wherein a selection completion image indicating that the selection is completed is displayed overlapping the selection promotion image.

  Hereinafter, the battle effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 120. This battle effect can be executed while the special symbols are changing. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads and displays the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the battle effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a. This battle effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one change effect). Note that the battle effect may be performed during a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol (a plurality of fluctuation effects).

[Battle production A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A.
In battle effect A, first, a battle start suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 117 (A). In the battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), a first character selection effect is executed. The first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. An ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and an enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), a second character selection effect is executed. The second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moving from the first character selection effect. In the first area AR1, the friendly character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect described later (FIG. 117 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 117 (F)) is executed.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 117 (D). This ally character determination effect is an effect in which the character performing the first strike is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes a first strike against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, the appearance that the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), a battle victory effect is executed. In the battle victory effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA has transformed and has won the enemy character CRB is performed. Thereafter, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a jackpot notification effect indicating that a jackpot is achieved is executed.

  On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, an enemy character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character performing the first strike is determined as the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes a first strike against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the case of a first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

  After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 117 (E)) or the later-described battle defeat effect may be executed.

  After the enemy character determination effect, a battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 117 (G). In the battle defeat effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA has lost to the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, a missing symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a missing notification effect indicating that it is a missing is executed.

[Battle production B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B.
In the battle effect B, first, a battle start suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 118 (A). In the battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), a first character selection effect is executed. The first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. An ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and an enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. A button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed in front of the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (C), a second character selection effect is executed. The second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moving from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves with the movement of the boundary line KL. In the first area AR1, the friendly character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect described later (FIG. 118 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 118 (F)) is executed.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 118 (D). This ally character determination effect is an effect in which the character performing the first strike is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes a first strike against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, the appearance that the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), a battle victory effect is executed. In the battle victory effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA has transformed and has won the enemy character CRB is performed. Thereafter, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a jackpot notification effect indicating that a jackpot is achieved is executed.

  On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, an enemy character determination effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 118 (F). This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character performing the first strike is determined as the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes a first strike against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the case of a first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

  After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 118 (E)) or the later-described battle defeat effect may be executed.

  After the enemy character determination effect, a battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 118 (G). In the battle defeat effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA has lost to the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, a missing symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a missing notification effect indicating that it is a missing is executed.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C.
In battle effect C, first, a battle start suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 119 (A). In the battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), a first character selection effect is executed. The first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. An ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and an enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. In the first character selection effect, a button image BTN is displayed. This button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL, and more specifically, is displayed in front of the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), a second character selection effect is executed. The second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moving from the first character selection effect. In the second character selection effect, the button image BTN is continuously displayed. In this case, in this case, the button image BTN is at the same position as in the first character selection effect, and the button image BTN has not moved. The boundary line KL moves within a certain range of the button image BTN. The present invention is not limited to this, and the boundary line KL may move out of a certain range of the button image BTN. Further, in the first area AR1, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect described later (FIG. 119 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 119 (F)) is executed.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. 119 (D). This ally character determination effect is an effect in which the character performing the first strike is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes a first strike against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, the appearance that the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), a battle victory effect is executed. In the battle victory effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA has transformed and has won the enemy character CRB is performed. Thereafter, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a jackpot notification effect indicating that a jackpot is achieved is executed.

  On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, an enemy character determination effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 119 (F). This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character performing the first strike is determined as the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes a first strike against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the case of a first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

  After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 119 (E)) or the later-described battle defeat effect may be executed.

  After the enemy character determination effect, a battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 119 (G). In the battle defeat effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA has lost to the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, a missing symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a missing notification effect indicating that it is a missing is executed.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 120 is a view for explaining the battle effect D.
In the battle effect D, first, a battle start suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. In the battle start suggestion effect, a battle start suggestion display XF1 indicating the start of the battle effect is displayed. In the battle start suggestion effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is omitted, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a. This battle start suggestion effect is executed when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), a first character selection effect is executed. The first character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and a first area AR1 and a second area AR2 separated by a boundary line KL are formed on the display screen 7a. An ally character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1, and an enemy character CRB is displayed in the second area AR2. A button image BTN is displayed on the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is displayed in front of the boundary line KL. The button image BTN is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. In the first character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is smaller than that of the second area AR2.

  In the first character selection effect, a meter image XF2 is displayed. The meter image XF2 is displayed on the left end of the display screen 7a and represents a meter value. The meter values of the meter image XF2 are indicated by cross hatches in the figure. The meter value of the meter image XF2 indicates the degree of expectation of a jackpot, and the meter value may increase as the area of the first region AR1 increases.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), a second character selection effect is executed. The second character selection effect is an effect for selecting a character, and the boundary line KL is moving from the first character selection effect. The button image BTN is continuously displayed on the boundary line KL. In this case, the button image BTN moves with the movement of the boundary line KL. In the first area AR1, the friendly character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed. In the second character selection effect, the display area of the first area AR1 is larger than that of the second area AR2 due to the movement of the boundary line KL.

  Further, in the second character selection effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 increases as the area of the first area AR1 increases.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect described later (FIG. 120 (D)) or an enemy character determination effect (FIG. 120 (F)) is executed.

  After the second character selection effect, an ally character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. This ally character determination effect is an effect in which the character performing the first strike is determined to be the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA makes a first strike against the enemy character CRB. In the ally character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the second area AR2 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all areas become the first area AR1. In the first area AR1, the ally character CRA is continuously displayed, and in the case of the first strike, the appearance that the ally character CRA attacks the enemy character CRB is shown.

  In addition, in the ally character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, which indicates that the jackpot probability rapidly rises, that is, the jackpot is confirmed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (E), a battle victory effect is executed. In the battle victory effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA has transformed and has won the enemy character CRB is performed. Thereafter, a jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a jackpot notification effect indicating that a jackpot is achieved is executed.

  On the other hand, after the second character selection effect, an enemy character determination effect can be executed as shown in FIG. This enemy character determination effect is an effect in which the character performing the first strike is determined as the enemy character, and the enemy character CRB makes a first strike against the ally character CRA. In the enemy character determination effect, the boundary line KL and the first area AR1 disappear on the display screen 7a, and all areas become the second area AR2. In the second area AR2, the enemy character CRB is continuously displayed, and in the case of a first strike, it is shown that the enemy character CRB attacks the ally character CRA.

  In the enemy character determination effect, the meter value of the meter image XF2 changes depending on the superiority of the battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB. Does not rise.

  After the enemy character determination effect, the above-described battle victory effect (FIG. 120 (E)) or the later-described battle defeat effect may be executed.

  After the enemy character determination effect, a battle defeat effect is executed as shown in FIG. 120 (G). In the battle defeat effect, an effect indicating that the ally character CRA has lost to the enemy character CRB is performed. After that, a missing symbol array is displayed using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a missing notification effect indicating that it is a missing is executed.

  In the battle effect D, if the area of the first area AR1 increases, the meter value of the meter image XF2 increases accordingly. If the area of the first area AR1 decreases, the meter image XF2 increases. May be decreased. That is, the meter value of the meter image XF2 may correspond to the enlargement or reduction of the area of the first region AR1.

In the battle effects A to D, another effect (such as another battle effect) may be incorporated into one effect.
In the battle effects A to D, the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect may be repeated.
In the battle effects A to D, the jackpot expectation degree changes according to the size of the area of the first region AR1 and the second region AR2. That is, in the character determination effect, when the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the area of the second area AR2, a big hit is obtained as compared with the case where the area of the first area AR1 is smaller than the area of the second area AR2. It has a high expectation. That is, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested based on the area of the first region AR1 (second region AR2).
Furthermore, in the battle effects A to D, the first area AR1 may be easily expanded or difficult to expand depending on the type of the character appearing in the first area AR1 or the second area AR2. The jackpot expectation may be changed depending on the type of character appearing in the area AR1 or the second area AR2.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the battle effect.
[Effect 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect, the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 are displayed, and then the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 are displayed. An effect of changing the area of the region AR2 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect with a motion by changing the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

[Effect 2]
In the above-described battle effects A to D, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested based on the area of the first region AR1 (second region AR2). According to this configuration, the jackpot expectation degree changes due to the change in the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the above-described battle effects A to D, the character CRA is displayed in the first area AR1. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute a moving effect by changing the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and to execute a moving effect also by the movement of the character, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be.

[Effect 4]
In the above battle effect D, the meter image XF2 is displayed in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect in an effect of changing the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2). According to this configuration, it is possible to execute a moving effect by changing the first area AR1 and the second area AR2, and to execute a moving effect also by the meter value of the meter image XF2. Can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the above battle effect D, in the first character selection effect and the second character selection effect, the size of the area of the first area AR1 (second area AR2) is reflected in the meter value of the meter image XF2. ing. According to this configuration, the jackpot expectation degree changes depending on the meter value of the meter image XF2 in addition to the size of the first area AR1, so that the player can be provided with an exciting feeling and the interest of the game can be improved. .

[Effect 6]
In the above battle effect D, in the character determination effect, if the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the area of the second area AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX, and the area of the first area AR1 becomes the first area AR1. When the area is smaller than the area of the two regions AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 is smaller than MAX. According to this configuration, if the area of the first area AR1 is larger than the second area AR2, the meter value of the meter image XF2 becomes MAX and the jackpot expectation increases, so that the first area AR1 is provided to the player. It is possible to give attention to the movement, give the player a lot of excitement, and improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the battle effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the battle effects A to D of the gaming machine of the embodiment, after the second character selection effect, the area of the first area AR1 and the second area AR2 further increases or decreases, and the first area AR1 And the size of the second area AR2 may fluctuate. Furthermore, after that, an effect of making the area of the first area AR1 and the area of the second area AR2 approximately the same may be performed to perform the character determination effect.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first display area and a second display area different from the first display area,
The second display effect is an effect that changes the area of each of the first display area and the second display area,
A combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then, the second display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XF-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
In the combination effect, a jackpot expectation degree is suggested based on an area of the first display region in the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XF-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
The first display area displays a character,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XF-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-3,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of performing meter display,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is being performed, the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XF-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the size of the area of the first display region in the second display effect is reflected in the meter value of the meter display.

[Aspect XF-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-5,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, when the area of the first display area of the second display effect is larger than the area of the second display area, the meter value of the meter display Is the first value, and when the area of the first display area of the second display effect is smaller than the area of the second display area, the meter value of the meter display is changed to the first value. A second value smaller than
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  The cracking effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This cracking effect can be executed, for example, during the change of the special symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and reads out and displays the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 when the instruction to execute the crack effect is included. This is an effect of displaying an image on the screen 7a. This cracking effect is performed during one change of the special symbol (one change effect). Note that the cracking effect may be performed during a plurality of changes (a plurality of changing effects) of the special symbol.

[Split production A]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for describing the cracking effect A.
In the cracking effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the lower left of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display number suggestion effect, a rush suggestion display XG1, an acquired ball display XG2, a right strike suggestion display XG3, and hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a probable change state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, a display indicating that it is during a rush (during a continuous chan). The acquired payout display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player during the rush (during the consecutive chan). The right strike suggestion display XG3 is a display requesting (recommending) the player to make a right strike. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, and the right strike suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), a screen break effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW indicating that the screen of the display screen 7a is broken is displayed. Part of the screen break display GW has reached the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the reserve icons 9B, 9C. Accordingly, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the portion to which the screen break display GW has reached is displayed as broken (as if it were missing). (Displayed missing). On the other hand, the right strike suggestion display XG3 is displayed in front of the screen break display GW, and does not appear to be broken (there is no missing portion).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the other display (hereinafter also referred to as non-screen split display). In the example of FIG. 121 (C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character image XG5 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 121 (D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents a character “intense Atsu” indicating that the jackpot expectation is high.
After the boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-described battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

[Split production B]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for describing the cracking effect B.
In the cracking effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the lower left of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display number suggestion effect, a rush suggestion display XG1, an acquired ball display XG2, a right strike suggestion display XG3, and hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a probable change state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, a display indicating that it is during a rush (during a continuous chan). The acquired payout display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player during the rush (during the consecutive chan). The right strike suggestion display XG3 is a display requesting (recommending) the player to make a right strike. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, and the right strike suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), a screen break effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW indicating that the screen of the display screen 7a is broken is displayed. Part of the screen break display GW has reached the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the reserve icons 9B, 9C. Accordingly, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the portion to which the screen break display GW has reached is displayed as broken (as if it were missing). . On the other hand, the right strike suggestion display XG3 is displayed in front of the screen break display GW, and does not appear to be broken (there is no missing portion).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the other display (hereinafter also referred to as non-screen split display). In the example of FIG. 122 (C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character image XG5 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 122 (D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents a character “intense Atsu” indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), an effect of appearance of a missing part character is executed. In this missing part character appearance effect, the character XG6 is displayed in the screen break display GW.
Further, in the missing part character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move at the boundary between the screen break display GW and the non-screen break display.
After the boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-described battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

[Split production C]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for describing the cracking effect C.
In the cracking effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the lower left of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display number suggestion effect, a rush suggestion display XG1, an acquired ball display XG2, a right strike suggestion display XG3, and hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a probable change state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, a display indicating that it is during a rush (during a continuous chan). The acquired payout display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player during the rush (during the consecutive chan). The right strike suggestion display XG3 is a display requesting (recommending) the player to make a right strike. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, and the right strike suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), a screen break effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW indicating that the screen of the display screen 7a is broken is displayed. Part of the screen break display GW has reached the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the reserve icons 9B, 9C. Accordingly, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the portion to which the screen break display GW has reached is displayed as broken (as if it were missing). . On the other hand, the right strike suggestion display XG3 is displayed in front of the screen break display GW, and does not appear to be broken (there is no missing portion).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the other display (hereinafter also referred to as non-screen split display). In the example of FIG. 123 (C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (D), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character image XG5 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 123 (D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents a character “intense Atsu” indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), a missing part character appearance effect is executed. In this missing part character appearance effect, the character image XG7 is displayed in the screen break display GW. In the character image XG7, the character ""!? "Is displayed, which suggests that it may be a big hit.
In the missing part character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display.
After the boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-described battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

[Crack production D]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for describing the cracking effect D.
In the cracking effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner near the lower left of the display screen 7a. In addition, in this timer display number suggestion effect, a rush suggestion display XG1, an acquired ball display XG2, a right strike suggestion display XG3, and hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed. The rush suggestion display XG1 is a probable change state that is advantageous to the player, in other words, a display indicating that it is during a rush (during a continuous chan). The acquired payout display XG2 is a display indicating the number of game balls acquired by the player during the rush (during the consecutive chan). The right strike suggestion display XG3 is a display requesting (recommending) the player to make a right strike. The rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, and the right strike suggestion display XG3 are displayed above the display screen 7a. The hold icons 9B and 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), a screen break effect is executed. In this screen cracking effect, a screen cracking display GW indicating that the screen of the display screen 7a is broken is displayed. Part of the screen break display GW has reached the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the suggestion display XG3, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the reserve icons 9B, 9C. Accordingly, in the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired payout display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the hold icons 9B, 9C, the portion to which the screen break display GW has reached is displayed as broken (as if it were missing). . On the other hand, the right strike suggestion display XG3 is displayed in front of the screen break display GW, and does not appear to be broken (there is no missing portion).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the other display (hereinafter also referred to as non-screen split display). In the example of FIG. 124 (C), this boundary is located on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), a boundary character appearance effect is executed. In this boundary character appearance effect, a character image XG5 is displayed on the display screen 7a at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display. This character image XG5 is displayed at a boundary different from the character XG4. In the example of FIG. 124 (D), this boundary is located on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image XG5 represents a character “intense Atsu” indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), an effect effect is executed. In this effect effect, the effect image XG8 is displayed at the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display. This effect image XG8 is moving at the boundary portion in a fluid manner. This effect image XG8 may be continuously arranged around the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display, or may be arranged around the boundary between the screen split display GW and the non-screen split display. May be arranged in a specific manner.
In this effect effect, a character image XG7 is displayed in the screen break display GW. In the character image XG7, the character ""!? "Is displayed, which suggests that it may be a big hit. Further, in the missing part character appearance effect, the character XG4 and the character image XG5 move at the boundary between the screen break display GW and the non-screen break display.
After the boundary character appearance effect, a predetermined effect such as the above-described battle effect or super reach effect is executed.

In the cracking effects A to D, another effect (such as another cracking effect) may be incorporated into one effect.
Further, in the cracking effects A to D, a predetermined image (for example, a chance image or a character) as well as a rush suggestion display XG1 and an acquired ball display XG2 is broken (deleted) by the screen cracking display GW. ) May be displayed.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the crack effect.
[Effect 1]
In the cracking effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying various images on the display screen 7a in the decorative symbol change effect, a screen breaking effect in which the screen breaking display GW is displayed is executed. In the screen cracking effect, part of the image such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the reserve icons 9B, 9C is partially displayed by the screen cracking display GW. According to this configuration, an image display having a different taste than usual is displayed by the loss display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the cracking effects A to D, in the screen cracking effect, part of the image including characters such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is defectively displayed by the screen cracking display GW. . According to this configuration, an image display having an unusual taste is displayed due to the defective display of the image including the character, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the cracking effects A to D, in the screen cracking effect, a part of the image including characters such as the rush suggestion display XG1, the acquired ball display XG2, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the characters of the non-screen cracking display are included. A part other than the image is displayed defectively by the screen break display GW. According to this configuration, an image display with an unusual taste is displayed by missing display of a portion other than the image including characters and the image including non-screen-broken display characters, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the cracking effects A to D, a character image XG5 is newly displayed at the boundary between the screen crack display GW and the non-screen crack display in the boundary character appearance effect. According to this configuration, a new character image is displayed at the boundary portion while the defective display is being performed, so that various displays are performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the cracking effects A to D, a character XG4 is newly displayed at the boundary between the screen cracking display GW and the non-screen cracking display in the boundary character appearance effect. According to this configuration, a new character is displayed at the boundary while the loss is displayed, so that various displays are performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the cracking effects BD, the character XG6 is newly displayed in the screen cracking display GW in the missing portion character appearance effect. According to this configuration, since the character XG6 is displayed in the screen break display GW, various displays are performed while the loss is displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, modified examples of the cracking effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the cracking effects A to D, the boundary character appearance effect is executed after the boundary character appearance effect. However, the boundary character appearance effect may be executed after the boundary character appearance effect.

[Modification 2]
In the cracking effects A to D, in the boundary character appearance effect, the character XG4 is displayed in front of the screen cracking display GW, but is not limited thereto, and is displayed behind the screen cracking display GW, and the character XG4 is displayed. May be displayed so as to be hidden by the screen break display GW.

[Modification 3]
In the cracking effects A to D, in the boundary character appearance effect, the character image XG5 is displayed in front of the screen cracking display GW, but is not limited thereto. A part of the image XG5 may be displayed so as to be hidden by the screen break display GW.

[Modification 4]
The cracking effects A to D have been executed in a probable change state (during a rush (during a continuous chan)) that is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be executed. In this case, the screen break display GW loses a predetermined image.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
In some cases, the first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed,
The first display effect is an effect for displaying a predetermined display area,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a loss display for displaying a part of the predetermined display area as if it were lost,
A combined effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XG-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-1,
The predetermined display area has a character area including a character,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect is performed in which a part of the character area of the predetermined display area is defectively displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XG-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect is performed in which a part of the character area of the predetermined display area and a part of the predetermined display area other than the character area are defectively displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XG-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-3,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, at a first boundary between a defective display area in which the predetermined display area is defectively displayed and a non-defective display area in which the predetermined display area is not defectively displayed. An effect to make a new character appear,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XG-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-4,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect is performed in which a new character appears at a second boundary between the defective display area and the non-defective display area in the predetermined display area.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

[Aspect XG-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-5,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, an effect is performed in which a new character appears in the defective display area of the predetermined display area.
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  Hereinafter, the meter / button effect will be described with reference to FIGS. This meter button effect is an effect that can be executed in connection with the change display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “special symbol”). This is executed at the start of the special symbol variable display, at the start of the decorative symbol variable effect, during the decorative symbol variable effect, during the reach effect (super reach effect), and the like. More specifically, in this meter / button effect, the button image is displayed while the meter image is being displayed, and the meter value of the meter image is increased in association with the operation of the effect button by the player. It is a production that suggests the degree.

[Meter button effect A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the meter / button effect A.
In the meter / button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. FIG. 125 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 125 (A). In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed. During the execution of the reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter region EM3A (hatched portions shown in FIG. 125 (D) and the like to be described later), and the meter region EM3A is provided in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. The meter value is shown by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative pattern in the reach state shown in FIG. 125 (B) and displayed as a button image BOG. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, a character SIG of “repeated hit!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left and right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an effect of an operation instruction for causing the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in association with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Specifically, when the player starts the operation of the effect button 63 (continuous tapping) according to the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 125 (C), the display screen 7a displays the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG. A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery. The moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH has an afterimage like a fireball. While moving in all directions while leaving, some (or all) of the finally generated moving display objects IH reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) increases when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, and the meter value increases. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot, that is, indicates whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) is a jackpot or a reach loss. In this example, a state in which the meter value has increased by about 2/3 is shown. In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the flange below the button image BOG. The meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from when the button operation instruction effect is displayed. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (E), a jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot suggestion effect is a meter effect shown in FIG. 125 (D), and shows that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full as a result of the player operating the effect button 63. In other words, this jackpot suggestion effect suggests that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) will be a jackpot because the meter value is full. In the jackpot suggestion effect, a character MGL of MAX (indicating a jackpot) indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL of MAX, it is possible to make the player foresee a big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the reach effect (the fluctuation) illustrated in FIG. 125 (B) has a jackpot. Here, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, a loss suggestion effect shown in FIG. 125 (G) may be executed instead of the jackpot suggestion effect shown in FIG. 125 (E). This loss suggestion effect is that in the meter effect shown in FIG. 125 (D), as a result of the player operating the effect button 63, the meter value of the meter image EM1A does not become full as shown in FIG. 125 (G). Is performed when In this example, a state where the meter value has increased by about 程度 is shown. That is, in the loss suggestion effect, since the meter value does not become full, it indicates that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) is a loss (reach loss). In the loss suggestion effect, a character MLL of LOSE indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (indicating loss) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLL “LOSE”, it is possible to make the player foresee that a big hit will not be made.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss design stop effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 125 (A) is lost (reach loss) after reaching the reach in FIG. 125 (B). . In the present example, “757” is shown in the lost symbol arrangement.

[Meter button effect B]
FIG. 126 is a view for explaining the meter / button effect B.
In the meter button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 126A shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 126 (A). In this example, “8 ↓ 8” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, this reach symbol array is "8 ↓ 8", when the jackpot symbol array "888", is a symbol array that usually becomes a jackpot, the normal jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times the special symbol changes The game state is in the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high-base state) until the game is performed 100 times, and thereafter the game state is in the low-probability low-base state (normal state).
In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed. During the execution of the reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A includes a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter region EM3A (hatched portions shown in FIG. 126 (D) and the like described later), and the meter region EM3A is provided in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. The meter value is shown by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the reach state decorative pattern shown in FIG. 126 (B) and displayed as a button image BOG. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, a character SIG of “repeated hit!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left and right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an effect of an operation instruction for causing the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in association with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Specifically, when the player starts operation (continuous tapping) of the effect button 63 according to the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 126 (C), the display screen 7a displays the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG. A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery. The moving display object IH is generated each time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH has an afterimage like a fireball. While moving in all directions while leaving, some (or all) of the finally generated moving display objects IH reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. The meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter value increases as the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value indicates the expectation degree of the jackpot, that is, whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 126 (B) is a jackpot or a reach loss. In this example, a state in which the meter value has increased by about 2/3 is shown. The meter value (hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126 (D) is displayed, for example, in blue.
In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the collar portion below the button image BOG. The meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from the display of the button operation instruction effect, and when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 runs out, the meter value is displayed. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (E), a probable change big hit suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This probable jackpot suggestion effect is a meter effect shown in FIG. 126 (D), which indicates that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full as a result of the player operating the effect button 63. That is, in the probability change jackpot suggestion effect, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 126 (B) becomes a jackpot because the meter value is full. Here, the color of the meter value (cross-hatched portion) shown in FIG. 126 (E) is higher in expectation than blue (a privilege more advantageous than blue) is given from blue shown in FIG. 126 (D). For example, it changes to red and is displayed. In other words, in the stochastic jackpot suggestion effect, the reach symbol array “8 ↓ 8” that normally becomes a jackpot in the reach effect shown in FIG. 126 (B) is shown because the color of the meter value has changed from blue to red. Despite this, it suggests that the result will be a jackpot. Note that the probability change jackpot is a jackpot in which after the jackpot game ends, the game state becomes a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy-high-base state) until the gaming state next hits. In other words, this stochastic jackpot suggestion effect indicates that the meter value is full and that the color of the meter value has changed from blue to red, resulting in a stochastic jackpot. In addition, in the probable change big hit suggestion effect, a character MGL of MAX indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is full (indicating a big hit) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MGL of MAX, it is possible to make the player foresee a big hit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (F), a normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect indicates that the result of the reach effect (the fluctuation) illustrated in FIG. 126 (B) is temporarily stopped at the normal jackpot symbol. In other words, in the normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect, the “888” as the normal jackpot symbol array is not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R swing slightly up and down (2, 3 frames). Has been temporarily stopped. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (G), a full rotation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this full rotation effect, “888” as the normal jackpot symbol array temporarily stopped in the normal jackpot symbol temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 126 (F) is synchronized with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As shown by an arrow YA, an effect is performed in which the player scrolls down at a low speed so as to be visible. Therefore, in this full rotation effect, only the big hit symbol arrangement is sequentially displayed on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (H), a certain-variable big-hit decision effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the probability variation jackpot confirmation effect, it is shown that “777” as the probability variation jackpot symbol array has been confirmed and stopped as a result of the full rotation effect shown in FIG. 126 (G). In other words, the once-stopped normal big hit symbol is promoted to the positively changing big hit symbol by the full rotation effect. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "Surely change big hit!" Are displayed. The player is convinced of the certainty big hit by the certainty changing big hit decision effect.

[Meter button effect C]
FIG. 127 is a view for explaining the meter / button effect C.
In the meter button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative design variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in the left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in the middle design display area, and a right decorative design 8R is provided in the right design display area. Is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. In addition, FIG. 127 (A) shows that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This reach effect shows a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement in the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 127 (A). In this example, “7 ↓ 7” is shown in the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed. During the execution of the reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter region EM3A (hatched portions shown in FIG. 127 (D) and the like to be described later), and the meter region EM3A is inside the meter frame EM2A for each memory. The meter value is shown by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the decorative pattern in the reach state shown in FIG. 127 (B) and displayed as a button image BOG. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, a character SIG of “repeated hit!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the left and right center of the display screen 7a. With this button operation instruction effect, an effect of an operation instruction for causing the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in association with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Specifically, when the player starts the operation of the effect button 63 (continuous tapping) according to the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 127 (C), on the display screen 7a, the button image BOG itself or the button image BOG is displayed. A moving display object IH is generated from the periphery. The moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH has an afterimage like a fireball. While moving in all directions while leaving, some (or all) of the finally generated moving display objects IH reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) increases when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, and the meter value increases. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value indicates the expectation degree of the jackpot, that is, whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 127 (B) is a jackpot or a reach loss. In this example, a state in which the meter value has increased by about 2/3 is shown. In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the flange below the button image BOG. The meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from when the button operation instruction effect is displayed. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (E), a loss suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This loss suggestion effect is such that in the meter effect shown in FIG. 127 (D), as a result of the player operating the effect button 63, the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full as shown in FIG. 127 (E). Is performed when In this example, a state where the meter value has increased by about 程度 is shown. That is, in the loss suggestion effect, since the meter value is not full, it is suggested that the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 127 (B) is a loss (reach loss). In the loss suggestion effect, a character MLL of LOSE indicating that the meter value of the meter image EM1A is not full (indicating loss) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character MLL “LOSE”, it is possible to make the player foresee that a big hit will not be made.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), a lost symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol temporary stop effect indicates that the result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 127 (A) is temporarily stopped at the lost symbol after reaching the reach in FIG. 127 (B). ing. In other words, in the lost symbol temporary stop effect, the lost symbol array “757” is not completely stopped, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are slightly suspended (two or three frames) vertically. It has become.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (G), on the display screen 7a, a resurrection accessory effect is executed. In this resurrection role production, in the state in which the loss pattern array “757” is temporarily stopped in the loss pattern temporary stop production shown in FIG. 127 (F), the second movable role 15 ( 1) on the display screen 7a to the center advance position. In a state in which the second movable auditorium 15 has advanced to the center advance position, the second movable auditorium 15 includes a part of “7” of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R and a part of the decorative symbol 8C in the lost symbol array “757”. All of "5" are covered invisibly. However, "7" of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R is partially covered in a legible manner so that the player can recognize that "7" from the uncovered portion. With this resurrection role production, the player foreseen that he will be resurrected from a loss to a jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (H), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot determination effect, as a result of the resurrection agent effect shown in FIG. 127 (G), when the second movable object 15 retreats from the center advance position to the home position, it has been temporarily stopped in the lost symbol array “757”. This indicates that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have changed to the jackpot symbol array “777” and have been confirmed and stopped. In other words, the losing symbol that has been stopped temporarily changes into a jackpot symbol due to the revival role product effect. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

[Meter Button Direction D]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the meter / button effect D.
In the meter button effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), a time-saving (electric support) start effect performed when the big hit game ends. In this time-saving start effect, the character "Time reduction!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and under the character "Time reduction!" Is displayed. In the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR, the character "Right-handed" is displayed. The player, when prompted by the display of the right-handed arrow YAR and right-handed, wins the game ball in the second starting port 21 (electrically-powered support) in which the electric chew 22 is frequently opened to facilitate winning. Can be done. Then, when a game ball wins in the second start-up opening 21, on the display screen 7a, a variation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R synchronized with the variation display of the second special symbol in the time saving state is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), a reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, in the time reduction state, the game ball wins in the second starting port 21 and the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array. This is shown. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown as the reach symbol array. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters of “REACH!” Are displayed. In the decorative design change effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L is provided in a left design display area, a middle decorative design 8C is provided in a middle design display area, and a right decorative design is provided in a right design display area. 8R is displayed. The stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R is such that the left decorative symbol 8L stops first, the right decorative symbol 8R stops next, and finally the middle decorative symbol 8C stops. Note that FIG. 128B shows that the decorative symbol 8CR is changing (scrolling downward).
During the execution of the reach effect, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing. The meter image EM1A has a meter frame EM2A having a plurality of memories and a meter region EM3A (hatched portions shown in FIG. 128 (D) and the like described later), and the meter region EM3A is provided in the meter frame EM2A for each memory. The meter value is shown by moving. The meter image EM1A has a rectangular shape and is arranged vertically on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, an image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle are displayed by switching to the decorative pattern in the reach state shown in FIG. 128 (B). Here, in this battle effect, a situation is shown in which the ally character CRA makes a first strike against the enemy character CRB. In other words, in this battle effect, the character who made the first strike wins the battle, that is, the character who wins the first strike suggests a character who wins the first strike. Therefore, in this battle effect, it is suggested that the ally character CRA wins the battle. In the battle effect, the meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot, that is, whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 128 (B) is a jackpot or a loss. In this example, a state in which the meter value has increased by about 2/3 is shown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), a jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the jackpot suggestion effect, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), and the ally character CRA wins, and the meter value of the meter image EM1A becomes full. Is shown. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the meter value becomes full. And, in the jackpot suggestion effect, the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 125 (B) suggests that the jackpot is full because the meter value is full. In the center of the display screen 7a, a character "WIN!" Indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed together with the ally character CRA. The display of the word “WIN!” And the filling of the meter value make it possible for the player to think that a big hit (a privilege advantageous to the player is given).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the reach effect (the fluctuation) illustrated in FIG. Here, “777” is shown as the jackpot symbol arrangement. In addition, above the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "big hits!" Are displayed. With this jackpot confirmation effect, the player is convinced of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (F) may be executed instead of the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C). In this battle effect, an image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle are displayed by switching to the decorative pattern in the reach state shown in FIG. 128 (B). Here, in this battle effect, a state is shown in which the enemy character CRB makes a first strike against the ally character CRA. In other words, in this battle effect, the character who made the first strike wins the battle, that is, the character who wins the first strike suggests a character who wins the first strike. Therefore, in this battle effect, it is suggested that the enemy character CRB wins the battle. In the battle effect, the meter value (hatched portion) of the meter image EM1A increases when the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Then, the degree of increase in the meter value indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot, that is, whether the result of the reach effect shown in FIG. 128 (B) is a jackpot or a loss. In this example, a state in which the meter value has increased by about 1/3 is shown. That is, in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (F), it can be known from the degree of increase of the meter value that the enemy character CRB is more dominant in the battle than the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (G), a button operation instruction effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63, and is switched to the image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle as shown in FIG. 128 (F), and the button image BOG is displayed. Is displayed. This button operation instruction effect is an effect performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a first strike as in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (F). Therefore, when the ally character CRA makes a first strike as in the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), as described above, after the battle effect shown in FIG. 128 (C), FIG. ) Is performed. Specifically, in this button operation instruction effect, a character SIG of “continuous hit!” Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a on the left and right. With this button operation instruction effect, an effect of an operation instruction for causing the player to press down the effect button 63 is executed. In the button operation instruction effect, the meter image EM1A is continuously displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a meter effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This meter effect is an effect of increasing the meter value of the meter image EM1A in association with the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. Note that this meter effect is also an effect performed only when the enemy character CRB makes a first strike. Specifically, in the meter effect, when the player starts the operation (continuous tapping) of the effect button 63 by the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 128 (G), the display screen 7a displays the button image BOG itself or A moving display object IH is generated around the button image BOG. The moving display object IH is generated every time the player operates the effect button 63 (for example, each time the effect button 63 is pressed a predetermined number of times), and the generated moving display object IH has an afterimage like a fireball. While moving in all directions while leaving, some (or all) of the finally generated moving display objects IH reach the display area of the meter image EM1A so as to jump into the meter frame EM2A. In the meter image EM1A, the meter value (hatched portion) increases when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A. That is, when the moving display object IH reaches the display area of the meter image EM1A, the meter area EM3A moves in the meter frame EM2A for each memory, and the meter value increases. In this example, the meter value is shown to have increased from about 1/3 shown in FIG. 128 (G) to about 2/3. In addition, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed on the flange below the button image BOG. The meter MAT is displayed such that the meter value (cross-hatched portion) increases with the elapsed time from when the button operation instruction effect is displayed. Is displayed to be full. Then, when the meter effect is completed, after that, effects similar to the effects shown in FIGS. 125 (E) to 125 (H) are performed, but the description is omitted here.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the meter button effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the button image is displayed during the display of the meter image, and the meter value of the meter image is increased in association with the operation of the effect button by the player. It is configured to indicate the jackpot expectation degree by the degree of increase of the meter value. (For example, if the meter value rises to the full level, a jackpot determination is suggested (the higher the meter value, the easier it is to give a benefit advantageous to the player)). According to this configuration, in order to increase the meter value, the player can skillfully operate the effect button as instructed to perform technical intervention. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, a moving display object is generated from a button image or from around the button image in association with the operation of the effect button by the player, and The meter value is configured to increase when the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image. According to this configuration, when the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image, the meter value increases, so that the player is delighted with whether the moving display object reaches the display area of the meter image. Become. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect with a high visual effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the moving display object is configured to be generated each time the player operates the effect button. According to this configuration, in order to generate more moving display objects and increase the meter value, it is possible for the player to perform more technical operations (continuous tapping) on the effect button and to perform technical intervention. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, a battle effect in which the ally character on the player side and the enemy character battle during the display of the meter image is performed. The meter value of the meter image is filled up without displaying the image to indicate the jackpot determination. According to this configuration, the player is delighted with the movement of the ally character in the battle effect, and watches the battle effect with great interest in whether or not the ally character wins. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, when the display mode (color) of the meter value changes, the result is that despite the fact that the reach symbol arrangement that usually becomes a jackpot is shown. Is configured to suggest a probable jackpot. According to this configuration, the player gazes at the meter image with great interest in whether or not the display mode (color) of the meter value changes. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, when a predetermined accessory has advanced so as to cover a part of the lost symbol array invisibly while the lost symbol array is displayed. The displayed lost symbol array is configured to change to the big hit symbol array when the accessory is retracted from the advanced position, that is, when the symbol array is completely visible. According to this configuration, the player pays close attention to whether or not the accessory is movable in a state where the lost symbol arrangement is displayed. In particular, in the case where the losing pattern arrangement is a reach losing pattern arrangement, and when the accessory covers a part of the reach losing pattern arrangement invisibly, if the same pattern forming the reach is covered in a readable manner, Can be more strongly anticipated to be a big hit. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Hereinafter, a modified example of the meter button effect will be described.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, the meter image EM1A is displayed at a predetermined timing during execution of the reach effect. At the same time as, or before or after the reach is established. In addition, at the time of the reach, the reach is not displayed in the decorative pattern, but it may be displayed small at both corners of the display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, it is suggested that a jackpot is reached when the meter value is full, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, even when the meter value does not become full, or when the meter value becomes equal to or more than a predetermined value, it may be suggested that a jackpot will occur.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, when the color of the meter value changes, it is suggested that the probability of changing the jackpot is large, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, not only the color but also a change in the display mode, such as the shape and size of the meter value, may indicate a probability of a large hit. Further, the present invention is not limited to the probability change jackpot, but may indicate other benefits. Further, an image such as a character (for example, MAX) displayed together with the meter image when the color of the meter value changes may be changed to the same color as the meter value. Furthermore, the timing at which the color of the meter value changes is arbitrary, for example, it may be changed while the meter value is increasing, or if the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button is equal to or less than a predetermined time. It may be changed, may be changed when the meter value increases by a predetermined value or more, or may be changed when the meter value becomes full.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, after the temporary stop at the losing symbol, the losing symbol changes (revives) to the big hit symbol by moving the character, but the present invention It is not limited to this. For example, after a temporary stop at a lost symbol, the symbol may be changed (revived) again by changing again (pseudo-run). Alternatively, after a temporary stop at the lost symbol, when a predetermined image such as cut-in is displayed, the image may be changed to a big hit symbol (revived).

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, in the battle effect, the character who made the first strike wins the battle, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a character that has performed a predetermined technique may win a battle, or a character that has performed a continuous technique may win a battle. Alternatively, a character who defends a given technique and strikes back may win the battle. That is, the character who wins the battle may be any character that has performed the predetermined mode.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 128, in the button operation instruction effect, the player is caused to repeatedly hit the effect button, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the instruction content of the button operation may be determined in association with the type of the ally character appearing in the battle effect (for example, consecutive hits when the ally character is A, and long press when the ally character is B). Further, a player may be caused to perform a plurality of types of button operations. For example, a single button operation instruction effect may be used to issue a plurality of types of button operation instructions such as continuous hitting, long pressing, and one blow.

[Example of embodiment]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect F5-1]
Production means capable of executing a plurality of productions,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
An effect button that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine with
One of the plurality of indications is a first indication;
The first display is a display of a meter image,
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display of a button image,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is to display the button image during the display of the meter image, to increase the meter value of the meter image in relation to the operation of the effect button of the player, the degree of increase of the meter value Suggests jackpot expectations,
A gaming machine characterized by that:
[Aspect F5-2]
In the first effect, a moving display object is generated from the button image or from around the button image in association with the operation of the effect button by the player, and the meter value of the meter image is the moving display object. Rises by reaching the display area of the meter image,
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-1, characterized in that:
[Aspect F5-3]
The moving display object is generated each time the player operates the effect button,
The gaming machine according to aspect F5-2, characterized in that:
[Aspect F5-4]
If the meter value of the previous meter image is full, suggesting jackpot confirmation,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes F5-1 to F5-3.
[Aspect F5-5]
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is to perform a battle effect in which the ally character on the player side and the enemy character battle during the display of the meter image, and display the button image when the ally character wins. Without filling the meter value of the previous meter image to suggest a jackpot confirmation,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes F5-1 to F5-4.
[Other Modifications]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than those described above may be included.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a spinning type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine, instead of a pachinko gaming machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit operated by the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as the operation unit operated by the player. . Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a display effect may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is produced using an image representing the sword member 64. The display effect may be executed, or a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

  The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine without a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

  In addition, among the plurality of effect examples and / or modified examples described above, two or more effect examples and / or modified examples may be combined. Further, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-described display effect may be executed by the sub-display device.

  Although the present embodiment has been described based on the embodiment and the modified examples, the embodiment of the above-described embodiment is for facilitating understanding of the present embodiment, and does not limit the present embodiment. This embodiment can be changed and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and its equivalents are included in this embodiment.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (Hold icon)
9C: The reserved image (reserved icon)
14: first movable role 15: second movable role 18: third movable role 20: first starting port (first entrance port)
21 ... 2nd starting port (2nd entrance)
81: game control microcomputer 91: effect control microcomputer 101: image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A movable movable object having transparency,
An image display area capable of displaying an image,
The movable character is movable in front of the image display area,
By moving the movable character and the timer image displayed in the image display area in conjunction with each other, an interlocking effect in which the moving timer image is visible through the moving movable character can be visually recognized. executable der is,
After the interlocking effect, the timer image displayed at a predetermined position in the image display area via the movable role stopped at a predetermined position becomes visible, and the timer value of the timer image becomes a predetermined value. Later, the movable role and the timer image move in conjunction again,
A gaming machine characterized by that:

Images